Compass
OWNER’S MANUAL
Second Edition
Printed in the U.S.A.
19MP-126-AB
©2018 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved.
Jeep is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC.
2019
Compass
2019
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name
FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name
FCA Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-
drinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public trans-
portation.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident.
Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are
slower, and your judgment is impaired when you
have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
features and equipment that are either standard or op-
tional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a
description of features and equipment that are no longer
available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please
disregard any features and equipment described in this
manual that are not on this vehicle.
FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design
and specifications, and/or make additions to or improve-
ments to its products without imposing any obligation
upon itself to install them on products previously manu-
factured.
Copyright © 2018 FCA US LLC
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
1
INTRODUCTION ...................................................................3
2
GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS ......................................................7
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE ...................................................13
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL .........................................103
5
SAFETY ........................................................................137
6
STARTINGANDOPERATING.........................................................227
7
INCASEOFEMERGENCY ...........................................................321
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE .....................................................387
9
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ........................................................441
10
MULTIMEDIA ....................................................................451
11
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE ............................................................529
12
INDEX..........................................................................535
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
INTRODUCTION
CONTENTS
䡵 INTRODUCTION .........................4
䡵 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL ...............4
▫ Essential Information ......................4
▫ Symbols ...............................4
䡵 ROLLOVER WARNING .....................5
䡵 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS ................6
䡵 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS .....6
1
INTRODUCTION
Congratulations on selecting your new FCA US LLC ve-
hicle. Be assured that it represents precision workmanship,
distinctive styling, and high quality.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assis-
tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you
with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle. It is
supplemented by Warranty Information, and various
customer-oriented documents. Please take the time to read
these publications carefully. Following the instructions and
recommendations in this manual will help assure safe and
enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
NOTE: After reviewing the owner information, it should
be stored in the vehicle for convenient referencing and
remain with the vehicle when sold.
When it comes to service, remember that your authorized
dealer knows your Jeep® vehicle best, has factory-trained
technicians and genuine MOPAR® parts, and cares about
your satisfaction.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Essential Information
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the items
of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and illustra-
tions may differ from your vehicle’s equipment.
The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual
contains a complete listing of all subjects.
Symbols
Some vehicle components have colored labels whose sym-
bols indicate precautions to be observed when using this
component. Refer to “Warning Lights and Messages” in
“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for further
information on the symbols used in your vehicle.
4 INTRODUCTION
ROLLOVER WARNING
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate
than other types of vehicles. This vehicle has a higher
ground clearance and a higher center of gravity than many
passenger vehicles. It is capable of performing better in a
wide variety of off-road applications. Driven in an unsafe
manner, all vehicles can go out of control. Because of the
higher center of gravity, if this vehicle is out of control it
may roll over while some other vehicles may not.
Do not attempt sharp turns, abrupt maneuvers, or other
unsafe driving actions that can cause loss of vehicle con-
trol. Failure to operate this vehicle safely may result in a
collision, rollover of the vehicle, and severe or fatal injury.
Drive carefully.
Failure to use the driver and passenger seat belts provided
is a major cause of severe or fatal injury. In fact, the U.S.
government notes that the universal use of existing seat
belts could cut the highway death toll by 10,000 or more
each year and could reduce disabling injuries by two
million annually. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is
significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat
belt. Always buckle up.
Rollover Warning Label
1
INTRODUCTION 5
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owner’s Manual contains WARNINGS against oper-
ating procedures that could result in a collision, bodily
injury and/or death. It also contains CAUTIONS against
procedures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If
you do not read this entire Owner’s Manual, you may miss
important information. Observe all Warnings and Cau-
tions.
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may
lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or death.
6 INTRODUCTION
FRONT VIEW
Front View
1 — Hood/Engine Compartment 4 — Wheels/Tires
2 — Headlights 5 — Exterior Mirrors
3 — Windshield 6 — Doors
8 GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS
REAR VIEW
Rear View
1 — Rear Lights
2 — Rear Windshield Wiper
3 — Liftgate
2
GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS 9
INSTRUMENT PANEL
Instrument Panel
1 — Headlight Switch 6 — Windshield Wiper Lever
2 — Multifunction Lever 7 — Switch Panel
3 — Instrument Cluster Display Controls 8 — Uconnect System
4 — Instrument Cluster 9 — Climate Controls
5 — Speed Controls 10 — Glove Compartment
10 GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS
INTERIOR
Interior
1 — Door Locks 5 — Selec-Terrain Switch
2 — Door Handles 6 — Gear Selector
3 — Window Switches 7 — USB Port
4 — Seats 8 — Front Power Outlet
2
GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS 11
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 VEHICLE USER GUIDE — IF EQUIPPED .......17
䡵 KEYS .................................19
▫ Key Fobs .............................19
䡵 IGNITION SWITCH .......................24
▫ Keyless Enter-N-Go — Ignition ..............24
▫ Vehicle On Message .....................26
䡵 REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED . . .27
▫ How To Use Remote Start — If Equipped ......27
▫ Remote Start Abort Message On The Instrument
Cluster Display — If Equipped ..............28
▫ To Enter Remote Start Mode ................28
▫ To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The
Vehicle ...............................29
▫ To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The
Vehicle ...............................29
▫ Remote Start Comfort Systems — If Equipped . . .29
▫ Remote Start Windshield Wiper De–Icer Activation
— If Equipped..........................30
▫ General Information .....................30
䡵 SENTRY KEY ...........................30
▫ Replacement Keys .......................31
▫ Key Programming ......................31
▫ General Information .....................31
䡵 VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED . . .32
▫ To Arm The System .....................32
▫ To Disarm The System ...................32
▫ Rearming Of The System ..................33
▫ Security System Manual Override ............33
䡵 DOORS ...............................33
3
▫ Manual Door Locks ......................33
▫ Power Door Locks ......................34
▫ Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry .........35
▫ Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit ............39
▫ Child-Protection Door Lock System —
Rear Doors ............................39
䡵 SEATS ................................40
▫ Manual Adjustment (Front Seats) — If Equipped .41
▫ Manual Adjustment (Rear Seats) .............43
▫ Power Adjustment (Front Seats) — If Equipped . .45
▫ Front Heated Seats — If Equipped ...........47
䡵 HEAD RESTRAINTS ......................48
▫ Front Head Restraint Adjustment ............48
▫ Rear Head Restraints .....................49
䡵 STEERING WHEEL .......................50
▫ Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column ............50
▫ Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped.........51
䡵 MIRRORS ..............................52
▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped ......52
▫ Electrochromic Mirror — If Equipped .........52
▫ Outside Mirrors ........................53
▫ Power Adjustment Mirrors .................54
▫ Folding Mirrors .........................55
▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped .............55
▫ Illuminated Vanity Mirrors ................56
䡵 EXTERIOR LIGHTS .......................57
▫ Multifunction Lever .....................57
▫ Headlight Switch .......................57
▫ Daytime Running Lights (DRL) — If Equipped . .58
▫ High/Low Beam Switch ..................58
▫ Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control — If
Equipped .............................58
▫ Flash-To-Pass ..........................58
▫ Automatic Headlights — If Equipped .........59
14 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Headlight Time Delay ....................59
▫ Lights-On Reminder......................59
▫ Fog Lights — If Equipped .................60
▫ Turn Signals ...........................60
▫ Lane Change Assist ......................61
▫ Battery Saver Feature ....................61
䡵 INTERIOR LIGHTS .......................61
▫ Interior Courtesy Lights ..................61
䡵 WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS ........63
▫ Windshield Wiper Operation................63
▫ Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped ..........65
▫ Rear Window Wiper/Washer ...............66
▫ Windshield Wiper De-Icer — If Equipped ......67
䡵 CLIMATE CONTROLS .....................67
▫ Climate Controls Without A Touchscreen
Overview .............................67
▫ Climate Controls With A Touchscreen
Overview .............................71
▫ Climate Control Functions .................78
▫ Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) ........79
▫ Operating Tips .........................79
䡵 WINDOWS .............................82
▫ Power Window Controls ..................82
▫ Auto-Down Feature .....................82
▫ Auto-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection ....83
▫ Reset Auto-Up..........................83
▫ Window Lockout Switch...................84
▫ Wind Buffeting .........................84
䡵 POWER SUNROOF WITH POWER SHADE — IF
EQUIPPED .............................85
▫ Opening Sunroof ........................86
▫ Opening Sunroof — Vent ..................86
▫ Closing Sunroof.........................86
▫ Opening Power Shade ....................87
▫ Closing Power Shade .....................87
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 15
▫ Pinch Protect Feature .....................88
▫ Wind Buffeting .........................88
▫ Sunroof Maintenance ....................88
▫ Ignition Off Operation ....................88
䡵 HOOD ................................89
▫ Opening The Hood ......................89
▫ Closing The Hood .......................89
䡵 LIFTGATE .............................90
▫ Opening .............................90
▫ Closing ..............................91
▫ Power Liftgate — If Equipped ..............91
▫ Cargo Area Features .....................94
䡵 INTERNAL EQUIPMENT ...................97
▫ Storage ..............................97
▫ Cupholders ...........................98
▫ Power Outlets .........................99
▫ Power Inverter — If Equipped .............101
䡵 ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED ......101
16 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
VEHICLE USER GUIDE — IF EQUIPPED
Access your Owner’s Information right through your
Uconnect 4C or 4C NAV touchscreen system — If
Equipped.
To access the Vehicle User Guide on your Uconnect Touch-
screen: Press the Uconnect Apps button. From there, press
the Vehicle User Guide icon on your touchscreen. No
Uconnect registration is required.
NOTE: Vehicle User Guide features are not available while
the vehicle is moving. If you try to access while the vehicle
is in motion, the system will display: Feature not available
while the vehicle is in motion.
Uconnect 4C NAV With 8.4–inch Display Vehicle User
Guide Touchscreen Icon
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 17
Pre-Installed Features
Your User Guide — Up-
dated in real-time
Available when and where
you need it
Touchscreen convenience Customizable interface
Maintenance schedules
and information
Multilingual
Comprehensive icon &
symbol glossary
Once you launch your Vehicle User Guide, you will be able
to explore your warranty information and radio manual
when and where you need them. Your Uconnect system
displays the Vehicle User Guide on your touchscreen radio
to assist in better understanding your vehicle. There’s no
app to download, no phone to connect and no external
device needed for playback. Plus, it’s updated throughout
the year, in real-time, so it never goes out of date.
Features/Benefits
• Pre-installed on your Uconnect touchscreen radio
• Enhanced search and browsing capability
• Robust NAV application — If Equipped
• Add selected topics to a fast-access Favorites category
• Icon and symbol glossary
• Warranty information
• Crucial driver information and assistance:
Operating Instructions Maintenance Schedules
Warranty Information Emergency Procedures
Fluid Level Standards 911 Contact and More
Tip: When viewing a topic, tap the star icon to add it to
your Favorites, for easy access in the future.
18 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
KEYS
Key Fobs
Your vehicle uses either a key start ignition system or
keyless ignition system. The ignition system consists of a
key fob with a Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) and an ignition
switch. The keyless ignition system consists of a key fob
and Keyless Enter-N-Go button.
NOTE: The key fob may not be found if it is located next to
a mobile phone, laptop or other electronic device; these
devices may block the key fob’s wireless signal.
The key fob allows you to lock or unlock the doors and
liftgate from distances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m)
using a handheld key fob. The key fob does not need to be
pointed at the vehicle to activate the system.
NOTE: In case the ignition switch does not change with
the push of a button, the key fob may have a low or fully
depleted battery. A low key fob battery can be verified by
referring to the instrument cluster, which will display
directions to follow.
The keyless ignition key fob also includes an emergency
key, which stores in the rear of the key fob.
Key Fob
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 19
The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle should
the battery in the vehicle or the key fob go dead. The
emergency key is also for locking the glove compartment.
You can keep the emergency key with you when valet
parking.
To remove the emergency key from the keyless ignition key
fob, slide the mechanical latch at the top of the key fob
sideways with your thumb and then pull the key out with
your other hand.
To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate
Push and release the unlock button on the key fob once to
unlock the driver’s door or twice within five seconds to
unlock all doors and the liftgate.
All doors can be programmed to unlock on the first push of
the unlock button. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multi-
media” for further information.
The turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock
signal. The illuminated entry system will be activated.
1st Push Of Key Fob Unlock Button
This feature lets you program the system to unlock either
the driver’s door or all doors on the first push of the unlock
button on the key fob. To change the current setting, refer
to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further infor-
mation.
To Lock The Doors And Liftgate
Push and release the lock button on the key fob to lock all
doors and liftgate.
The turn signal lights will flash and the horn will chirp to
acknowledge the signal. Refer to “Uconnect Settings”
located in “Multimedia” for further programmable infor-
mation.
Emergency Key Removal
20 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Replacing The Battery In The Key With Remote
Control
The replacement battery is one CR2032 battery.
NOTE:
• Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply. See
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate for fur-
ther information.
• Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back
housing or the printed circuit board.
Key Fob:
1. Remove the emergency key by sliding the mechanical
latch on the back of the key fob sideways with your
thumb and pull the emergency key out with your other
hand.
Emergency Key Removal
1 — Emergency Key Release Button
2 — Emergency Key
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 21
2. Separate the key fob halves using the tip of the emer-
gency key, a #2 flat blade screwdriver, or a coin and
gently pry the two halves of the key fob apart. Make
sure not to damage the seal during removal.
Emergency Key Removal
Separating Case With A Coin
22 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
3. Remove the battery by turning the back cover over
(battery facing downward) and tapping it lightly on a
solid surface such as a table or similar and replace the
battery. When replacing the battery, match the + sign on
the battery to the + sign on the inside of the battery clip,
located on the back cover. Avoid touching the new
battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause battery
deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it with
rubbing alcohol.
4. To assemble the key fob case, snap the two halves
together.
Programming Additional Key Fobs
Programming the key fob may be performed by an autho-
rized dealer.
NOTE: Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it
cannot be repurposed and reprogrammed to another ve-
hicle.
Request For Additional Key Fobs
NOTE: Only key fobs that are programmed to the vehicle
electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle.
Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be
programmed to any other vehicle.
WARNING!
• Always remove the key fobs from the vehicle and
lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go —
Ignition, always remember to place the ignition in
the OFF mode.
Duplication of key fobs may be performed at an authorized
dealer. This procedure consists of programming a blank
key fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank key fob is one
that has never been programmed.
Key Fob Battery Replacement
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 23
NOTE: When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer System
serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an authorized
dealer.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all radio
frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, in-
cluding interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
IGNITION SWITCH
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Ignition
This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition with
the push of a button as long as the key fob is in the
passenger compartment.
The START/STOP push button ignition has three operating
modes. The three modes are OFF, ON/RUN, and START.
NOTE: If the ignition state/mode does not change with the
push of a button, the key fob may have a low or dead
battery. In this situation, a back up method can be used to
operate the ignition switch. Put the nose side (side opposite
of the emergency key) of the key fob against the ENGINE
START/STOP button and push to operate the ignition.
START/STOP Ignition Button
24 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
The push button ignition can be placed in the following
modes:
OFF
• The engine is stopped.
• Some electrical devices (e.g. Central locking, alarm, etc.)
are still available.
ON/RUN
• Driving mode.
• All the electrical devices are available.
START
• Start the engine.
WARNING!
• When exiting the vehicle, always remove the key fob
from the vehicle and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others
could be seriously or fatally injured. Children
should be warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in
a location accessible to children, and do not leave the
ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-
N-Go in the ON/RUN mode. A child could operate
power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
• Never remove the mechanical key while the vehicle
is moving, as the steering wheel will automatically
lock as soon as the key is turned. This also applies to
vehicles that are being towed.
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation for thieves. Al-
ways remove key fob from the vehicle and lock all
doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
NOTE: For further information, refer to ⬙Starting The
Engine⬙ in ⬙Starting And Operating.⬙
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 25
Vehicle On Message
When opening the driver’s door and the ignition is in
ON/RUN (engine not running) mode, a chime will sound
to remind you to place the ignition in the OFF mode. In
addition to the chime, the Vehicle On message will display
in the cluster.
NOTE: The power window switches and power sunroof (if
equipped) will remain active for three minutes after the
ignition is cycled to the OFF mode. Opening either front
door will cancel this feature. The time for this feature is
programmable.
WARNING!
• Before exiting a vehicle, always shift the automatic
transmission into PARK, apply the parking brake,
place the engine in the OFF position, remove the key
fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle. Always
make sure the keyless ignition is in “OFF” position,
remove the key fob from the vehicle and lock the
vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others
could be seriously or fatally injured. Children
should be warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in
a location accessible to children, and do not leave the
ignition in the ON/RUN mode. A child could operate
power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation for thieves. Al-
ways remove key fob from the vehicle and lock all
doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
26 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
This system uses the key fob to start the engine
conveniently from outside the vehicle while still
maintaining security. The system has a range of
approximately 328ft (100m).
NOTE:
• The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic trans-
mission to be equipped with Remote Start.
• Obstructions between the vehicle and key fob may
reduce this range.
How To Use Remote Start — If Equipped
Push remote start button on the key fob twice within five
seconds. Pushing the remote start button a third time shuts
the engine off.
To drive the vehicle, push unlock button, insert the key in
the ignition and turn to the ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
• With remote start, the engine will only run for 15
minutes (timeout) unless the ignition key is placed in the
ON/RUN position.
• The vehicle must be started with the key after two
consecutive timeouts.
All of the following conditions must be met before the
engine will remote start:
• Gear selector in PARK
• Doors closed
• Hood closed
• Liftgate closed
• Hazard switch off
• Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pushed)
• Battery at an acceptable charge level
• Check engine light shall not be present
• PANIC button not pushed
• System not disabled from previous remote start event
• Vehicle alarm system indicator flashing
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 27
• Ignition in STOP/OFF position
• Fuel level meets minimum requirement
• Vehicle security alarm is not signaling an intrusion
WARNING!
• Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Monox-
ide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon
Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious injury
or death when inhaled.
• Keep key fobs away from children. Operation of the
Remote Start System, windows, door locks or other
controls could cause serious injury or death.
Remote Start Abort Message On The Instrument
Cluster Display — If Equipped
The following messages will display in the instrument
cluster display if the vehicle fails to remote start or exits
remote start prematurely:
• Remote Start Aborted — Door Open
• Remote Start Aborted — Hood Open
• Remote Start Aborted — Fuel Low
• Remote Start Aborted — Liftgate Open
• Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle To Reset
• Remote Start Aborted — Too Cold
• Remote Start Aborted — Time Expired
The message will stay active until the ignition is turned to
the ON/RUN position.
To Enter Remote Start Mode
Push and release the remote start button on the key fob
twice within five seconds. The vehicle doors will lock, the
parking lights will flash, and the horn will chirp twice (if
programmed). Then, the engine will start, and the vehicle
will remain in the Remote Start mode for a 15-minute cycle.
NOTE:
• If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low, the
vehicle will start and then shut down in 10 seconds.
• The park lamps will turn on and remain on during
Remote Start mode.
• For security, power window and power sunroof opera-
tion (if equipped) are disabled when the vehicle is in the
Remote Start mode.
28 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
• The engine can be started two consecutive times with
the key fob. However, the ignition must be cycled by
pushing the START/STOP button twice (or the ignition
switch must be cycled to the ON/RUN position) before
you can repeat the start sequence for a third cycle.
To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The
Vehicle
Push and release the remote start button one time or allow
the engine to run for the entire 15-minute cycle.
NOTE: To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the system will
disable with a one time push of the remote start button for
two seconds after receiving a valid remote start request.
To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle
Before the end of 15-minute cycle, push and release the
unlock button on the key fob to unlock the doors and
disarm the vehicle security alarm (if equipped). Then, prior
to the end of the 15-minute cycle, push and release the
START/STOP button. If the START/STOP button is not
present, insert the key fob into the ignition switch and turn
the switch to the ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
• For vehicles not equipped with the Keyless Enter-N-Go
— Passive Entry feature, the ignition switch must be in
the ON/RUN position in order to drive the vehicle.
• For vehicles not equipped with the Keyless Enter-N-Go
— Passive Entry feature, the message “Remote Start
Active — Insert Key and Turn To Run” will show in the
instrument cluster display until you insert the key.
• For vehicles equipped with the Keyless Enter-N-Go —
Passive Entry feature, the message “Remote Start Active
— Push Start Button” will will show in the instrument
cluster display until you push the START button.
Remote Start Comfort Systems — If Equipped
When remote start is activated, the heated steering wheel
and driver heated seat features will automatically turn on
in cold weather. In warm weather, the driver vented seat
feature will automatically turn on when the remote start is
activated. These features will stay on through the duration
of remote start or until the ignition switch is cycled to the
ON/RUN position. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Mul-
timedia” for further information.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 29
Remote Start Windshield Wiper De–Icer Activation
— If Equipped
When remote start is active and the outside ambient
temperature is less than 40°F (4.4°C), the Windshield Wiper
De-Icer will be enabled. Exiting remote start will resume
previous operation, except if the Windshield Wiper De-Icer
is active. The Windshield Wiper De-Icer timer and opera-
tion will continue.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all radio
frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, in-
cluding interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
SENTRY KEY
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents unauthorized
vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The system does
not need to be armed or activated. Operation is automatic,
regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked.
The system uses a key fob, keyless push button ignition and
a RF receiver to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation.
Therefore, only key fobs that are programmed to the vehicle
can be used to start and operate the vehicle. The system
cannot reprogram a key fob obtained from another vehicle.
After turning the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position, the
vehicle security light will turn on for three seconds for a bulb
check. If the light remains on after the bulb check, it indicates
that there is a problem with the electronics. In addition, if the
light begins to flash after the bulb check, it indicates that
someone attempted to start the engine with an invalid key fob.
In the event that a valid key fob is used to start the engine but
there is an issue with the vehicle electronics, the engine will
start and shut off after two seconds.
If the vehicle security light turns on during normal vehicle
operation (vehicle running for longer than ten seconds), it
indicates that there is a fault in the electronics. Should this
occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible by an
authorized dealer.
30 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not compatible
with some aftermarket remote starting systems. Use of
these systems may result in vehicle starting problems
and loss of security protection.
All of the key fobs provided with your new vehicle have
been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
Replacement Keys
NOTE: Only key fobs that are programmed to the vehicle
electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle.
Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be
programmed to any other vehicle.
CAUTION!
• Always remove the key fobs from the vehicle and
lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go —
Ignition, always remember to place the ignition in
the OFF position.
NOTE: Duplication of key fobs may be performed at your
authorized dealer. This procedure consists of programming
a blank key fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank key fob
is one that has never been programmed.
When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer System serviced,
bring all vehicle keys with you to your authorized dealer.
Key Programming
Programming key fobs may be performed at an authorized
dealer.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all radio
frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2.
This device must accept any interference received, includ-
ing interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 31
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED
The vehicle security alarm monitors the vehicle doors,
hood, liftgate, and the Keyless Enter-N-Go — Ignition for
unauthorized operation. While the vehicle security alarm is
armed, interior switches for door locks and liftgate release
are disabled. If something triggers the alarm, the vehicle
security alarm will provide the following audible and
visible signals:
• The horn will pulse
• The turn signals will flash
• The vehicle security light in the instrument cluster will
flash
To Arm The System
Follow these steps to arm the vehicle security alarm:
1. Make sure the vehicle’s ignition is placed in the “OFF”
mode.
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Entry, make sure
the vehicle’s keyless ignition system is OFF.
2. Perform one of the following methods to lock the
vehicle:
• Push the lock button on the interior power door lock
switch with the driver and/or passenger door open.
• Push the lock button on the exterior Passive Entry
Door Handle with a valid key fob available in the same
exterior zone (refer to ⬙Doors⬙ in ⬙Getting To Know
Your Vehicle⬙ for further information).
• Push the lock button on the key fob.
3. If any doors are open, close them.
To Disarm The System
The vehicle security alarm can be disarmed using any of
the following methods:
• Push the unlock button on the key fob.
• Grasp the passive entry door handle to unlock the door,
refer to ⬙Doors⬙ in ⬙Getting To Know Your Vehicle⬙ for
further information.
• Cycle the ignition out of the off mode to disarm the
system.
32 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• The driver’s door key cylinder and the liftgate button on
the key fob cannot arm or disarm the vehicle security
alarm.
• The vehicle security alarm remains armed during power
liftgate entry. Pushing the liftgate button will not disarm
the vehicle security alarm. If someone enters the vehicle
through the liftgate and opens any door, the alarm will
sound.
• When the vehicle security alarm is armed, the interior
power door lock switches will not unlock the doors.
The vehicle security alarm is designed to protect your
vehicle. However, you can create conditions where the
system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previously
described arming sequences has occurred, the vehicle
security alarm will arm regardless of whether you are in
the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle and open a
door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs, disarm the
vehicle security alarm.
If the vehicle security alarm is armed and the battery
becomes disconnected, the vehicle security alarm will
remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the exterior
lights will flash, and the horn will sound. If this occurs,
disarm the vehicle security alarm.
Rearming Of The System
If something triggers the alarm, and no action is taken to
disarm it, the vehicle security alarm will turn the horn off
after approximately 90 seconds, and then the vehicle
security alarm will rearm itself.
Security System Manual Override
The vehicle security alarm will not arm if you lock the
doors using the manual door lock plunger.
DOORS
Manual Door Locks
To lock each door, rotate the door lock knob on each door
trim panel forward until the lock indicator is shown. To
unlock the front doors, pull the inside door handle to the
first detent or rotate the door lock button until the lock
indicator is hidden. To unlock the rear doors, rotate the
door lock button until the lock indicator is hidden.
If the door lock button is locked (lock indicator visible)
when you shut the door, the door will remain locked.
Therefore, make sure the key fob is not inside the vehicle
before closing the door.
NOTE: The manual door locks will not lock or unlock the
liftgate.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 33
WARNING!
• For personal security and safety in the event of a
collision, lock the vehicle doors before you drive as
well as when you park and exit the vehicle.
• When exiting the vehicle, always remove the key fob
from the vehicle and lock your vehicle. If equipped
with Keyless Enter-N-Go — Ignition, always make
sure the keyless ignition node is in “OFF” mode,
remove the key fob from the vehicle and lock the
vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may
cause severe personal injuries or death.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number
of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear
selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in
a location accessible to children, and do not leave the
ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-
N-Go — Ignition the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
Power Door Locks
A power door lock switch is located on each of the front
door trim panels. Use this switch to lock or unlock the
doors, liftgate and fuel door.
If you push the power door lock switch while the ignition
is in the ON/RUN position, and any door or the liftgate is
open, the power locks will not operate. This prevents you
from accidentally locking the key fob in the vehicle. Placing
the ignition in the OFF position or closing the doors and
liftgate will allow the locks to operate. If the driver door is
open, and the ignition is in the RUN position, a chime will
sound as a reminder to remove the key.
Power Door Lock Switch
34 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry
The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the vehi-
cle’s Remote Keyless Entry system and a feature of Keyless
Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry. This feature allows you to
lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) and fuel door without
having to push the key fob lock or unlock buttons.
NOTE:
• Passive Entry may be programmed ON/OFF; refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further infor-
mation.
• If wearing gloves on your hands, or if it has been
raining/snowing on the Passive Entry door handle, the
unlock sensitivity can be affected, resulting in a slower
response time.
• If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry and no door
is opened within 60 seconds, the vehicle will re-lock and
if equipped will arm the security alarm.
• The key fob may not be able to be detected by the
Passive Entry system if it is located next to a mobile
phone, laptop or other electronic device; these devices
may block the key fob’s wireless signal and prevent the
Passive Entry system from locking and unlocking the
vehicle.
To Unlock From The Driver’s Side
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the
driver’s door handle, grab the front driver door handle to
unlock the driver’s door automatically.
NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed, all
doors will unlock when you grab hold of the front driver’s
door handle. To select between “Unlock Driver Door 1st
Push” and “Unlock All Doors 1st Press,” refer to “Uconnect
Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.
Grab The Door Handle To Unlock
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 35
To Unlock From The Passenger Side
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the
passenger door handle, grab the front passenger door
handle to unlock all four doors and the liftgate automati-
cally.
NOTE: All doors will unlock when the front passenger
door handle is grabbed regardless of the driver’s door
unlock preference setting (“Unlock Driver Door 1st Press”
or “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”).
Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry Key
Fob In Vehicle (FOBIK-Safe)
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a
Passive Entry key fob inside your vehicle, the Passive Entry
system is equipped with an automatic door unlock feature
which will function if the ignition switch is in the OFF
position.
FOBIK-Safe only executes in vehicles with passive entry.
There are three situations that trigger a FOBIK-Safe search
in any passive entry vehicle:
• A lock request is made by a valid Passive Entry key fob
while a door is open.
• A lock request is made by the Passive Entry door handle
while a door is open.
• A lock request is made by the door panel switch while
the door is open.
When any of these situations occur, after all open doors are
shut, the FOBIK-Safe search will be executed. If it finds a
Passive Entry key fob inside the car and it does not find
any Passive Entry key fobs outside the car, then the car will
unlock and alert the customer.
NOTE: The vehicle will only unlock the doors when a valid
Passive Entry key fob is detected inside the vehicle. The
vehicle will not unlock the doors when any of the follow-
ing conditions are true:
• The doors are manually locked using the door lock
knobs.
• There is a valid Passive Entry key fob outside the vehicle
and within 5 ft (1.5m) of either Passive Entry door
handle.
• Three attempts are made to lock the doors using the
door panel switch and then close the doors.
To Unlock/Enter The Liftgate
The liftgate passive entry unlock feature is built into
liftgate handle release. With a valid Passive Entry key fob
within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the liftgate, push the electronic liftgate
release to open with one fluid motion.
36 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
To Lock The Liftgate
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the
liftgate, push the passive entry lock button located to the
right of liftgate handle release.
NOTE: The liftgate passive entry lock button will lock all
doors and the liftgate. The liftgate unlock feature is built
into the electronic liftgate release.
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors And Liftgate
With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the driver or passenger front door handles, push
the passive entry lock button located on the outside door
handle, to lock the vehicle doors and liftgate.
NOTE: DO NOT grab the door handle, when pushing the
door handle lock button. This could unlock the door(s).
Electronic Liftgate Release/Liftgate Passive Entry Location Push The Door Handle Button To Lock
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 37
NOTE:
• After pushing the door handle button, you must wait
two seconds before you can lock or unlock the doors,
using either Passive Entry door handle. This is done to
allow you to check if the vehicle is locked by pulling the
door handle without the vehicle reacting and unlocking.
• If Passive Entry is disabled using the Uconnect System,
the key protection described in ⬙Preventing Inadvertent
Locking of Passive Entry key fob in Vehicle⬙ remains
active/functional.
• The Passive Entry system will not operate if the key fob
battery is dead.
The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the lock
button located on the vehicle’s interior door panel.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all radio
frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, in-
cluding interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
DO NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking
38 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit
The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with
power door locks if:
1. The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is enabled.
2. All doors are closed.
3. The transmission gear selector was not in PARK, then is
placed in PARK.
4. Any door is opened.
Child-Protection Door Lock System — Rear Doors
To provide a safer environment for small children riding in
the rear seats, the rear doors are equipped with a Child-
Protection Door Lock system.
To use the system, open each rear door, use a flat blade
screwdriver (or emergency key) and rotate the dial to the
lock or unlock position. When the system on a door is
engaged, that door can only be opened by using the
outside door handle even if the inside door lock is in the
unlocked position.
NOTE:
• When the child lock system is engaged, the door can be
opened only by using the outside door handle even
though the inside door lock is in the unlocked position.
• After disengaging the Child-Protection Door Lock sys-
tem, always test the door from the inside to make certain
it is in the desired position.
• After engaging the Child-Protection Door Lock system,
always test the door from the inside to make certain it is
in the desired position.
Child-Protection Door Lock Function
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 39
• For emergency exit with the system engaged, rotate the
door lock button until the lock indicator is hidden
(unlocked position), roll down the window, and open
the door with the outside door handle.
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the rear doors can only be opened from
the outside when the Child-Protection locks are en-
gaged (locked).
SEATS
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the
vehicle.
WARNING!
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or
killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
In a collision, people riding in these areas are more
likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
40 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Manual Adjustment (Front Seats) — If Equipped
Manual Front Seat Forward/Rearward Adjustment
On models equipped with manual seats, the adjusting bar
is located at the front of the seats, near the floor.
While sitting in the seat, lift up on the bar and move the
seat forward or rearward. Release the bar once you have
reached the desired position. Then, using body pressure,
move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that the
seat adjusters have latched.
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
•
Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious injury or
death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt.
Front Seat Adjustment
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 41
Manual Seat Height Adjustment — If Equipped
The driver’s seat height can be raised or lowered by using
a lever, located on the outboard side of the seat. Pull
upward on the lever to raise the seat height or push
downward on the lever to lower the seat height.
Manual Front Seat Recline Adjustment
To adjust the seatback, lift the lever located on the outboard
side of the seat, lean back to the desired position and
release the lever. To return the seatback, lift the lever, lean
forward and release the lever.
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest. In
a collision you could slide under the seat belt, which
could result in serious injury or death.
Seat Height Adjustment
Recline Lever
42 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Fold-Forward Front Passenger Seat — If Equipped
This feature allows for extended cargo space. When the
seat is folded flat, it is an extension of the load floor surface
(allowing long cargo to fit from the rear hatch up to the
instrument panel). The fold-forward seat back has a soft-
back surface that you cannot use as a work surface when
the seat is folded forward and the vehicle is not in motion.
Pull upward on the recline lever to fold or unfold the seat.
NOTE: You may experience deformation in the seat cush-
ion from the seat belt buckles if the seats are left folded for
an extended period of time. This is normal and by simply
opening the seats to the open position, over time the seat
cushion will return to its normal shape.
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is dan-
gerous. The sudden movement of the seat could cause
you to lose control. Adjust any seat only while the
vehicle is parked.
Manual Adjustment (Rear Seats)
WARNING!
Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of the
seatback. This could impair visibility or become a
dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or collision.
60/40 Split Folding Rear Seat With Fold-Flat Feature
To provide additional storage area, each rear seat can be
folded flat. This allows for extended cargo space and still
maintains some rear seating room.
NOTE: Prior to folding the rear seat, it may be necessary to
position the front seat to its mid-track position. Also, be
sure that the front seats are fully upright and positioned
forward. This will allow the rear seat to fold down easily.
WARNING!
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 43
To Lower The Rear Seat
1. Pull the seatback release lever located on either side of
the upper outer edge of the seat.
2. Fold that side of the rear seatback completely forward.
To Raise The Rear Seat
NOTE: If interference from the cargo area prevents the
seatback from fully locking, you will have difficulty return-
ing the seat to its proper position.
Raise the seatback and lock it into place.
The release lever will show a red indicator while in the
unlocked position. Once the seat is locked in, the red
indicator will no longer be visible.
WARNING!
Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into
position the seat will not provide the proper stability
for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly
latched seat could cause serious injury.
Rear Seat Release Lever
1 — Seatback Release Levers
2 — Seat Belt Guide
44 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Power Adjustment (Front Seats) — If Equipped
Some models may be equipped with a power driver’s seat
and/or power passenger seat. The power seat switch and
power seat recliner switch are located on the outboard side
of the seat near the floor. Use the power seat switch to
adjust seat height, angle, or forward/rearward position.
Use the power seat recline switch to adjust the angle of the
seat back.
Forward Or Rearward Adjustment
The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward. Push
the seat switch forward or rearward, the seat will move in
the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the
desired position has been reached.
Height Adjustment
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull
upward or push downward on the seat switch, the seat will
move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch
when the desired position is reached.
Tilt Adjustment
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted up or down.
Pull upward or push downward on the front of the seat
switch and the front of the seat cushion will move in the
direction of the switch.
Power Seat Switch
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 45
Reclining The Seatback Forward Or Rearward
The seatback can be reclined both forward and rearward.
Push the seat recliner switch forward or rearward. The
seatback will move in the direction of the switch. Release
the switch when the desired position has been reached.
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest. In
a collision you could slide under the seat belt, which
could result in serious injury or death.
Power Lumbar — If Equipped
Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger seats
may be equipped with power lumbar. The power lumbar
switch is located on the outboard side of the power seat.
Push the switch forward or rearward to increase or de-
crease the lumbar support. Push the switch upward or
downward to raise or lower the lumbar support.
Power Seat Recliner Switch
Power Lumbar Switch
46 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Front Heated Seats — If Equipped
The front heated seats control buttons are located within
the Uconnect system. You can gain access to the control
buttons through the climate screen or the controls screen.
• Press the heated seat button
once to turn the HI
setting on.
• Press the heated seat button
a second time to turn
the LO setting on.
• Press the heated seat button
a third time to turn the
heating elements off.
If your vehicle is equipped with automatic temperature
controls with an integrated center stack, or manual tem-
perature controls, you’ll find the heated seat switches on
the switch bank below the radio screen.
If the HI level setting is selected, the system will automati-
cally switch to LO level after approximately 60 minutes of
continuous operation. At that time, the display will change
from HI to LO, indicating the change. The LO level setting
will turn off automatically after approximately 45 minutes.
NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated seats to
operate.
Vehicles With Remote Start — If Equipped
On models that are equipped with remote start, the heated
seats can be programmed to come on during a remote start.
This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect
system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for
further information.
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-
tion or other physical condition must exercise care
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns even
at low temperatures, especially if used for long
periods of time.
• Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion.
This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in
a seat that has been overheated could cause serious
burns due to the increased surface temperature of the
seat.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 47
HEAD RESTRAINTS
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury by
restricting head movement in the event of a rear impact.
Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top of the
head restraint is located above the top of your ear.
WARNING!
• All occupants, including the driver, should not oper-
ate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the head
restraints are placed in their proper positions in
order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event
of a crash.
• Head restraints should never be adjusted while the
vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle with the head
restraints improperly adjusted or removed could
cause serious injury or death in the event of a
collision.
NOTE: Do not reverse the head restraints (making the rear
of the head restraint face forward) in an attempt to gain
additional clearance to the back of your head.
Front Head Restraint Adjustment
Your vehicle is equipped with front four way driver and
passenger head restraints.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjustment
button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push
downward on the head restraint.
To adjust the head restraint forward, pull the top of the
head restraint toward the front of the vehicle as desired
and release. To adjust the head restraint rearward, pull the
top of the head restraint to the forward most position and
release. The head restraint will return to the rear most
position.
Head Restraint Adjustment Button
48 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The head restraints should only be removed by
qualified technicians, for service purposes only. If either of
the head restraints require removal, see an authorized
dealer.
WARNING!
• All occupants, including the driver, should not oper-
ate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the head
restraints are placed in their proper positions in
order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event
of a crash.
• Head restraints should never be adjusted while the
vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle with the head
restraints improperly adjusted or removed could
cause serious injury or death in the event of a
collision.
Rear Head Restraints
The rear head restraints have two positions: up or down.
When the center seat is being occupied, the head restraint
should be in the raised position. When there is no occupant
in the center seat, the head restraint can be lowered for
maximum visibility for the driver.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjustment
button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push
downward on the head restraint.
Outboard Head Restraint Adjustment Button
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 49
NOTE: The head restraints should only be removed by
qualified technicians, for service purposes only. If either of
the head restraints require removal, see an authorized
dealer.
WARNING!
ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the
vehicle to properly protect the occupants.
STEERING WHEEL
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward
or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or shorten the
steering column. The tilt/telescoping lever is located below
the steering wheel at the end of the steering column.
Center Head Restraint Adjustment Button
Tilt/Telescoping Lever
50 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
To unlock the steering column, push the control handle
downward (toward the floor). To tilt the steering column,
move the steering wheel upward or downward as desired.
To lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull the
steering wheel outward or push it inward as desired. To
lock the steering column in position, push the control
handle upward until fully engaged.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv-
ing with the steering column unlocked, could cause the
driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to follow
this warning may result in serious injury or death.
Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped
The steering wheel contains a heating element that helps
warm your hands in cold weather. The heated steering
wheel has only one temperature setting. Once the heated
steering wheel has been turned on, it will stay on until the
operator turns it off. The heated steering wheel may not
turn on when it is already warm.
The heated steering wheel control button is located on the
center instrument panel below the touchscreen, as well as
within the climate or controls screen of the touchscreen.
• Press the heated steering wheel button
once to turn
the heating element on.
• Press the heated steering wheel button
a second time
to turn the heating element off.
NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated steering
wheel to operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the heated
steering wheel can be programmed to come on during a
remote start.
This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect
system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for
further information.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 51
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-
tion, or other physical conditions must exercise care
when using the steering wheel heater. It may cause
burns even at low temperatures, especially if used
for long periods.
• Do not place anything on the steering wheel that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or steering
wheel covers of any type and material. This may
cause the steering wheel heater to overheat.
MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped
This is a single ball joint mirror that fixes to the windshield
button with a counter clockwise rotation. No tools are
needed for mounting. The mirror head can be adjusted left
and right, or tilted up and down for various drivers. The
mirror should be adjusted to center on the view through
the rear window.
Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be reduced
by moving the small control under the mirror to the night
position (toward the rear of the vehicle). The mirror should
be adjusted while set in the day position (toward the
windshield).
Electrochromic Mirror — If Equipped
This is a single ball joint mirror that fixes to the windshield
button with a counter clockwise rotation. No tools are
needed for mounting. The mirror head can be adjusted left
and right, or tilted up and down for various drivers. The
mirror should be adjusted to center on the view through
the rear window.
Adjusting Rearview Mirror
52 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare from
vehicles behind you.
NOTE:
• The Electrochromic Mirror feature is disabled when the
vehicle is in REVERSE to improve rear view viewing.
• The Electrochromic Mirror feature can be turned on or
off using the button located on the mirror.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
Outside Mirrors
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirror(s) to
center on the adjacent lane of traffic and a slight overlap of
the view obtained from the inside mirror.
NOTE: The passenger side convex outside mirror will give
a much wider view to the rear, and especially of the lane
next to your vehicle.
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than
they really are. Relying too much on your passenger
side convex mirror could cause you to collide with
another vehicle or other object. Use your inside mirror
when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in
the passenger side convex mirror.
Automatic Dimming Button
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 53
Power Adjustment Mirrors
The power mirror switch is located on the driver’s door
panel.
To adjust an exterior power mirror, select the right or left
side using the mirror selector switch, then push the mirror
adjustment switch in the desired direction indicated by the
direction arrows.
NOTE:
• To adjust the power mirrors, the ignition must be in the
ON/RUN position.
• Once the mirror is adjusted, rotate the control to the
neutral position to avoid accidental movements.
Power Mirror Switch
1 — Power Folding Mirror Switch
2 — Mirror Selector Switch
3 — Mirror Adjustment Switch
54 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Folding Mirrors
The exterior mirrors are hinged to allow the mirror to pivot
forward or rearward to help avoid damage. The mirror has
three detent positions: full forward, normal and full rear-
ward.
Power Folding Mirror — If Equipped
The switch for the power folding mirrors is located in the
power mirror switch.
Push the switch once and the mirrors will fold in, pushing
the switch a second time will return the mirrors to the
normal driving position.
Resetting The Power Folding Outside Mirrors
You may need to reset the power folding mirrors if the
following occurs:
• The mirrors are accidentally blocked while folding.
• The mirrors are accidentally manually folded/unfolded.
• The mirrors come out of the unfolded position.
• The mirrors shake and vibrate at normal driving speeds.
To reset the power folding mirrors: Fold and unfold them
by pushing the button (this may require multiple button
pushes). This resets them to their normal position.
Puddle Lamps — If Equipped
Located under the exterior mirrors is a small lamp that
illuminates the ground when the doors are unlocked with
the key fob or when the doors to the vehicle are open.
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This
feature will be activated whenever you turn on the
rear window defroster (if equipped).
Refer to “Climate Controls” in this section for further
information.
Folding Exterior Mirror
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 55
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors
An illuminated vanity mirror is located on each sun visor.
To use the mirror, rotate the sun visor down and swing the
mirror cover upward. The lights will turn on automatically.
Closing the mirror cover will turn off the light.
Sun Visor “Slide-On-Rod” Feature — If Equipped
The sun visor “Slide-On-Rod” feature allows for additional
flexibility in positioning the sun visor to block out the sun.
1. Fold down the sun visor.
2. Unclip the visor from the center clip.
3. Pivot the sun visor toward the side window.
4. Extend the sun visor blade for additional sun blockage.
NOTE: The sun visor blade can also be extended while the
sun visor is against the windshield for additional sun
blockage through the front of the vehicle.
Illuminated Vanity Mirror Cover
56 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
EXTERIOR LIGHTS
Multifunction Lever
The multifunction lever controls the operation of the turn
signals, headlight beam selection and passing lights. The
multifunction lever is located on the left side of the steering
column.
Headlight Switch
The headlight switch is located on the left side of the
instrument panel. This switch controls the operation of the
headlights, parking lights, automatic headlights — if
equipped, instrument panel lights, instrument panel light
dimming, interior lights and fog lights — if equipped.
Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the first detent for
parking light and instrument panel light operation. Rotate
the headlight switch to the second detent for headlight,
parking light and instrument panel light operation.
Multifunction Lever
Headlight Switch
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 57
Daytime Running Lights (DRL) — If Equipped
The Daytime Running Lights will turn on when the engine
is started and remain on unless the headlamps are turned
on or the ignition is turned OFF.
NOTE: If allowed by law in the country in which the
vehicle was purchased the Daytime Running Lights can be
turned on and off using the Uconnect System, refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further informa-
tion.
High/Low Beam Switch
Push the multifunction lever toward the instrument panel
to switch the headlights to high beams. Pulling the multi-
function lever back toward the steering wheel will return
the lights to low beams.
Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control — If
Equipped
The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control system
provides increased forward lighting at night by automat-
ing high beam control through the use of a digital camera
mounted on the inside rearview mirror. This camera de-
tects vehicle specific light and automatically switches from
high beams to low beams until the approaching vehicle is
out of view.
NOTE:
• The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control can be
turned on or off using the Uconnect System. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further infor-
mation.
• Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and taillights
of vehicles in the field of view will cause headlights to
remain on longer (closer to the vehicle). Also, dirt, film,
and other obstructions on the windshield or camera lens
will cause the system to function improperly.
• To opt out of the Advanced Auto High-Beam Sensitivity
Control (default) and enter Reduced High-Beam Sensi-
tivity Control (not recommended), toggle highbeam
lever 6 full on/off cycles within 10 seconds of ignition
ON. System will return to default setting upon ignition
off.
Flash-To-Pass
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This
will cause the high beam headlights to turn on, and remain
on, until the lever is released.
58 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped
This system automatically turns the headlights on or off
according to ambient light levels. To turn the system on,
rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the last detent for
automatic headlight operation. When the system is on, the
headlight time delay feature is also on. This means the
headlights will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you place
the ignition into the OFF position. To turn the automatic
system off, move the headlight switch out of the AUTO
position.
NOTE: The engine must be running before the headlights
will come on in the automatic mode.
Headlight Time Delay
This feature provides the safety of headlight illumination
for up to 90 seconds (programmable) when leaving your
vehicle in an unlit area.
To activate the delay feature, place the ignition in the OFF
position while the headlights are still on. Then, turn off the
headlights within 45 seconds. The delay interval begins
when the headlight switch is turned off.
If you turn the headlights or parking lights on, or place the
ignition in ACC or RUN, the system will cancel the delay.
If you turn the headlights off before the ignition, they will
turn off in the normal manner.
NOTE:
• The lights must be turned off within 45 seconds of
placing the ignition in the OFF position to activate this
feature. If the headlight switch is in the AUTO position
prior to turning the ignition OFF, there is no need to turn
the headlight switch to off to activate Headlight Delay.
• The headlight delay time is programmable using the
Uconnect System, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Mul-
timedia” for further information.
Lights-On Reminder
If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition
is in the OFF position, a chime will sound to alert the driver
when the driver’s door is opened.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 59
Fog Lights — If Equipped
The front fog light switch is built into the headlight switch.
To activate the front fog lights, turn on the parking lights or
the low beam headlights and push the headlight switch. To
turn off the front fog lights, either push the headlight
switch a second time or turn off the headlight switch.
An indicator light in the instrument cluster illuminates
when the fog lights are turned on.
NOTE: The fog lights will operate with the low beam
headlights or parking lights on. However, selecting the
high beam headlights will turn off the fog lights.
Turn Signals
Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows
on each side of the instrument cluster display flash to show
proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.
NOTE:
• If either light remains on and does not flash, or there is
a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside light
bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is
moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is
defective.
• A “Turn Signal On” message will appear in the instru-
ment cluster display and a continuous chime will sound
if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with
either turn signal on.
• When the Daytime Running Lights are on and a turn
signal is activated, the Daytime Running Lamp will turn
off on the side of the vehicle in which the turn signal is
flashing. The Daytime Running Lamp will turn back on
when the turn signal is turned off.
Fog Light Switch
60 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Lane Change Assist
Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond
the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash five
times then automatically turn off.
Battery Saver Feature
To protect the battery, the interior lights will turn off
automatically 15 minutes after the ignition switch is moved
to the OFF/LOCK position. This will occur if the interior
lights were switched on manually or are on because a door
is open.
INTERIOR LIGHTS
Interior Courtesy Lights
The interior lights come on when a door is opened. The
light switches in the overhead console are for reading
lamps.
To protect the battery, the interior lights will turn off
automatically 15 minutes after the ignition is moved to the
OFF/LOCK position. This will occur if the interior lights
were switched on manually or are on because a door is
open. This includes the glove compartment light and the
cargo area light. To restore interior light operation, either
place the ignition in the ON/RUN position or cycle the
light switch.
Overhead Light Switches
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 61
Instrument Panel Dimmer Control
The instrument panel dimmer control is part of the head-
light switch and is located on the driver’s side of the
instrument panel.
Rotating the instrument panel dimmer control upward will
increase the brightness of the instrument panel lights,
ONLY when the parking lights or headlights are turned on.
Ambient Light Control — If Equipped
Rotate the ambient dimmer control upward or downward
to increase or decrease the brightness of the ambient light
located in the overhead console, door handle lights, under
I/P lights, door map pocket lights, and cubby bin lights.
Instrument Panel Dimmer
Ambient Light/Door Handle Light Dimmer
62 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
The windshield wiper/washer controls are located on the
windshield wiper/washer lever on the right side of the
steering column. The front wipers are operated by rotating
a switch, located on the end of the lever. For information on
the rear wiper/washer, refer to “Rear Window Wiper/
Washer” in this section.
Windshield Wiper Operation
Rotate the end of the lever to one of the first two detent
positions for intermittent settings. The first intermittent
wiper interval is 10 seconds. The second intermittent wipe
interval is based on vehicle speed. Rotate to the third
detent for low wiper operation and the fourth detent for
high wiper operation.
Windshield Wiper/Washer Lever Windshield Wiper Operation
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 63
CAUTION!
• Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents
the windshield wiper blades from returning to the
“park” position. If the windshield wiper switch is
turned off, and the blades cannot return to the “park”
position, damage to the wiper motor may occur.
• Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
soaking with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
Windshield Washer Operation
To use the washer, pull the lever toward you and hold
while spray is desired. If the lever is pulled while in the
intermittent setting, the wipers will turn on and operate for
several wipe cycles after the lever is released, and then
resume the intermittent interval previously selected.
If the lever is pulled while the wipers are in the off position,
the wipers will operate for several wipe cycles, then turn
off.
NOTE: As a protective measure, the pump will stop if the
switch is held for more than 20 to 30 seconds. Once the
lever is released the pump will resume normal operation.
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield could
lead to a collision. You might not see other vehicles or
other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of the wind-
shield during freezing weather, warm the windshield
with the defroster before and during windshield
washer use.
64 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Mist
Push the lever upward to the MIST position and release for
a single wiping cycle.
NOTE: The mist feature does not activate the washer
pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the
windshield. The wash function must be used in order to
spray the windshield with washer fluid.
Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped
This feature senses rain or snow fall on the windshield and
automatically activates the wipers for the driver. The
feature is especially useful for road splash or overspray
from the windshield washers of the vehicle ahead. Rotate
the end of the multifunction lever to one of two settings to
activate this feature.
The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted with the
multifunction lever. Wiper delay position one is the least
sensitive, and wiper delay position two is the most sensi-
tive. Place the wiper switch in the O (off) position when not
using the system.
NOTE:
• The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the
wiper switch is in the low or high-speed position.
• The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly
when ice, or dried salt water is present on the wind-
shield.
• Use of Rain-X or products containing wax or silicone
may reduce Rain Sensing performance.
• The Rain Sensing feature can be turned on and off using
the Uconnect System, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
“Multimedia” for further information.
The Rain Sensing system has protection features for the
wiper blades and arms, and will not operate under the
following conditions:
• Change In Ignition Position — If the vehicle is in Rain
Sensing mode and the ignition is cycled from OFF to
ON, the auto wiper will be suppressed until vehicle
speed is greater than 3 mph (5 km/h), or the wiper
switch is moved out of and back into the Intermittent
wipe position.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 65
• Transmission In NEUTRAL Position — The Rain Sens-
ing system will not operate if the NEUTRAL gear is
selected at speeds of 3 mph (5 km/h) or less unless the
wiper switch is moved or the gear selector is moved out
of NEUTRAL.
Remote Start Mode Inhibit — On vehicles equipped with
Remote Starting system, Rain Sensing wipers are not
operational when the vehicle is in the remote start mode.
Once the operator is in the vehicle and has placed the
ignition switch in the ON/RUN position, Rain Sensing
wiper operation can resume, if it has been selected, and no
other inhibit conditions (mentioned previously) exist.
Rear Window Wiper/Washer
The rear wiper/washer controls are located on the wind-
shield wiper/washer lever on the right side of the steering
column. The rear wiper/washer is operated by rotating a
switch, located at the middle of the lever.
The rear wiper/washer controls are located on the wind-
shield wiper/washer lever on the right side of the steering
column. The rear wiper has different operation modes:
• Intermittent mode
• In synchronous mode (at half speed of the front window
wiper) when the front window wiper is operating.
• Continuous mode
• Vehicle in REVERSE: If the front wiper is active and the
REVERSE gear is selected, the wiper will turn on for one
wipe.
Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to the
first detent for intermittent operation and to the
second detent for continuous rear wiper operation.
To use the washer, push the lever forward and
hold while spray is desired. If the lever is pushed
while the wiper is in the off position, the wiper
will operate for several wipe cycles, then turn off.
If the lever is pushed while in the intermittent setting, the
wiper will turn on and operate for several wipe cycles after
the end of the lever is released, and then resume the
intermittent interval previously selected.
NOTE: As a protective measure, the pump will stop if the
switch is held for more than 20 to 30 seconds. Once the
lever is released the pump will resume normal operation.
66 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Windshield Wiper De-Icer — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Windshield Wiper
De-Icer feature that may be activated under the following
conditions:
• Activation By Front Defrost — The Windshield Wiper
De-Icer shall be activated automatically in the case of a
cold weather manual start with full front defrost, and
when the ambient temperature is below 33° F (0.6° C).
• Activation By Rear Defrost — The Windshield Wiper
De-Icer shall be activated automatically when the rear
defrost is turned on and when the ambient temperature
is below 33° F (0.6° C).
• Activation By Remote Start Operation (If Equipped) —
When remote start is active and the outside ambient
temperature is less than 33° F (0.6° C), the Windshield
Wiper De-Icer shall be enabled. On exiting remote start
resume previous operation except, if the Windshield
Wiper De-Icer timer and operation shall continue.
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The Climate Control System allows you to regulate the
temperature, air flow, and direction of air circulating
throughout the vehicle. The controls are located on the
touchscreen (if equipped) and on the instrument panel
below the radio.
Climate Controls Without A Touchscreen Overview
The controls for the heating and air conditioning system in
this vehicle can consist of a series of outer rotary dials,
inner push knobs, and/or a touchscreen. These comfort
controls can be set to obtain desired interior conditions.
Manual Climate Controls
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 67
Climate Controls Description
Icon Description
MAX A/C Setting
Set the Temperature Control Knob to the MAX A/C Setting, to change the current setting to the
coldest output of air. Moving the Temperature Control Knob away from the MAX A/C setting
causes the MAX A/C operation to exit.
A/C Button
Push and release to change the current setting, the indicator illuminates when A/C is ON.
Recirculation Button
Push and release this button to change the system between recirculation mode and outside air
mode. Recirculation can be used when outside conditions such as smoke, odors, dust, or high
humidity are present. Recirculation can be used in all modes except for Defrost. Recirculation
may be unavailable if conditions exist that could create fogging on the inside of the windshield.
The A/C can be deselected manually without disturbing the mode control selection. Continuous
use of the Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur.
Extended use of this mode is not recommended.
Front Defrost Setting
Turn the Mode Control knob to the Defrost mode. Air comes from the windshield and side win-
dow demist outlets. When the defrost button is selected, the blower level may increase. Use De-
frost mode with maximum temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting
and defogging.
68 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Icon Description
Rear Defrost Button
Push and release the Rear Defrost Control button to turn ON the rear window defroster and the
heated outside mirrors (if equipped). An indicator will illuminate when the rear window de-
froster is on. The rear window defroster automatically turns off after ten minutes.
Temperature Control Knob
Temperature Control is used to regulate the temperature of the air forced through the climate
system. The temperature can be selected using the temperature control knob on the faceplate.
The temperature increases as you turn the temperature control knob clockwise. The temperature
decreases as you turn the temperature control knob counterclockwise.
Blower Control
Blower Control is used to regulate the amount of air forced through the climate system. There
are seven blower speeds available. The blower speed increases as you turn the blower control
knob clockwise from the lowest blower setting. The blower speed decreases as you turn the
blower control knob counterclockwise.
Modes Control
Turn the Modes Control knob to change the airflow distribution mode. The airflow distribution
mode can be adjusted so air comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets, defrost out-
lets and demist outlets. The Mode settings are as follows:
Panel Mode
Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel. Each of these outlets can be individually
adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can be
moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow direction. There is a shut off wheel lo-
cated below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from these outlets.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 69
Icon Description
Bi-Level Mode
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed
through the defrost and side window demister outlets.
NOTE:
Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the panel out-
lets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
Floor Mode
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side
window demister outlets.
Mix Mode
Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side window demister outlets. This setting works
best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the windshield. This setting is good
for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield.
Climate Control OFF
To turn the Climate Controls off, turn the Blower Control knob to the off position.
70 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Climate Controls With A Touchscreen Overview
The controls for the heating and air conditioning system in
this vehicle can consist of a series of outer rotary dials,
inner push knobs, and/or a touchscreen. These comfort
controls can be set to obtain desired interior conditions.
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display Automatic Climate Controls
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 71
Uconnect 4/4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display Automatic Climate Controls
72 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Climate Controls Description
Icon Description
MAX A/C Button
Press and release the MAX A/C button on the touchscreen to change the current setting
to the coldest output of air. Pressing the button again will cause the MAX A/C operation
to exit.
NOTE: The MAX A/C button is only available on the touchscreen.
A/C Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the indicator illuminates when A/C is
ON.
Recirculation Button
Press and release this button to change the system between recirculation mode and out-
side air mode. Recirculation can be used when outside conditions such as smoke, odors,
dust, or high humidity are present. Recirculation can be used in all modes. Recirculation
may be unavailable (button on the touchscreen greyed out) if conditions exist that could
create fogging on the inside of the windshield. The A/C can be deselected manually
without disturbing the mode control selection. Continuous use of the Recirculation mode
may make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur. Extended use of this
mode is not recommended.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 73
Icon Description
AUTO Button
Automatically controls the interior cabin temperature by adjusting airflow distribution
and amount. Toggling this function will cause the system to switch between manual
mode and automatic modes. Refer to “Automatic Operation” within this section for more
information.
Front Defrost Button
Press and release to change the current airflow setting to Defrost mode. The indicator
illuminates when this feature is on. Air comes from the windshield and side window de-
mist outlets. When the defrost button is selected, the blower level may increase. Use De-
frost mode with maximum temperature settings for best windshield and side window
defrosting and defogging.
Performing this function will cause the ATC to switch into manual mode. If the front de-
frost mode is turned off the climate system will return the previous setting.
Rear Defrost Button
Push and release the Rear Defrost Control button to turn ON the rear window defroster
and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped). An indicator will illuminate when the rear
window defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically turns off after ten min-
utes.
74 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Icon Description
Driver and Passenger Temperature Up and Down Buttons
Provides the driver and passenger with independent temperature control. Push the red
button on the faceplate or touchscreen or press and slide the temperature bar towards
the red arrow button on the touchscreen for warmer temperature settings. Push the blue
button on the faceplate or touchscreen or press and slide the temperature bar towards
the blue arrow button on the touchscreen for cooler temperature settings.
SYNC Button
Press the SYNC button on the touchscreen to toggle the Sync feature on/off. The SYNC
indicator is illuminated when this feature is enabled. SYNC is used to synchronize the
passenger temperature setting with the driver temperature setting. Changing the passen-
ger temperature setting while in SYNC will automatically exit this feature.
NOTE: The SYNC button is only available on the touchscreen.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 75
Icon Description
Faceplate Knobs
Touchscreen Buttons
Blower Control
Blower Control is used to regulate the amount of air forced through the climate system.
There are seven blower speeds available. Adjusting the blower will cause automatic
mode to switch to manual operation. The speeds can be selected using either the blower
control knob on the faceplate or the buttons on the touchscreen.
• Faceplate: The blower speed increases as you turn the blower control knob clockwise
from the lowest blower setting. The blower speed decreases as you turn the blower
control knob counterclockwise.
• Touchscreen: Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting and the large
blower icon to increase the blower setting. Blower can also be selected by pressing
the blower bar area between the icons.
Modes Button Modes Button
Push the button in the center of the Blower Control Knob to change the airflow distribu-
tion mode. You can also change the mode by pressing the desired mode on the touch-
screen. The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air comes from the instrument
panel outlets, floor outlets, defrost outlets and demist outlets. The Mode settings are as
follows:
Panel Mode
Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel. Each of these outlets can be indi-
vidually adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of the center outlets and out-
board outlets can be moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow direction.
There is a shut off wheel located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of
airflow from these outlets.
76 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Icon Description
Bi-Level Mode
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is
directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets.
NOTE:
Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the
panel outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
Floor Mode
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost
and side window demister outlets.
Mix Mode
Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side window demister outlets. This setting
works best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the windshield. This
setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield.
Climate Control OFF Button
Press and release this button to turn the Climate Controls off or turn the Blower Control
knob to the off position.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 77
Climate Control Functions
A/C (Air Conditioning)
The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the operator to
manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning sys-
tem. When the air conditioning system is turned on, cool
dehumidified air will flow through the outlets into the
cabin. For improved fuel economy, press the A/C button to
turn off the air conditioning and manually adjust the
blower and airflow mode settings. Also, make sure to select
only Panel, Bi-Level, or Floor modes.
NOTE:
• For Manual Climate Controls, if the system is in Mix,
Floor or Defrost Mode, the A/C can be turned off, but
the A/C system shall remain active to prevent fogging of
the windows.
• If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass,
select Defrost mode, and increase blower speed if
needed.
• If your air conditioning performance seems lower than
expected, check the front of the A/C condenser (located
in front of the radiator), for an accumulation of dirt or
insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from the front of
the radiator and through the condenser.
MAX A/C
MAX A/C sets the control for maximum cooling perfor-
mance.
Press and release to toggle between MAX A/C and the
prior settings. The button illuminates when MAX A/C is
on.
In MAX A/C, the blower level and mode position can be
adjusted to desired user settings. Pressing other settings
will cause the MAX A/C operation to switch to the selected
setting and MAX A/C to exit.
Recirculation
In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may lead to
excessive window fogging. The Recirculation feature may
be unavailable (button on the touchscreen greyed out) if
conditions exist that could create fogging on the inside of
the windshield.
On systems with Manual Climate Controls, if equipped,
the Recirculation mode is not allowed in Defrost mode to
improve window clearing operation. Recirculation is dis-
abled automatically if this mode is selected. Attempting to
use Recirculation while in this mode causes the LED in the
control button to blink and then turns off.
78 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)
Automatic Operation
1. Push the AUTO button on the faceplate, or the AUTO
button on the touchscreen (if equipped) on the Auto-
matic Temperature Control (ATC) Panel.
2. Next, adjust the temperature you would like the system
to maintain by adjusting the temperature control but-
tons. Once the desired temperature is displayed, the
system achieves and automatically maintains that com-
fort level.
3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is
not necessary to change the settings. You experience the
greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to
function automatically.
NOTE:
• It is not necessary to move the temperature settings for
cold or hot vehicles. The system automatically adjusts
the temperature, mode, and blower speed to provide
comfort as quickly as possible.
• The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or Metric units
by selecting the US/Metric customer-programmable fea-
ture.
To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic
mode during cold start-ups, the blower fan remains on low
until the engine warms up. The blower increases in speed
and transition into Auto mode.
Manual Operation Override
This system offers a full complement of manual override
features. The AUTO symbol in the front ATC display will
be turned off when the system is being used in the manual
mode.
Operating Tips
NOTE: Refer to the chart at the end of this section for
suggested control settings for various weather conditions.
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system must be protected with a
high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion
protection and to protect against engine overheating. OAT
coolant (conforming to MS.90032) is recommended.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 79
Winter Operation
To ensure the best possible heater and defroster perfor-
mance, make sure the engine cooling system is functioning
properly and the proper amount, type, and concentration
of coolant is used. Use of the Air Recirculation mode
during Winter months is not recommended, because it may
cause window fogging.
Vacation/Storage
Before you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service (i.e.,
vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air conditioning
system at idle for about five minutes, in fresh air with the
blower setting on high. This will ensure adequate system
lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor dam-
age when the system is started again.
Window Fogging
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild, rainy,
and/or humid weather. To clear the windows, select De-
frost or Mix mode and increase the front blower speed. Do
not use the Recirculation mode without A/C for long
periods, as fogging may occur.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear win-
dow. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the
interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth and a
mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the heat-
ing elements. Labels can be peeled off after soaking
with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the win-
dow.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
80 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of obstructions, such as leaves. Leaves
collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they
enter the plenum, they could plug the water drains. In
Winter months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice,
slush, and snow.
Cabin Air Filter
The climate control system filters out dust and pollen from
the air. Contact an authorized dealer to service your cabin
air filter, and to have it replaced when needed.
Operating Tips Chart
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 81
WINDOWS
Power Window Controls
The window controls on the driver’s door control all the
door windows.
There are single window controls on each passenger door
trim panel, which operate the passenger door windows.
The window controls will operate only when the ignition is
in the ACC or ON/RUN position.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with the Uconnect, the
power window switches will remain active for up to ten
minutes after the ignition is cycled to the OFF position.
Opening either front door will cancel this feature. The time
is programmable. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multi-
media” for further information.
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle. Do not
leave the key fob in or near the vehicle or in a location
accessible to children, and do not leave the ignition of
a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the
ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants, particularly unat-
tended children, can become entrapped by the win-
dows while operating the power window switches.
Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death.
Auto-Down Feature
The driver door power window switch and the passenger
door power window switches have an Auto-Down feature.
Push the window switch down, for a short period of time,
and release and the window will go down automatically.
Power Window Switches
82 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
To open the window part way, push the window switch
down briefly and release it when you want the window to
stop.
To stop the window from going all the way down during
the Auto-Down operation, pull up on the switch briefly.
Auto-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection
Lift the window switch up, for a short period of time, and
release and the window will go up automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way up during the
Auto-Up operation, push down on the switch briefly.
To close the window part way, lift the window switch
briefly and release it when you want the window to stop.
NOTE:
• If the window runs into any obstacle during auto-
closure, it will reverse direction and then go back down.
Remove the obstacle and use the window switch again
to close the window.
• Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger
the auto-reverse function unexpectedly during auto-
closure. If this happens, pull the switch lightly and hold
to close the window manually.
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the window is
almost closed. To avoid personal injury be sure to clear
your arms, hands, fingers and all objects from the
window path before closing.
Reset Auto-Up
Should the Auto-Up feature stop working, the window
probably needs to be reset. To reset Auto-Up:
1. Pull the window switch up to close the window com-
pletely and continue to hold the switch up for an
additional two seconds after the window is closed.
2. Push the window switch down firmly to open the
window completely and continue to hold the switch
down for an additional two seconds after the window is
fully open.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 83
Window Lockout Switch
The window lockout switch on the driver’s door trim panel
allows you to disable the window controls on the rear
passenger doors. To disable the window controls, push and
release the window lockout button (the indicator light on
the button with turn on). To enable the window controls,
push and release the window lockout button again (the
indicator light on the button will turn back off).
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the ears.
Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows
down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain open or
partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and
can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear
windows open, open the front and rear windows together
to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs with the
sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the
buffeting or open any window.
Window Lockout Switch
84 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
POWER SUNROOF WITH POWER SHADE — IF
EQUIPPED
The power sunroof switches are located between the sun
visors on the overhead console.
WARNING!
• Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Never leave the key
fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible
to children. Do not leave the ignition of a vehicle
equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ON/RUN
mode. Occupants, particularly unattended children,
can become entrapped by the power sunroof while
operating the power sunroof switch. Such entrap-
ment may result in serious injury or death.
• In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown
from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could also
be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten your
seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are
also properly secured.
• Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof.
Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any
object, to project through the sunroof opening. In-
jury may result.
Power Sunroof Switches
1 — Power Shade Switch
2 — Front Panel Open/Close Switch
3 — Front Panel Vent Switch
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 85
Opening Sunroof
The sunroof has two programmed open positions, comfort
stop position and full open position. The comfort stop
position has been optimized to minimize wind buffeting
when driving with side windows closed and sunroof open.
If the sunshade is in the closed position when initiating a
sunroof open or vent command the sunshade will auto-
matically open to the half open position prior to the
sunroof opening.
Express
Push the switch and release it within one-half second, the
sunroof will open to the comfort stop position and auto-
matically stop. Push the switch and release it again, the
sunroof will open to the full open position and automati-
cally stop. This is called “Express Open”. During Express
Open operation, any movement of the sunroof switch will
stop the sunroof.
Manual Mode
Push and hold the switch, the sunroof will open to the
comfort stop position and automatically stop. Push the
switch and hold it again, the sunroof will open to the full
open position and automatically stop. Any release of the
switch will stop the sunroof movement. The sunroof will
remain in a partially opened condition until the switch is
pushed and held again.
Opening Sunroof — Vent
Push and release the ⬙Vent⬙ button within one-half second
and the sunroof will move from the closed position to the
vent position. This is called “Express Vent.” During Ex-
press Vent operation, any movement of the switch will stop
the sunroof.
NOTE: When the sunroof is in a full open or a partial open
position, Express Vent operation is not available. You must
push and hold the vent switch to cycle the sunroof from a
slide open position to the vent position. Sunroof movement
will stop if the switch is released prior to the sunroof
reaching the vent position.
Closing Sunroof
Express
Pull the switch down and release it within one-half second
and the sunroof will close automatically from any position.
The sunroof will close fully and stop automatically. This is
called “Express Close”. During Express Close operation,
any other actuation of the switch will stop the sunroof.
86 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Manual Mode
Pull and hold the switch down and the sunroof will close
from any position. Any release of the switch will stop the
movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially closed
condition until the sunroof switch is pulled again.
Opening Power Shade
The sunshade has two programmed open positions: half
open and full open positions. When opening the sunshade
from the closed position, the sunshade will always stop at
the half open position regardless of express or manual
open operation. The switch must be actuated again to
continue on to full open position.
Express
Push the sunshade switch and release it within one-half
second, the sunshade will open to the half open position
and stop automatically. Push and release the switch again
from the half open position and the sunshade will open to
the full open position and stop automatically. This is called
“Express Open”. During Express Open operation, any
movement of the sunshade switch will stop the shade.
Manual Mode
Push and hold the sunshade switch, the sunshade will open
to the half open position and stop automatically. Push and
hold the sunshade switch again and the sunshade will open
to the full open position. Any release of the switch will stop
the movement and the sunshade will remain in a partially
opened condition until the switch is pushed again.
Closing Power Shade
If the sunroof is open/vented, the sunshade cannot be
closed beyond the half open position. Pulling the sunshade
close switch when sunshade is at half open position with
sunroof open/vented will automatically close sunroof
prior to the sunshade closing.
Express
Pull the sunshade switch down and release it within
one-half second. If the sunroof is in closed position, the
sunshade will full close automatically from any position. If
the sunroof is open or vented, the sunshade will close to
the half open position and stop; pull and release the
sunshade switch again to automatically close both the
sunroof and sunshade completely. This is called “Express
Close”. During Express Close operation, any movement of
the switch will stop the sunshade.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 87
Manual
Pull and hold the sunshade switch down. If the sunroof is
in closed position, the sunshade will fully close from any
position. If the sunroof is open or vented, the sunshade will
close to the half open position and stop; pulling and
holding the sunshade switch again will close both the
sunroof and sunshade completely. Any release of the
switch will stop the movement and the sunshade will
remain in a partially closed condition until the switch is
pulled again.
Pinch Protect Feature
This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of the
sunroof during Express Close operation. If an obstruction
in the path of the sunroof is detected, the sunroof will
automatically retract. Remove the obstruction if this oc-
curs. Next, pull the sunroof close switch and release to
Express Close.
NOTE: If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result in
Pinch Protect reversals, Pinch Protect will disable and the
sunroof must be closed in Manual Mode.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the ears.
Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows
down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain open or
partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and
can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear
windows open, then open the front and rear windows
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to
minimize the buffeting or open any window.
Sunroof Maintenance
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean the
glass panel.
Ignition Off Operation
The power sunroof switch will remain active for up to
approximately ten minutes after the ignition is turned OFF.
Opening either front door will cancel this feature.
NOTE: Ignition Off time is programmable through the
Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings/Customer
Programmable Features” in “Multimedia” for further in-
formation.
88 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
HOOD
Opening The Hood
Two latches must be released to open the hood.
1. Pull the hood release lever located underneath the
driver’s side of the instrument panel.
2. Move to the outside of the vehicle. The safety latch
release lever is located behind the front edge of the hood
at the center. Reach in at the center of the hood with a
palm facing the ground. Once contact is made with the
safety latch release lever, push it toward the passenger
side of the vehicle to fully release the hood.
Closing The Hood
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
Hood Release Location (Underneath Instrument Panel)
Hood Safety Latch Release Lever Location
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 89
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Lower hood to approximately 12 inches (30 cm)
and drop the hood to close. Make sure hood is fully
closed for both latches. Never drive vehicle unless
hood is fully closed, with both latches engaged.
LIFTGATE
Opening
To Unlock/Enter The Liftgate
The liftgate may be released by the overhead console
switch, the outside handle, or the key fob (if equipped).
The overhead console switch and key fob (if equipped) will
release the liftgate when the liftgate is unlocked or locked.
The outside handle requires the liftgate to be unlocked.
NOTE: Use the interior door lock/unlock button on the
door panel or the key fob to lock and unlock the liftgate.
The manual door locks on the doors and the exterior door
lock cylinder will not lock and unlock the liftgate.
WARNING!
Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous
exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your passen-
gers could be injured by these fumes. Keep the liftgate
closed when you are operating the vehicle.
Liftgate Entry
90 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Closing
Grasp the liftgate pull handle and initiate lowering the
liftgate. Release the handle when the liftgate reaches the
self-closing position.
NOTE: Before closing the liftgate, make sure to be in
possession of the key because the liftgate may be locked.
Power Liftgate — If Equipped
The power liftgate may be opened or closed by
the key fob, outside handle, overhead console
switch, and the liftgate switch on the upper left
trim when the liftgate is open.
Using any of the above ways:
• When the liftgate is fully closed, the liftgate will open.
• When the liftgate is fully open, the liftgate will close.
• When the liftgate is moving, the liftgate will reverse.
The key fob and the overhead console switch will open the
liftgate when the liftgate is locked. The outside handle
requires the liftgate to be unlocked. Push the button on the
key fob twice within five seconds to open or close the
liftgate.
When the liftgate button on the key fob is pushed two
times, the turn signals will flash twice to signal that the
liftgate is opening or closing (if Flash Lamps with Lock is
enabled in the Uconnect settings), and the liftgate chime
will be audible. Refer to ⬙Uconnect Settings⬙ in ⬙Multime-
dia” for further information.
Liftgate Pull Handle/Closing Liftgate
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 91
NOTE:
• Before closing the liftgate, make sure to be in possession
of the key because the liftgate may be locked.
• Use the interior door lock/unlock button on the door
panel or the key fob to lock and unlock the liftgate. The
manual door locks on the doors and the exterior door
lock cylinder will not lock and unlock the liftgate.
Lock The Vehicle
WARNING!
During power operation, personal injury or cargo
damage may occur. Ensure the liftgate travel path is
clear. Make sure the liftgate is closed and latched
before driving away.
NOTE:
• The liftgate will not power open or close if the gear
selector is in gear or the vehicle speed is above 0 mph
(0 km/h).
• If anything obstructs the power liftgate while it is
closing or opening, the liftgate will automatically re-
verse to the closed or open position, provided it meets
sufficient resistance.
• There are pinch sensors attached to the side of the
liftgate opening. Light pressure anywhere along these
strips will cause the liftgate to return to the open
position.
• If the power liftgate encounters multiple obstructions
within the same cycle, the system will automatically
stop. If this occurs, the liftgate must be opened or closed
manually.
• The power liftgate will not operate in temperatures
below −22° F (−30° C) or temperatures above 150° F
(65° C). Be sure to remove any buildup of snow or ice
from the liftgate before pushing any of the power liftgate
switches.
• If the liftgate is left open for an extended period of time,
the liftgate may need to be closed manually to reset
power liftgate functionality.
• Gas props support the liftgate in the open position.
However, because the gas pressure drops with tempera-
ture, it may be necessary to assist the props when
opening the liftgate in cold weather.
92 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
• Before driving off, check the instrument cluster for a
liftgate or door open message or warning indicator.
Failure to do this could result in unintentionally leaving
the liftgate open while driving.
• If your liftgate is power closing and you put the vehicle
in gear, the liftgate will continue to power close. How-
ever, vehicle movement may result in a detection of an
obstruction.
• If the electronic liftgate release handle is pushed with the
power liftgate is opening, the liftgate motor will disen-
gage to allow manual operation.
• If the electronic liftgate release handle is pushed while
the power liftgate is closing, the liftgate will reverse to
the full open position.
WARNING!
• Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous
exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your pas-
sengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep the
liftgate closed when you are operating the vehicle.
• If you are required to drive with the liftgate open,
make sure that all windows are closed, and the
climate control blower switch is set at high speed. Do
not use the recirculation mode.
NOTE: Allow the power system to open the liftgate.
Manually pushing or pulling the liftgate may activate the
liftgate obstacle detection feature and stop the power
operation or reverse its direction.
WARNING!
Personal injury or cargo damage may occur if caught in
the path of the liftgate. Make sure the liftgate path is
clear before activating the liftgate.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 93
Cargo Area Features
Cargo Load Floor
The cargo load floor system has a load capacity of 400 lbs
(181 kg).
Cargo Load Floor Positions
The cargo load floor can be adjusted to three different
levels to create more space in the cargo area. These
positions are: upper, center, and lower.
NOTE: The lower position is not available in vehicles
equipped with either a compact spare tire, or a full size
spare tire. The center position is not available in vehicles
equipped with a full size spare tire.
To change the level of the load floor, pull upward on the
load floor handle, pull the floor outward, and place the
back of the floor into the desired position. Lower the front
of the floor into place.
Cargo Load Floor Positions
1 — Upper Position
2 — Center Position
3 — Lower Position
94 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Raising The Load Floor
To raise the load floor for access of the Tire Service Kit, or
spare tire (if equipped), pull upward on the load floor
handle.
Do not raise the floor beyond the point of resistance. In
vehicles equipped with a power liftgate, forcing the floor
upward can damage the floor and vehicle’s trim panel.
To fully raise the load floor, pull upward on the floor
handle, pull the floor outward, then position the floor
upright with the bottom fitting on top of the floor position-
ing brackets. Push the top of the floor down firmly to
secure it in this position.
To provide additional storage area, each rear seat can be
folded flat. This allows for extended cargo space and still
maintains some rear seating room. Refer to “Seats” in
“Getting To Know Your Vehicle” for further information.
Raised Load Floor — (Power Liftgate)
1 — Raised Load Floor
2 — Raised Floor Maximum Height
Fully Raised Load Floor Position
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 95
Cargo Tie-Down Hooks And Loops
The tie-downs located on the cargo area floor should be
used to secure loads safely when the vehicle is moving.
Cargo tie-down loops are located on the trim panels.
WARNING!
• Cargo tie-downs are not safe anchors for a child seat
tether strap. In a sudden stop or accident, a tie-down
could pull loose and allow the child seat to come
loose. A child could be badly injured. Use only the
anchors provided for child seat tethers.
• To help protect against personal injury, passengers
should not be seated in the rear cargo area. The rear
cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes
only, not for passengers, who should sit in seats and
use seat belts.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
The weight and position of cargo and passengers can
change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle han-
dling. To avoid loss of control resulting in personal
injury, follow these guidelines for loading your ve-
hicle:
• Do not carry loads that exceed the load limits de-
scribed on the label attached to the left door or left
door center pillar.
• Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor. Put
heavier objects as low and as far forward as possible.
• Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear
axle. Too much weight or improperly placed weight
over or behind the rear axle can cause the vehicle to
sway.
• Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of
the seatback. This could impair visibility or become
a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or accident.
96 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Storage Bins
The rear storage bins are located in the rear of the vehicle
on the sides of the load floor.
INTERNAL EQUIPMENT
Storage
Glove Compartment
The glove compartment is located on the passenger side of
the instrument panel.
To open the glove compartment, pull the release handle.
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a glove compartment
in the open position. Driving with the glove compart-
ment open may result in injury in a collision.
Rear Storage Bin
Glove Compartment
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 97
Console Storage Compartment
To open, pull up on the latch and lift the cover.
The center console armrest can also be adjusted forward
and rearward by pushing in the desired direction until it
locks into place.
The center console has a storage area which can hold cell
phones, personal digital assistants (PDAs), and other small
items.
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a console compart-
ment lid in the open position. Driving with the console
compartment lid open may result in injury in a colli-
sion.
Cupholders
There are two cupholders for the front seat passengers,
located in the center console.
There are two cupholders (if equipped) for the rear seat
passengers, located in the center armrest.
Center Console
Front Cupholders
98 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Power Outlets
Your vehicle is equipped with 12 Volt (13 Amp) power
outlets that can be used to power cellular phones, small
electronics and other low powered electrical accessories.
The power outlets are labeled with either a “key” or a
“battery” symbol to indicate how the outlet is powered.
Power outlets labeled with a “key” are powered when the
ignition is in the ON or ACC position, while the outlets
labeled with a “battery” are connected directly to the
battery and powered at all times.
NOTE:
• All accessories connected to the “battery” powered
outlets should be removed or turned off when the
vehicle is not in use to protect the battery against
discharge.
CAUTION!
Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only.
Do not insert any other object in the power outlets as
this will damage the outlet and blow the fuse. Im-
proper use of the power outlet can cause damage not
covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
The front power outlet is located on the center stack of the
instrument panel.
In addition to the front power outlet, there may also be a
power outlet located in the rear cargo area, if equipped.
Front Power Outlet
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 99
NOTE: If equipped, the rear cargo area power outlet can be
switched from “ignition” only to constant “battery” pow-
ered all the time. See an authorized dealer for details.
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet
should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Close the lid when not in use and while driving the
vehicle.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
CAUTION!
• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power
from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in use (i.e.,
cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long
enough, the vehicle’s battery will discharge suffi-
ciently to degrade battery life and/or prevent the
engine from starting.
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the battery
even more quickly. Only use these intermittently and
with greater caution.
• After the use of high power draw accessories, or long
periods of the vehicle not being started (with acces-
sories still plugged in), the vehicle must be driven a
sufficient length of time to allow the generator to
recharge the vehicle’s battery.
Rear Cargo Area Power Outlet — If Equipped
100 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Power Inverter — If Equipped
There is a 115 Volt, 150 Watt inverter outlet located on the
back of the center console to convert DC current to AC
current. This outlet can power cellular phones, electronics
and other low power devices requiring power up to 150
Watts. Certain high-end game consoles will exceed this
power limit, as will most power tools.
To turn on the power inverter outlet, simply plug in the
device. The outlet automatically turns off when the device
is unplugged.
The power inverter is designed with built-in overload
protection. If the power rating of 150 Watts is exceeded, the
power inverter will automatically shut down. Once the
electrical device has been removed from the outlet the
inverter should automatically reset. To avoid overloading
the circuit, check the power ratings on electrical devices
prior to using the inverter.
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Do not insert any objects into the receptacles.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED
The load carried on the roof, when equipped with a
luggage rack, must not exceed 150 lbs (68 kg), and it should
be uniformly distributed over the cargo area.
Crossbars should always be used whenever cargo is placed
on the roof rack. Check the straps frequently to be sure that
the load remains securely attached.
Power Inverter Location
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 101
NOTE: Crossbars can be purchased at your authorized
dealer through Mopar parts.
External racks do not increase the total load carrying
capacity of the vehicle. Be sure that the total occupant and
luggage load inside the vehicle, plus the load on the
luggage rack, do not exceed the maximum vehicle load
capacity.
WARNING!
Cargo must be securely tied down before driving your
vehicle. Improperly secured loads can fly off the ve-
hicle, particularly at high speeds, resulting in personal
injury or property damage. Follow the roof rack cau-
tions when carrying cargo on your roof rack.
CAUTION!
• To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle, do not
exceed the maximum roof rack load capacity. Always
distribute heavy loads as evenly as possible and
secure the load appropriately.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Long loads, which extend over the windshield,
should be secured to both the front and rear of the
vehicle.
• Place a blanket or other protection between the
surface of the roof and the load.
• Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners carefully
when carrying large or heavy loads on the roof rack.
Wind forces, due to natural causes or nearby truck
traffic, can add sudden upward loads. It is recom-
mended to not carry large flat loads, such as wood
panels or surfboards, which may result in damage to
the cargo or your vehicle.
• Load should always be secured to cross bars first,
with tie down loops used as additional securing
points if needed. Tie loops are intended as supple-
mentary tie down points only. Do not use ratcheting
mechanisms with the tie loops. Check the straps
frequently to be sure that the load remains securely
attached.
102 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER ..................104
▫ Instrument Cluster Descriptions ............105
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY ...........106
▫ Instrument Cluster Display Location And
Controls .............................107
▫ Oil Change Reset .......................109
▫ Instrument Cluster Display Menu Items ......109
▫ Battery Saver On/Battery Saver Mode Message —
Electrical Load Reduction Actions —
If Equipped ..........................117
䡵 TRIP COMPUTER .......................119
䡵 WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES .........120
▫ Red Warning Lights .....................120
▫ Yellow Warning Lights ...................124
▫ Yellow Indicator Lights...................129
▫ Green Indicator Lights ...................130
▫ White Indicator Lights ...................131
▫ Blue Indicator Lights ....................132
▫ Gray Indicator Lights ....................132
䡵 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II . . .133
▫ Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)
Cybersecurity .........................133
䡵 EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS ...........................134
4
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Base Instrument Cluster
104 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Instrument Cluster Descriptions
1. Tachometer
• Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute
(RPM x 1000).
2. Instrument Cluster Display
• The instrument cluster display features a driver-
interactive display. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Dis-
play” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
Premium Instrument Cluster
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 105
3. Speedometer
• Indicates vehicle speed.
4. Fuel Gauge
• The gauge shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when
the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN position.
•
The fuel pump symbol points to the side of the
vehicle where the fuel door is located.
5. Temperature Gauge
• The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tem-
perature. Any reading within the normal range indi-
cates that the engine cooling system is operating
satisfactorily.
• The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tem-
perature when driving in hot weather or up mountain
grades. It should not be allowed to exceed the upper
limits of the normal operating range.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer for
service if your vehicle overheats.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could dam-
age your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H”
pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the
air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back
into the normal range. If the pointer remains on the
“H”, turn the engine off immediately and call an
authorized dealer for service.
NOTE: The hard telltales will illuminate for a bulb check
when the ignition is first cycled.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
Your vehicle may be equipped with an instrument cluster
display, which offers useful information to the driver. With
the ignition in the STOP/OFF mode, opening/closing of a
door will activate the display for viewing, and display the
total miles, or kilometers, in the odometer. Your instrument
cluster display is designed to display important informa-
tion about your vehicle’s systems and features. Using a
driver interactive display located on the instrument panel,
your instrument cluster display can show you how sys-
tems are working and give you warnings when they aren’t.
106 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The steering wheel mounted controls allow you to scroll
through and enter the main menus and submenus. You can
access the specific information you want and make selec-
tions and adjustments.
Instrument Cluster Display Location And Controls
The instrument cluster display features a driver-interactive
display that is located in the instrument cluster.
The instrument cluster display menu items consist of the
following as equipped:
• Speedometer
• Vehicle Info
• Driver Assist
• Fuel Economy
• Trip
• Stop/Start (If Equipped)
Base Instrument Cluster Display Location And Controls
Premium Instrument Cluster Display Location And
Controls
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 107
• Audio
• Messages
• Screen Setup
• Vehicle Settings
The systems allow the driver to select information by
pushing the following buttons mounted on the steering
wheel:
• Up Arrow Button
Push and release the up arrow button to scroll
upward through the main menu and submenus.
• Down Arrow Button
Push and release the down arrow button to scroll
downward through the main menu and
submenus.
• Right Arrow Button
Push and release the right arrow button to access
the information screens or submenu screens of a
main menu item.
• Left Arrow Button
Push and release the left arrow button to access
the information screens or submenu screens of a
main menu item.
• OK Button
Push the OK button to access/select the information
screens or submenu screens of a main menu item. Push and
hold the OK button for one second to reset displayed/
selected features that can be reset.
Instrument Cluster Display Control Buttons
108 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Oil Change Reset
• Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The “Oil Change Due” message will
display in the instrument cluster display for five seconds
after a single chime has sounded, to indicate the next
scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change
indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the
engine oil change interval may fluctuate, dependent
upon your personal driving style.
• Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
time the ignition is cycled to the ON/RUN position.
To reset the oil change indicator after performing the
scheduled maintenance, refer to the following procedure:
1. Without pressing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
START/STOP button and cycle the ignition to the ON/
RUN position (do not start the engine).
2. Fully press the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times
within ten seconds.
3. Cycle the ignition to the OFF/LOCK position.
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
Instrument Cluster Display Menu Items
NOTE: The instrument cluster display menu items display
in the center of the instrument cluster. Menu items may
vary depending on your vehicle features.
Speedometer
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the
Speedometer Menu item is displayed in the instrument
cluster display. Push and release the OK button to change
the speedometer scale from MPH to km/h (or vice versa).
Vehicle Info (Customer Information Features)
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the
Vehicle Info Menu item is displayed in the instrument
cluster display. Push and release the left or right arrow
button to cycle through the Vehicle Info submenus and
follow the prompts on each screen as needed.
1. Tire Pressure
• If tire pressure is OK for all tires a vehicle ICON is
displayed with tire pressure values in each corner of
the ICON.
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 109
• If one or more tires have low pressure, “Inflate Tire To
XX” is displayed with the vehicle ICON and the tire
pressure values in each corner of the ICON with the
pressure value of the low tire displayed in a different
color than the other tire pressure value.
• If the Tire Pressure system requires service, “Service
Tire Pressure System” is displayed.
• Tire PSI is an information only function and cannot be
reset.
• Refer to “Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)”
under “Safety” for further information.
2. Coolant Temperature
Displays the actual coolant temperature.
3. Transmission Temperature — Automatic Transmission
Only
Displays the actual transmission temperature.
4. Oil Temperature
Displays the level of oil temperature.
5. Battery Voltage
Displays the actual battery voltage
Fuel Economy
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the
Fuel Economy menu title is displayed in the instrument
cluster display. Push and hold the OK button to reset
average fuel economy feature.
• Range – The display shows the estimated distance (mi
or km) that can be traveled with the fuel remaining in
the tank. When the Range value is less than 30 miles
(48 km) estimated driving distance, the Range display
will change to a “LOW FUEL” message. Adding a
significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the
“LOW FUEL” message and a new Range value will
display. Range cannot be reset through the OK button.
NOTE: Significant changes in driving style or vehicle
loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of
the vehicle, regardless of the Range displayed value.
• Average – This display shows the average fuel economy
(MPG, or L/100 km, or km/L) since the last reset.
• Current – This display shows the current fuel economy
(MPG, or L/100 km, or km/L) while driving.
110 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Driver Assist
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the
Driver Assist menu title is displayed and highlighted in the
instrument cluster display.
LaneSense — If Equipped
The instrument cluster display displays the current Lane-
Sense system settings. The information displayed depends
on LaneSense system status and the conditions that need to
be met. Refer to “LaneSense — If Equipped” in “Starting
And Operating” for further information.
Trip Info
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the
Trip menu title is displayed in the instrument cluster
display. Toggle the left or right arrow button to select Trip
A or Trip B. The Trip information will display the follow-
ing:
• Distance – Shows the total distance (mi or km) traveled
for Trip A or Trip B since the last reset.
• Average Fuel Economy – Shows the average fuel
economy (MPG or L/100 km or km/L) of Trip A or Trip
B since the last reset.
• Elapsed Time – Shows the total elapsed time of travel
since Trip A or Trip B has been reset.
Hold the OK button to reset feature information.
Stop/Start – If Equipped
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the
Stop/Start menu title is displayed in the instrument cluster
display.
Audio
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the
Audio menu title is displayed in the instrument cluster
display.
Stored Messages
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the
Messages Menu Icon is highlighted in the instrument
cluster display. This feature shows the number of stored
warning messages. Pushing the left or right arrow button
will allow you to scroll through the stored messages.
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 111
Screen Setup
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the
Screen Setup Menu Icon/Title is highlighted in the instru-
ment cluster display. Push and release the OK button to
enter the sub-menus and follow the prompts on the screen
as needed. The Screen Setup feature allows you to change
what information is displayed in the instrument cluster as
well as the location that information is displayed.
Screen Setup Driver Selectable Items
Upper Left
• None
• Compass (default setting)
• Outside Temp
• Date
• Time
• Ignition State
• Range
• Fuel Economy Average — Premium Cluster
• Fuel Economy Current — Premium Cluster
Upper Right
• None
• Compass
• Outside Temp
• Date
• Time
• Ignition State (default setting)
• Range
• Fuel Economy Average — Premium Cluster
• Fuel Economy Current — Premium Cluster
Restore Defaults (Restores All Settings To Default Set-
tings)
• Yes
• No
Current Gear — If Equipped
• On
• Off (default setting)
112 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Center
• None
• Compass
• Menu Title (default setting)
• Date
• Outside Temp
• Time
• Range
• Fuel Economy Average
• Fuel Economy Current
• Audio Info
• Trip A Distance
• Trip B Distance
• Speedometer
Vehicle Settings — If Equipped
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the
Vehicle Setup Menu item is displayed in the instrument
cluster display. This menu item allows you to change the
settings for the following:
• Display
• Units
• Clock and Date
• Security
• Safety and Assistance
• Lights
• Doors and Locks
• Compass — If Equipped
NOTE: Most vehicle settings will be moved into the radio
if a touchscreen radio is present, please refer to “Uconnect
Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 113
Display
By selecting Display, the following settings can be selected:
• Language: select the language in which to display the
information/warnings.
• Nav. Repetition: displays information relating to the
navigation mode.
Units
By selecting Units, the unit of measurement to use for
displaying various values can be set. Possible options are:
• US
• Metric
• Custom: allows individual changes of units for tempera-
ture, distance, consumption, and tire pressure.
Clock And Date
By selecting Clock and Date, the time and date can be set.
Possible options are:
• Set Time: adjust hours/minutes
• Set Format: adjust the time format “12h” (12 hours) or
“24h” (24 hours)
• Set Date: adjust day/month/year
Security
Passenger Air Bag Disable (PAD): a selection of Passenger
Air Bag Disable (ON/OFF) may be made if a child restraint
must be installed in the front seat.
Safety And Assistance
By selecting the item Safety and Assistance, the following
adjustments can be made:
• ParkSense (If Equipped): a selection of the type of
information provided by ParkSense
• Front ParkSense Volume (If Equipped): selection of the
volume of the beeps provided by the front ParkSense
• Rear ParkSense Volume (If Equipped): selection of the
volume of the beeps provided by the rear ParkSense
• FCW Warning (If Equipped): a selection of operating
modes of the system Forward Collision Warning Plus
• FCW Sensitivity (If Equipped): a selection of the “readi-
ness” of intervention of the Forward Collision Warning
Plus system, based on the distance to the obstacle
• Rain Sensing Wipers (If Equipped): enabling/disabling
the automatic operation of wipers in the event of rain
114 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• LaneSense Force (If Equipped): selection of the force to
be applied to the steering wheel to put the car in the
roadway through the system of electrical drive, in case
of operation of the system LaneSense
• LaneSense Warning (If Equipped): a selection of the
“readiness” of intervention of LaneSense
• Buzzer Volume: There are 4 options: Off, Low, Medium,
Loud
• Brake Service (If Equipped): activation of the procedure
to carry out braking system maintenance
• Auto Park Brake (If Equipped): enable/disable auto
insertion of the Electric Parking Brake
• Speed Warning: Set the vehicle speed limit, which the
driver is notified through a visual and acoustic signaling
(display of a message and a symbol on the display).
When the speed warning is set, the icon (a circle with the
set speed inside of it) should remain visualized until the
driver turns the Speed Warning off. If the driver ex-
ceeded the set speed, a single chime will sound along
with a pop up message of “Speed Warning Exceeded.”
Driver may also turn the Speed Warning “OFF” in the
Instrument Cluster Display should you choose not to
use this feature. To turn the feature off, the driver must
use the Instrument Cluster Display buttons to navigate
to the Speed Warning, and then press the up or down
arrow until you reach “OFF” rather than a speed.
• Hill Start Assist: Activation/Deactivation of the Hill
Start Assist system
Lights
By selecting Lights, the following adjustments can be made:
• Ambient Lights (If Equipped): adjust the sensitivity of
lighting in the doors and overhead console
• Lights Off Delay: set the delay for headlight shutoff after
engine shutoff
• Headlight Sensitivity: adjust the sensitivity of headlight
brightness
• Greeting Lights: activate the direction indicators when
unlocking the doors
• Daytime Lights (If Equipped): activate/deactivate the
daytime running lights
• Cornering Lights (If Equipped): activate/deactivate the
cornering lights
• Auto High Beam (If Equipped): activate/deactivate the
automatic high beam headlights
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 115
Doors And Locks
By selecting Doors and Locks, the following adjustments
can be made:
• Auto Lock Doors: activate/deactivate the automatic
locking of the doors with the vehicle moving
• Auto Unlock Doors: automatic unlocking of the doors
when exiting the vehicle
• Lights with Lock: activate the direction indicators when
locking the doors
• Horn With Remote Lock: activate/deactivate the horn
when pressing the lock button on the key. The options
are “Off”, “First Press”, and “Second Press”
• Horn With Remote Start (If Equipped): activate/
deactivate the horn at the Remote Starting of the engine
with the key
• Door Unlock: allow you to choose whether to unlock all
the doors or only the driver’s side door on the first push
of the unlock button on the key
• Auto Driver Comfort (If Equipped): activate/deactivate
automatic climate control during vehicle starts
• Key in Memory (If Equipped): activate/deactivate
memory linked to a key
Compass
By selecting Compass, the following settings can be
changed:
Calibration (If Equipped)
This compass is self-calibrating, which eliminates the need
to set the compass manually. When the vehicle is new, the
compass may appear erratic, and the cluster will display
dashes (- -) until the compass is calibrated. You may also
calibrate the compass by completing one or more 360
degree turns (in an area free from large metal or metallic
objects) until the dashes (- -) displayed in the instrument
cluster display turns off. The compass will now function
normally.
116 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Variance (If Equipped)
Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic
North and Geographic North. To compensate for the
differences, the variance should be set for the zone where
the vehicle is driven, per the zone map. Once properly set,
the compass will automatically compensate for the differ-
ences and provide the most accurate compass heading.
Battery Saver On/Battery Saver Mode Message —
Electrical Load Reduction Actions — If Equipped
This vehicle is equipped with an Intelligent Battery Sensor
(IBS) to perform additional monitoring of the electrical
system and status of the vehicle battery.
In cases when the IBS detects charging system failure, or
the vehicle battery conditions are deteriorating, electrical
load reduction actions will take place to extend the driving
time and distance of the vehicle. This is done by reducing
power to or turning off non-essential electrical loads.
Load reduction is only active when the engine is running.
It will display a message if there is a risk of battery
depletion to the point where the vehicle may stall due to
lack of electrical supply, or will not restart after the current
drive cycle.
When load reduction is activated, the message “Battery
Saver On” or “Battery Saver Mode” will appear in the
instrument cluster display.
These messages indicate the vehicle battery has a low state
of charge and continues to lose electrical charge at a rate
that the charging system cannot sustain.
Compass Variance Map
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 117
NOTE:
• The charging system is independent from load reduc-
tion. The charging system performs a diagnostic on the
charging system continuously.
• If the Battery Charge Warning Light is on it may indicate
a problem with the charging system. Refer to “Battery
Charge Warning Light” in “Warning Lights And Mes-
sages” located in ”Getting To Know Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
The electrical loads that may be switched off (if equipped),
and vehicle functions which can be effected by load
reduction:
• Heated Seat/Vented Seats/Heated Wheel
• Heated/Cooled Cup Holders — If Equipped
• Rear Defroster And Heated Mirrors
• HVAC System
• 150W Power Inverter System
• Audio and Telematics System
Loss of the battery charge may indicate one or more of the
following conditions:
• The charging system cannot deliver enough electrical
power to the vehicle system because the electrical loads
are larger than the capability of charging system. The
charging system is still functioning properly.
• Turning on all possible vehicle electrical loads (e.g.
HVAC to max settings, exterior and interior lights,
overloaded power outlets +12V, 150W, USB ports) dur-
ing certain driving conditions (city driving, towing,
frequent stopping).
• Installing options like additional lights, upfitter electri-
cal accessories, audio systems, alarms and similar de-
vices.
• Unusual driving cycles (short trips separated by long
parking periods).
• The vehicle was parked for an extended period of time
(weeks, months).
• The battery was recently replaced and was not charged
completely.
• The battery was discharged by an electrical load left on
when the vehicle was parked.
118 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• The battery was used for an extended period with the
engine not running to supply radio, lights, chargers,
+12V portable appliances like vacuum cleaners, game
consoles and similar devices.
What to do when an electrical load reduction action
message is present (“Battery Saver On” or “Battery Saver
Mode”)
During a trip:
• Reduce power to unnecessary loads if possible:
– Turn off redundant lights (interior or exterior)
– Check what may be plugged in to power outlets +12V,
150W, USB ports
– Check HVAC settings (blower, temperature)
– Check the audio settings (volume)
After a trip:
• Check if any aftermarket equipment was installed (ad-
ditional lights, upfitter electrical accessories, audio sys-
tems, alarms) and review specifications if any (load and
Ignition Off Draw currents).
• Evaluate the latest driving cycles (distance, driving time
and parking time).
• The vehicle should have service performed if the mes-
sage is still present during consecutive trips and the
evaluation of the vehicle and driving pattern did not
help to identify the cause.
TRIP COMPUTER
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the
Trip A or Trip B icon is highlighted in the instrument
cluster display (Toggle left or right to select Trip A or Trip
B). Push and release the OK button to display the Trip
information.
Trip A
• Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A since the last
reset.
• Shows the elapsed time traveled for Trip A since the last
reset.
Trip B
• Shows the total distance traveled for Trip B since the last
reset.
• Shows the elapsed time traveled for Trip B since the last
reset.
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 119
Elapsed Time
Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset
when the ignition switch is in the ACC position. Elapsed
time will increment when the ignition switch is in the ON
or START position.
To Reset A Trip Function
Reset will only occur while a resettable function is selected
(highlighted). Push and hold the OK button to clear the
resettable function being displayed.
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES
The warning/indicator lights will illuminate in the instru-
ment panel together with a dedicated message and/or
acoustic signal when applicable. These indications are
indicative and precautionary and as such must not be
considered as exhaustive and/or alternative to the infor-
mation contained in the Owner’s Manual, which you are
advised to read carefully in all cases. Always refer to the
information in this chapter in the event of a failure indica-
tion. All active telltales will display first if applicable. The
system check menu may appear different based upon
equipment options and current vehicle status. Some tell-
tales are optional and may not appear.
Red Warning Lights
— Air Bag Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate a fault with
the air bag, and will turn on for four to eight seconds as a
bulb check when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or
ACC/ON/RUN position. This light will illuminate with a
single chime when a fault with the air bag has been
detected, it will stay on until the fault is cleared. If the light
is either not on during startup, stays on, or turns on while
driving, have the system inspected at an authorized dealer
as soon as possible.
— Brake Warning Light
This warning light monitors various brake functions, in-
cluding brake fluid level and parking brake application. If
the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking
brake is applied, that the brake fluid level is low, or that
there is a problem with the anti-lock brake system reser-
voir.
120 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been
disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the
master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake
hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the
Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system.
In this case, the light will remain on until the condition has
been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake
booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake,
and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity
in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is
indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level conditions.
The vehicle should have service performed, and the brake
fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necessary.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed. It
will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have a
collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution
(EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the Brake Warning
Light will turn on along with the ABS Light. Immediate
repair to the ABS system is required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the
ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for ap-
proximately two seconds. The light should then turn off
unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is
detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light
inspected by an authorized dealer.
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 121
— Battery Charge Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when the battery is not
charging properly. If it stays on while the engine is run-
ning, there may be a malfunction with the charging system.
Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
This indicates a possible problem with the electrical system
or a related component.
— Door Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when a door is ajar/open and
not fully closed.
NOTE: If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single
chime.
— Electric Power Steering Fault Warning Light
This warning light will turn on when there’s a fault with the
EPS (Electric Power Steering) system. Refer to “Power Steer-
ing” in “Starting And Operating” for further information.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced assist could pose a
safety risk to yourself and others. Service should be
obtained as soon as possible.
— Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning
Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate a problem
with the Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If a
problem is detected while the vehicle is running, the light
will either stay on or flash depending on the nature of the
problem. Cycle the ignition when the vehicle is safely and
completely stopped and the transmission is placed in the
PARK position. The light should turn off. If the light
remains on with the vehicle running, your vehicle will
usually be drivable; however, see an authorized dealer for
service as soon as possible.
NOTE: This light may turn on if the accelerator and brake
pedals are pressed at the same time.
If the light continues to flash when the vehicle is running,
immediate service is required and you may experience
reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle, or engine
stall and your vehicle may require towing. The light will
come on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or
ACC/ON/RUN position and remain on briefly as a bulb
check. If the light does not come on during starting, have
the system checked by an authorized dealer.
122 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
— Engine Temperature Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to warn of an overheated
engine condition. If the engine coolant temperature is too
high, this light will illuminate and a single chime will
sound.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and stop
the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also, shift
the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle. If the
temperature reading does not return to normal, turn the
engine off immediately and call for service.
Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “In Case Of
Emergency” for further information.
— Hood Open Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when the hood is left
open and not fully closed.
NOTE: If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single
chime.
— Liftgate Open Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when the liftgate is open.
NOTE: If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single
chime.
— Oil Pressure Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate low engine
oil pressure. If the light turns on while driving, stop the
vehicle, shut off the engine as soon as possible, and contact
an authorized dealer. A chime will sound when this light
turns on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected. This
light does not indicate how much oil is in the engine. The
engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
— Oil Temperature Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate the engine oil
temperature is high. If the light turns on while driving,
stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible.
Wait for oil temperature to return to normal levels.
— Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
This warning light indicates when the driver or passenger
seat belt is unbuckled. When the ignition is first placed in
the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position and if the
driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, a chime will sound and the
light will turn on. When driving, if the driver or front
passenger seat belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Re-
minder Light will flash or remain on continuously and a
chime will sound.
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 123
Refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety” for
further information.
— Transmission Fault Warning Light
This light will illuminate (together with a message in the
instrument cluster display and a buzzer) to indicate a
transmission fault. Contact your authorized dealer if the
message remains after restarting the engine.
— Transmission Temperature Warning Light — If
Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to warn of a high
transmission fluid temperature. This may occur with
strenuous usage such as trailer towing. If this light turns
on, stop the vehicle and run the engine at idle or slightly
faster, with the transmission in PARK or NEUTRAL, until
the light turns off. Once the light turns off, you may
continue to drive normally.
WARNING!
If you continue operating the vehicle when the Trans-
mission Temperature Warning Light is illuminated you
could cause the fluid to boil over, come in contact with
hot engine or exhaust components and cause a fire.
CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission Tempera-
ture Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause
severe transmission damage or transmission failure.
— Vehicle Security Warning Light — If Equipped
This light will flash at a fast rate for approximately 15
seconds when the vehicle security alarm is arming, and
then will flash slowly until the vehicle is disarmed.
Yellow Warning Lights
— Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Warning Light
This warning light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition is placed in
the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position and may stay on
for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, then
the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system is not function-
ing and service is required as soon as possible. However,
the conventional brake system will continue to operate
normally, assuming the Brake Warning Light is not also on.
124 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position, have
the brake system inspected by an authorized dealer.
— Electronic Park Brake Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate the Electronic
Park Brake is not functioning properly and service is
required. Contact an authorized dealer.
— Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active
Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will indicate when the Electronic Sta-
bility Control system is Active. The “ESC Indicator Light”
in the instrument cluster will come on when the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position, and
when ESC is activated. It should go out with the engine
running. If the “ESC Indicator Light” comes on continu-
ously with the engine running, a malfunction has been
detected in the ESC system. If this warning light remains
on after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been
driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than
30 mph (48 km/h), see an authorized dealer as soon as
possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.
• The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC Indicator
Light” come on momentarily each time the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position.
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
when ESC becomes inactive.
• This light will come on when the vehicle is in an ESC
event.
— Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Off Warning
Light — If Equipped
This warning light indicates the Electronic Stability Control
(ESC) is off.
Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN or ACC/ON/
RUN, the ESC system will be on, even if it was turned off
previously.
— Fuel Cutoff Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate after an accident has
occurred, and the system has shut the fuel off.
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 125
— LaneSense Warning Light — If Equipped
The LaneSense Warning Light will be solid yellow when
the vehicle is approaching a lane marker. The warning light
will flash when the vehicle is crossing the lane marker.
Refer to “LaneSense — If Equipped⬙ in “Starting And
Operating” for further information.
— Service LaneSense Warning Light — If
Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when the LaneSense
system is not operating and requires service. Please see an
authorized dealer.
— Low Coolant Level Warning Light
This telltale will turn on to indicate the vehicle coolant
level is low.
— Low Fuel Warning Light
Depending on whether the tank size is 13.5 gal (51 L) or
15.8 gal (60 L), the Low Fuel Indicator Light will turn on
when the fuel level goes below 1.5 gal (5.6 L) or 1.7 gal (6.6
L) respectively.
— Low Washer Fluid Warning Light — If
Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when the windshield
washer fluid is low.
— Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Warning
Light (MIL)
The Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is a
part of an Onboard Diagnostic System called OBD II that
monitors engine and automatic transmission control sys-
tems. This warning light will illuminate when the ignition
is in the ON/RUN position before engine start. If the bulb
does not come on when turning the ignition switch from
OFF to ON/RUN, have the condition checked promptly.
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap, poor
quality fuel, etc., may illuminate the light after engine start.
The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through
several typical driving styles. In most situations, the ve-
hicle will drive normally and will not require towing.
When the engine is running, the MIL may flash to alert
serious conditions that could lead to immediate loss of
power or severe catalytic converter damage. The vehicle
should be serviced by an authorized dealer as soon as
possible if this occurs.
126 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced
above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal
operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you drive
slowly or park over flammable substances such as dry
plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result in death
or serious injury to the driver, occupants or others.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the vehicle
control system. It also could affect fuel economy and
driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic
converter damage and power loss will soon occur.
Immediate service is required.
— Service 4WD Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to signal a fault with the
4WD system. If the light stays on or comes on during
driving, it means that the 4WD system is not functioning
properly and that service is required. We recommend you
drive to the nearest service center and have the vehicle
serviced immediately.
— Service Forward Collision Warning (FCW)
Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to indicate a fault in the
Forward Collision Warning System. Contact an authorized
dealer for service.
Refer to ⬙Forward Collision Warning (FCW)⬙ in ⬙Safety⬙ for
further information.
— Service Stop/Start System Warning Light — If
Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when the Stop/Start
system is not functioning properly and service is required.
Contact an authorized dealer for service.
— Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Warning Light
The warning light switches on and a message is displayed
to indicate that the tire pressure is lower than the recom-
mended value and/or that slow pressure loss is occurring.
In these cases, optimal tire duration and fuel consumption
may not be guaranteed.
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 127
Should one or more tires be in the condition mentioned
above, the display will show the indications corresponding
to each tire.
CAUTION!
Do not continue driving with one or more flat tires as
handling may be compromised. Stop the vehicle,
avoiding sharp braking and steering. If a tire puncture
occurs, repair immediately using the dedicated tire
repair kit and contact an authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be
checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your
vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated
on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you
should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for
those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or
more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accord-
ingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you
should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and
inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a signifi-
cantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and
can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel
efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s
handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to main-
tain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not
reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low
tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunc-
tion indicator to indicate when the system is not operating
properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined
with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects
a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one
minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This
sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups
as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction
indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to
detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS
malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including
128 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels
on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning
properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after
replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels
allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original equip-
ment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and warning
have been established for the tire size equipped on
your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor
damage may result when using replacement equip-
ment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style.
Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage. Using
aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to become inoper-
able. After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is
recommended that you take your vehicle to your au-
thorized dealer to have your sensor function checked.
— Towing Hook Breakdown Warning Light — If
Equipped
This light illuminates when there is a failure with the tow
hook. Contact an authorized dealer for service.
Yellow Indicator Lights
— 4WD Low Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in the
four-wheel drive LOW mode. The front and rear drive-
shafts are mechanically locked together forcing the front
and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. Low range
provides a greater gear reduction ratio to provide increased
torque at the wheels.
Refer to “Four-Wheel Drive Operation — If Equipped” in
“Starting And Operating” for further information on four-
wheel drive operation and proper use.
— 4WD Lock Indicator Light
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in the
four-wheel drive LOCK mode. The front and rear drive-
shafts are mechanically locked together, forcing the front
and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed.
Refer to “Four-Wheel Drive Operation” in “Starting And
Operating” for further information on four-wheel drive
operation and proper use.
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 129
— Forward Collision Indicator Light — If
Equipped
This telltale will turn on to warn you of a possible collision
with the vehicle in front of you.
— Forward Collision Warning Off Indicator Light
— If Equipped
This indicator light illuminates to indicate that Forward
Collision Warning is off.
— Immobilizer Fail / VPS Electrical Alarm
Indicator Light
This telltale will illuminate when the vehicle security alarm
system has detected an attempt to break into the vehicle.
NOTE: After cycling the ignition to the ON/RUN posi-
tion, the Vehicle Security Warning Light could illuminate if
a problem with the system is detected. This condition will
result in the engine being shut off after two seconds.
Green Indicator Lights
— LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped
The LaneSense indicator light illuminates solid green when
both lane markings have been detected and the system is
“armed” and ready to provide visual and torque warnings
if an unintentional lane departure occurs.
Refer to “LaneSense — If Equipped⬙ in “Starting And
Operating” for further information.
— Park/Headlight On Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate when the park lights or
headlights are turned on.
— Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when the front fog
lights are on.
— Turn Signal Indicator Lights
When the left or right turn signal is activated, the turn
signal indicator will flash independently and the corre-
sponding exterior turn signal lamps will flash. Turn signals
can be activated when the multifunction lever is moved
down (left) or up (right).
130 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE:
• A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven
more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn signal on.
• Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either
indicator flashes at a rapid rate.
— Cruise Control SET Indicator Light — If
Equipped With A Premium Instrument Cluster
This indicator light will illuminate when the speed control
is set to the desired speed. Refer to “Speed Control — If
Equipped” in “Starting And Operating” for further infor-
mation.
— Stop/Start Active Indicator Light — If
Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when the Stop/Start
function is in “Autostop” mode.
— Automatic High Beam Indicator Light — If
Equipped
This indicator shows that the automatic high beam head-
lights are on.
White Indicator Lights
— LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped
When the LaneSense system is ON, but not armed, the
LaneSense indicator light illuminates solid white. This
occurs when only left, right, or neither lane line has been
detected. If a single lane line is detected, the system is
ready to provide only visual warnings if an unintentional
lane departure occurs on the detected lane line.
Refer to “LaneSense — If Equipped⬙ in “Starting And
Operating” for further information.
— Hill Descent Control (HDC) Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This indicator shows when the Hill Descent Control (HDC)
feature is turned on. The lamp will be on solid when HDC
is armed. HDC can only be armed when the transfer case is
in the “4WD LOW” position and the vehicle speed is less
then 30 mph (48 km/h). If these conditions are not met
while attempting to use the HDC feature, the HDC indi-
cator light will flash on/off.
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 131
— Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light — If
Equipped With A Premium Instrument Cluster
This light will turn on when the speed control has been
turned on, but not set. Refer to “Speed Control — If
Equipped” in “Starting And Operating” for further infor-
mation.
— Cruise Control SET Indicator Light — If
Equipped With Base Instrument Cluster
This indicator light will illuminate when the speed control
is set.
Refer to “Speed Control — If Equipped” in “Starting And
Operating” for further information.
— Speed Warning Indicator Light — If Equipped
When Set Speed Warning is turned on and when the set
speed is exceeded, a single chime will sound along with
pop up message of “Speed Warning Exceeded.” Speed
Warning can be turned on and off in the instrument cluster
display.
Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display Menu Items” in
“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
The number “55” is only an example of a speed that can be
set.
Blue Indicator Lights
— High Beam Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate to indicate that the high
beam headlights are on. With the low beams activated,
push the multifunction lever forward (toward the front of
the vehicle) to turn on the high beams. Pull the multifunc-
tion lever rearward (toward the rear of the vehicle) to turn
off the high beams. If the high beams are off, pull the lever
toward you for a temporary high beam on, ⬙flash to pass⬙
scenario.
Gray Indicator Lights
— Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light — If
Equipped With Base Instrument Cluster
This light will turn on when the speed control has been
turned on, but not set. Refer to “Speed Control — If
Equipped” in “Starting And Operating” for further infor-
mation.
132 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated Onboard
Diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors the
performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic trans-
mission control systems. When these systems are operating
properly, your vehicle will provide excellent performance
and fuel economy, as well as emissions well within current
government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL). It will
also store diagnostic codes and other information to assist
your service technician in making repairs. Although your
vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing, see
an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.
CAUTION!
• Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
further damage to the emission control system. It
could also affect fuel economy and driveability. The
vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests
can be performed.
• If the MIL is flashing while the vehicle is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II) Cybersecurity
Your vehicle is required to have an Onboard Diagnostic
system (OBD II) and a connection port to allow access to
information related to the performance of your emissions
controls. Authorized service technicians may need to ac-
cess this information to assist with the diagnosis and
service of your vehicle and emissions system.
WARNING!
•
ONLY an authorized service technician should connect
equipment to the OBD II connection port in order to
read the VIN, diagnose, or service your vehicle.
• If unauthorized equipment is connected to the
OBD II connection port, such as a driver-behavior
tracking device, it may:
• Be possible that vehicle systems, including safety
related systems, could be impaired or a loss of
vehicle control could occur that may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
• Access, or allow others to access, information
stored in your vehicle systems, including personal
information.
For further information, refer to “Cybersecurity” in “Mul-
timedia”.
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 133
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass an
inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
For states that require an Inspection and Main-
tenance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunc-
tion Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is
not on when the engine is running, and that the
OBD II system is ready for testing.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replace-
ment. If the OBD II system should be determined not ready
for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test, which you
can use prior to going to the test station. To check if your
vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must do the follow-
ing:
1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, but do not
crank or start the engine.
NOTE: If you crank or start the engine, you will have to
start this test over.
2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the ON
position, you will see the “Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL)” symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check.
3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will
happen:
• The MIL will flash for about ten seconds and then return
to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF the igni-
tion or start the engine. This means that your vehicle’s
OBD II system is not ready and you should not proceed
to the I/M station.
• The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
illuminated until you place the ignition in the off posi-
tion or start the engine. This means that your vehicle’s
OBD II system is ready and you can proceed to the I/M
station.
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see an
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,
you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle
as you normally would in order for your OBD II system to
update. A recheck with the above test routine may then
indicate that the system is now ready.
134 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is
ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal
vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced
before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail
your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine
running.
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 135
SAFETY
CONTENTS
䡵 SAFETY FEATURES ......................138
▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .............138
▫ Electronic Brake Control System ............139
䡵 AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS .............150
▫ Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) — If Equipped . . .150
▫ Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With Mitigation
— If Equipped ........................158
▫ Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) ........162
䡵 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS ..........168
▫ Occupant Restraint Systems Features ........168
▫ Important Safety Precautions ..............168
▫ Seat Belt Systems ......................169
▫ Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) ........182
▫ Child Restraints .......................204
▫ Transporting Pets ......................221
䡵 SAFETY TIPS ...........................221
▫ Transporting Passengers ..................221
▫ Exhaust Gas ..........................222
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle ..............................223
▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle ...........................225
5
SAFETY FEATURES
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) provides increased
vehicle stability and brake performance under most brak-
ing conditions. The system automatically prevents wheel
lock, and enhances vehicle control during braking.
The ABS performs a self-check cycle to ensure that the ABS
is working properly each time the vehicle is started and
driven. During this self-check, you may hear a slight
clicking sound as well as some related motor noises.
ABS is activated during braking when the system detects
one or more wheels begin to lock. Road conditions such as
ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose debris, or
panic stops may increase the likelihood of ABS activa-
tion(s).
You also may experience the following when ABS activates:
• The ABS motor noise (it may continue to run for a short
time after the stop).
• The clicking sound of solenoid valves.
• Brake pedal pulsations.
• A slight drop of the brake pedal at the end of the stop.
These are all normal characteristics of ABS.
WARNING!
• The ABS contains sophisticated electronic equip-
ment that may be susceptible to interference caused
by improperly installed or high output radio trans-
mitting equipment. This interference can cause pos-
sible loss of anti-lock braking capability. Installation
of such equipment should be performed by qualified
professionals.
• Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish their
effectiveness and may lead to a collision. Pumping
makes the stopping distance longer. Just press firmly
on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or
stop.
• The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase brak-
ing or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the
condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the
traction afforded.
• The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, following
another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.
(Continued)
138 SAFETY
WARNING! (Continued)
• The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner
that could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
ABS is designed to function with the OEM tires. Modifica-
tion may result in degraded ABS performance.
Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light
The yellow “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” will turn on
when the ignition is turned to the ON/RUN mode and
may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” remains on or
comes on while driving, it indicates that the anti-lock
portion of the brake system is not functioning and that
service is required. However, the conventional brake sys-
tem will continue to operate normally if the “Anti-Lock
Brake Warning Light” is on.
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” is on, the brake
system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the
benefits of anti-lock brakes. If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning
Light” does not come on when the ignition is turned to the
ON/RUN mode, have the light repaired as soon as possible.
Electronic Brake Control System
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced Electronic
Brake Control system (EBC). This system includes Elec-
tronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD), Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS), Brake Assist System (BAS), Hill Start Assist
(HSA), Traction Control System (TCS), Electronic Stability
Control (ESC), and Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM). These
systems work together to enhance both vehicle stability
and control in various driving conditions.
Your vehicle may also be equipped with Ready Alert
Braking (RAB), Rain Brake Support (RBS), Trailer Sway
Control (TSC), Hill Descent Control (HDC), and Dynamic
Steering Torque (DST).
Traction Control System (TCS)
This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of
the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, the TCS may
apply brake pressure to the spinning wheel(s) and/or
reduce vehicle power to provide enhanced acceleration
and stability. A feature of the TCS, Brake Limited Differen-
tial (BLD), functions similar to a limited slip differential
and controls the wheel spin across a driven axle. If one
wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other, the
system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel. This
5
SAFETY 139
will allow more vehicle torque to be applied to the wheel
that is not spinning. BLD may remain enabled even if TCS
and ESC are in a reduced mode.
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking
capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The sys-
tem detects an emergency braking situation by sensing the
rate and amount of brake application and then applies
optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help reduce
braking distances. The BAS complements the anti-lock
brake system (ABS). Applying the brakes very quickly
results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the benefit of
the system, you must apply continuous braking pressure
during the stopping sequence, (do not “pump” the brakes).
Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no
longer desired. Once the brake pedal is released, the BAS is
deactivated.
WARNING!
The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent the
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor
can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road
conditions. BAS cannot prevent collisions, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving
on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capa-
bilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which
could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
Brake System Warning Light
The red “Brake System Warning Light” will turn on when
the ignition is turned to the ON/RUN mode and may stay
on for as long as four seconds.
If the “Brake System Warning Light” remains on or comes
on while driving, it indicates that the brake system is not
functioning properly and that immediate service is re-
quired. If the “Brake System Warning Light” does not come
on when the ignition is turned to the ON/RUN mode, have
the light repaired as soon as possible.
140 SAFETY
Dynamic Steering Torque (DST)
Dynamic Steering Torque is a feature of the ESC and
Electric Power Steering (EPS) modules that provides
torque at the steering wheel for certain driving conditions
in which the ESC module is detecting vehicle instability.
The torque that the steering wheel receives is only meant to
help the driver realize optimal steering behavior in order to
reach/maintain vehicle stability. The only notification the
driver receives that the feature is active is the torque
applied to the steering wheel.
NOTE: The DST feature is only meant to help the driver
realize the correct course of action through small torques
on the steering wheel, which means the effectiveness of the
DST feature is highly dependent on the driver’s sensitivity
and overall reaction to the applied torque. It is very
important to realize that this feature will not steer the
vehicle, meaning the driver is still responsible for steering
the vehicle.
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
This function manages the distribution of the braking
torque between the front and rear axles by limiting braking
pressure to the rear axle. This is done to prevent overslip of
the rear wheels to avoid vehicle instability, and to prevent
the rear axle from entering ABS before the front axle.
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by
monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and the speed
of the vehicle. When ERM determines that the rate of
change of the steering wheel angle and vehicle’s speed are
sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift, it then applies the
appropriate brake and may also reduce engine power to
lessen the chance that wheel lift will occur. ERM can only
reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring during severe or
evasive driving maneuvers; it cannot prevent wheel lift
due to other factors, such as road conditions, leaving the
roadway, or striking objects or other vehicles.
WARNING!
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road conditions
and driving conditions, influence the chance that
wheel lift or rollover may occur. ERM cannot prevent
all wheel lift or roll overs, especially those that involve
leaving the roadway or striking objects or other ve-
hicles. The capabilities of an ERM-equipped vehicle
must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the
safety of others.
5
SAFETY 141
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
This system enhances directional control and stability of
the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC corrects
for oversteering or understeering of the vehicle by apply-
ing the brake of the appropriate wheel(s) to assist in
counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition. En-
gine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle
maintain the desired path.
ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle
path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual
path of the vehicle. When the actual path does not match
the intended path, ESC applies the brake of the appropriate
wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer
condition.
• Oversteer — when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
• Understeer — when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” located
in the instrument cluster will start to flash as soon as the
ESC system becomes active. The “ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light” also flashes when the TCS is
active. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the
accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure to
adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road
conditions.
WARNING!
• Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent the
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle,
nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing
road conditions. ESC cannot prevent accidents, in-
cluding those resulting from excessive speed in
turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydro-
planing. ESC also cannot prevent accidents resulting
from loss of vehicle control due to inappropriate
driver input for the conditions. Only a safe, attentive,
and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capa-
bilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which
could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
(Continued)
142 SAFETY
WARNING! (Continued)
• Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly main-
tain your vehicle, may change the handling charac-
teristics of your vehicle, and may negatively affect
the performance of the ESC system. Changes to the
steering system, suspension, braking system, tire
type and size or wheel size may adversely affect ESC
performance. Improperly inflated and unevenly
worn tires may also degrade ESC performance. Any
vehicle modification or poor vehicle maintenance
that reduces the effectiveness of the ESC system can
increase the risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle
rollover, personal injury and death.
ESC Operating Modes
NOTE: Depending upon model and mode of operation, the
ESC system may have multiple operating modes.
ESC On
This is the normal operating mode for the ESC. Whenever
the vehicle is started, the ESC system will be in this mode.
This mode should be used for most driving conditions.
Alternate ESC modes should only be used for specific
reasons as noted in the following paragraphs.
ESC OFF Button
5
SAFETY 143
Partial Off
The “Partial Off” mode is intended for times when a more
spirited driving experience is desired. This mode may
modify TCS and ESC thresholds for activation, which
allows for more wheel spin than normally allowed. This
mode may be useful if the vehicle becomes stuck.
To enter the “Partial Off” mode, momentarily push the
“ESC Off” switch and the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will
illuminate. To turn the ESC on again, momentarily push
the “ESC Off” switch and the “ESC Off Indicator Light”
will turn off.
NOTE: When driving with snow chains, or when starting
off in deep snow, sand, or gravel, it may be desirable to
allow more wheel spin. This can be accomplished by
momentarily pushing the “ESC Off” button to enter partial
mode “Partial Off” mode. Once the situation requiring
“Partial Off” mode is overcome, turn ESC back on by
momentarily pushing the “ESC Off” button. This may be
done while the vehicle is in motion.
WARNING!
• When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS functionality
of ESC, (except for the limited slip feature described
in the TCS section), has been disabled and the “ESC
Off Indicator Light” will be illuminated. When in
“Partial Off” mode, the engine power reduction
feature of TCS is disabled, and the enhanced vehicle
stability offered by the ESC system is reduced.
• Trailer Sway control (TSC) is disabled when the ESC
system is in the “Partial Off” mode.
Full Off (Four-Wheel Drive Models Only)
This mode is intended for off-highway or off-road use
when ESC stability features could inhibit vehicle maneu-
verability due to trail conditions. This mode is entered by
pushing and holding the “ESC Off” switch for five seconds
when the vehicle is stopped and the engine is running.
After five seconds, the ⬙ESC OFF Indicator Light⬙ will
illuminate and the “ESC OFF” message will appear in the
instrument cluster display.
144 SAFETY
In this mode, ESC and TCS, except for the “limited slip”
feature described in the TCS section, are turned off until the
vehicle reaches a speed of 40 mph (64 km/h). At 40 mph
(64 km/h), the system returns to “Partial Off” mode, as
described above. TCS remains off. When the vehicle speed
drops below 30 mph (48 km/h), the ESC system shuts off.
ESC is deactivated at low vehicle speeds so that it will not
interfere with off-road driving however, ESC function
returns to provide the stability feature at speeds above
40 mph (64 km/h). The ⬙ESC OFF Indicator Light⬙ will
always be illuminated when ESC is off.
To turn ESC on again, momentarily push the “ESC Off”
switch. This will restore the “ESC On” mode of operation.
NOTE: The “ESC OFF” message will display and an
audible chime will sound when the gear selector is placed
into the PARK position from any other position, and then
moved out of the PARK position. This will occur even if the
message was previously cleared.
WARNING!
In the ⴖFull Offⴖ mode, the engine torque reduction and
stability features are disabled. In an emergency evasive
maneuver, the ESC system will not engage to assist in
maintaining stability. “ESC Off” mode is intended for
off-highway or off-road use only.
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And
ESC OFF Indicator Light
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on
when the ignition is turned to the ON mode. It
should go out with the engine running. If the
“ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” comes on
continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has
been detected in the ESC system. If this light remains on
after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been
driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than
30 mph (48 km/h), see an authorized dealer as soon as
possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.
5
SAFETY 145
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” (lo-
cated in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as the
tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active. The
“ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also flashes
when TCS is active. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction
Indicator Light” begins to flash during acceleration, ease
up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible.
Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing
road conditions.
NOTE:
• The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” and
the “ESC OFF Indicator Light” come on momentarily
each time the ignition is turned ON.
• Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESC system will
be on even if it was turned off previously.
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver
that caused the ESC activation.
The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” indicates the
customer has elected to have the Electronic Sta-
bility Control (ESC) in a reduced mode.
Hill Descent Control (HDC) — If Equipped
HDC is intended for low speed off road driving while in
4WD Low Range. HDC maintains vehicle speed while
descending hills during various driving situations. HDC
controls vehicle speed by actively controlling the brakes.
Hill Descent Control (Trailhawk)
146 SAFETY
HDC has three states:
1. Off (feature is not enabled and will not activate).
2. Enabled (feature is enabled and ready but activation
conditions are not met, or driver is actively overriding
with brake or throttle application).
3. Active (feature is enabled and actively controlling ve-
hicle speed).
Enabling HDC
HDC is enabled by pushing the HDC switch, but the
following conditions must also be met to enable HDC:
• Driveline is in 4WD Low Range.
• Vehicle speed is below 7.5 mph (12 km/h).
• Electric Park Brake (EPB) is released.
• Driver’s door is closed.
Activating HDC
Once HDC is enabled, it will activate automatically if
driven down a grade of sufficient magnitude (greater than
approximately 8%). The set speed for HDC is selectable by
the driver and can be adjusted within the thresholds by
using throttle or brake application.
Driver Override:
The driver may override HDC activation speed with
throttle or brake application at anytime.
Deactivating HDC
HDC will be deactivated but remain available if any of the
following conditions occur:
• Driver overrides HDC set speed with a speed exceeding
7.5 mph (12 km/h) but remains below 25 mph
(40 km/h).
• Vehicle is on a downhill grade of insufficient magnitude
(less than approximately 8%), is on level ground, or is on
an uphill grade.
• Vehicle is shifted to PARK.
Disabling HDC
HDC will be deactivated and disabled if any of the
following conditions occur:
• The driver pushes the HDC switch.
• The driveline is shifted out of 4WD Low Range.
• Driver’s door opens.
5
SAFETY 147
• The vehicle is driven greater than 25 mph (40 km/h)
(HDC exits immediately.)
Feedback To The Driver:
The instrument cluster has an HDC icon and the HDC
switch has an LED which offer feedback to the driver about
the state HDC is in.
• The cluster icon and switch lamp will illuminate and
remain solid when HDC is enabled or activated. This is
the normal operating condition for HDC.
• The switch lamp will flash for several seconds then
extinguish when the driver pushes the HDC switch
when enable conditions have not been met.
The Hill Descent Switch is located within the Selec-Terrain
knob in the upper right position.
WARNING!
HDC is only intended to assist the driver in controlling
vehicle speed when descending hills. The driver must
remain attentive to the driving conditions and is re-
sponsible for maintaining a safe vehicle speed.
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
The HSA system is designed to mitigate roll back from a
complete stop while on an incline. If the driver releases the
brake while stopped on an incline, HSA will continue to
hold the brake pressure for a short period. If the driver
does not apply the throttle before this time expires, the
system will release brake pressure and the vehicle will roll
down the hill as normal.
The following conditions must be met in order for HSA to
activate:
• The feature must be enabled.
• The vehicle must be stopped.
• Park brake must be off.
• Driver door must be closed.
• The vehicle must be on a sufficient grade.
• The gear selection must match vehicle uphill direction
(i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle
backing uphill is in REVERSE gear).
• HSA will work in REVERSE gear and all forward gears.
The system will not activate if the transmission is in
PARK or NEUTRAL. For vehicles equipped with a
manual transmission, if the clutch is pressed, HSA will
remain active.
148 SAFETY
WARNING!
There may be situations where the Hill Start Assist
(HSA) will not activate and slight rolling may occur,
such as on minor hills or with a loaded vehicle, or
while pulling a trailer. HSA is not a substitute for
active driving involvement. It is always the driver’s
responsibility to be attentive to distance to other ve-
hicles, people, and objects, and most importantly brake
operation to ensure safe operation of the vehicle under
all road conditions. Your complete attention is always
required while driving to maintain safe control of your
vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings can result in
a collision or serious personal injury.
Towing With HSA
HSA will also provide assistance to mitigate roll back while
towing a trailer.
WARNING!
• If you use a trailer brake controller with your trailer,
the trailer brakes may be activated and deactivated
with the brake switch. If so, there may not be enough
brake pressure to hold both the vehicle and the
trailer on a hill when the brake pedal is released. In
order to avoid rolling down an incline while resum-
ing acceleration, manually activate the trailer brake
or apply more vehicle brake pressure prior to releas-
ing the brake pedal.
• HSA is not a parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when exiting your vehicle. Also,
be certain to place the transmission in PARK.
• Failure to follow these warnings can result in a
collision or serious personal injury.
Disabling And Enabling HSA
This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change the
current setting, proceed as follows:
• If disabling HSA using Uconnect Settings, refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further infor-
mation.
5
SAFETY 149
Rain Brake Support (RBS)
Rain Brake Support may improve braking performance in
wet conditions. It will periodically apply a small amount of
brake pressure to remove any water buildup on the front
brake rotors. It functions when the windshield wipers are
in LO or HI speed. When Rain Brake Support is active,
there is no notification to the driver and no driver interac-
tion is required.
Ready Alert Braking (RAB)
Ready Alert Braking may reduce the time required to reach
full braking during emergency braking situations. It antici-
pates when an emergency braking situation may occur by
monitoring how fast the throttle is released by the driver.
The EBC will prepare the brake system for a panic stop.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an excessively
swaying trailer and will take the appropriate actions to
attempt to stop the sway. TSC will become active automati-
cally once an excessively swaying trailer is recognized.
NOTE: TSC cannot stop all trailers from swaying. Always
use caution when towing a trailer and follow the trailer
tongue weight recommendations. Refer to “Trailer Tow-
ing” in “Starting And Operating” for further information.
When TSC is functioning, the “ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light” will flash, the engine power
may be reduced and you may feel the brakes being applied
to individual wheels to attempt to stop the trailer from
swaying. TSC is disabled when the ESC system is in the
“Partial Off” or “Full Off” modes.
WARNING!
If TSC activates while driving, slow the vehicle down,
stop at the nearest safe location, and adjust the trailer
load to eliminate trailer sway.
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) — If Equipped
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system uses two radar-
based sensors, located inside the rear bumper fascia, to
detect highway licensable vehicles (automobiles, trucks,
motorcycles, etc.) that enter the blind spot zones from the
rear/front/side of the vehicle.
150 SAFETY
When the vehicle is started, the BSM warning light will
momentarily illuminate in both outside rear view mirrors
to let the driver know that the system is operational. The
BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle is in any
forward gear or REVERSE and enters stand-by mode when
the vehicle is in PARK.
The BSM detection zone covers approximately one lane
width on both sides of the vehicle 12 ft (3.8 m). The zone
length starts at the outside mirror and extends approxi-
mately 10 ft (3 m) beyond the rear bumper of the vehicle.
The BSM system monitors the detection zones on both
sides of the vehicle when the vehicle speed reaches ap-
proximately 6 mph (10 km/h) or higher and will alert the
driver of vehicles in these areas.
NOTE:
• The BSM system does NOT alert the driver about
rapidly approaching vehicles that are outside the detec-
tion zones.
• The BSM system detection zone DOES NOT change if
your vehicle is towing a trailer. Therefore, visually verify
the adjacent lane is clear for both your vehicle and trailer
before making a lane change. If the trailer or other object
(i.e., bicycle, sports equipment) extends beyond the side
of your vehicle, this may result in the BSM warning light
remaining illuminated the entire time the vehicle is in a
forward gear. It may be necessary to deactivate the BSM
system manually to avoid miss-detection. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further infor-
mation.
• The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system may experi-
ence drop outs (blinking on and off) of the side mirror
Warning Indicator lamps when a motorcycle or any
small object remains at the side of the vehicle for
extended periods of time (more than a couple of sec-
onds).
Rear Detection Zones
5
SAFETY 151
The area on the rear fascia where the radar sensors are
located must remain free of snow, ice, and dirt/road
contamination so that the BSM system can function prop-
erly. Do not block the area of the rear fascia where the radar
sensors are located with foreign objects (bumper stickers,
bicycle racks, etc.)
The BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appro-
priate side view mirror based on a detected object. If the
turn signal is then activated, and it corresponds to an alert
present on that side of the vehicle, an audible chime will
also be sounded. Whenever a turn signal and detected
object are present on the same side at the same time, both
the visual and audio alerts will be issued. In addition to the
audible alert the radio (if on) will also be muted.
The BSM system monitors the detection zone from three
different entry points (side, rear, front) while driving to see
if an alert is necessary. The BSM system will issue an alert
during these types of zone entries.
Radar Sensor Location (Driver Side Shown)
Warning Light Location
152 SAFETY
Entering From The Side
Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from either
side of the vehicle.
Entering From The Rear
Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on either
side and enter the rear detection zone with a relative speed
of less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
Side Monitoring
Rear Monitoring
5
SAFETY 153
Overtaking Traffic
If you pass another vehicle slowly with a relative speed less
than 10 mph (16 km/h) and the vehicle remains in the
blind spot for approximately 1.5 seconds, the warning light
will be illuminated. If the difference in speed between the
two vehicles is greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), the warning
light will not illuminate.
Overtaking/Approaching
Overtaking/Passing
154 SAFETY
The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert on
stationary objects such as guardrails, posts, walls, foliage,
berms, etc. However, occasionally the system may alert on
such objects. This is normal operation and your vehicle
does not require service.
The BSM system will not alert you of objects that are
traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle in adjacent
lanes.
NOTE: The BSM system may experience drop outs (blink-
ing on and off) in the side mirror LED icons while a
motorcycle, or any small target, remains at the vehicle’s
B-pillar for an extended period of time (longer than a
couple of seconds).
Stationary Objects
Opposing Traffic
5
SAFETY 155
WARNING!
The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid to
help detect objects in the blind spot zones. The BSM
system is not designed to detect pedestrians, bicyclists,
or animals. Even if your vehicle is equipped with the
BSM system, always check your vehicle’s mirrors,
glance over your shoulder, and use your turn signal
before changing lanes. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
Rear Cross Path (RCP)
The Rear Cross Path (RCP) feature is intended to aid the
driver when backing out of parking spaces where their
vision of oncoming vehicles may be blocked. Proceed
slowly and cautiously out of the parking space until the
rear end of the vehicle is exposed. The RCP system will
then have a clear view of the cross traffic and if an
oncoming vehicle is detected, alert the driver.
RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both sides of the
vehicle, for objects that are moving toward the side of the
vehicle with a minimum speed of approximately 3 mph
(5 km/h), to objects moving a maximum of approximately
20 mph (32 km/h), such as in parking lot situations.
NOTE: In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can be
obscured by vehicles parked on either side. If the sensors
are blocked by other structures or vehicles, the system will
not be able to alert the driver.
RCP Detection Zones
156 SAFETY
When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE, the driver
is alerted using both the visual and audible alarms, includ-
ing reducing the radio volume.
WARNING!
Rear Cross Path Detection (RCP) is not a back up aid
system. It is intended to be used to help a driver detect
an oncoming vehicle in a parking lot situation. Drivers
must be careful when backing up, even when using
RCP. Always check carefully behind your vehicle, look
behind you, and be sure to check for pedestrians,
animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots
before backing up. Failure to do so can result in serious
injury or death.
Modes Of Operation
Three selectable modes of operation are available in the
Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multi-
media” for further information.
Blind Spot Alert Lights Only (Default Setting)
When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the BSM system
will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side view
mirror based on a detected object. However, when the
system is operating in Rear Cross Path (RCP) mode, the
system will respond with both visual and audible alerts
when a detected object is present. Whenever an audible
alert is requested, the radio is muted.
Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime mode,
the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appro-
priate side view mirror based on a detected object. If the
turn signal is then activated, and it corresponds to an alert
present on that side of the vehicle, an audible chime will
also be sounded. Whenever a turn signal and detected
object are present on the same side at the same time, both
the visual and audible alerts will be issued. In addition to
the audible alert the radio (if on) will also be muted.
NOTE: Whenever an audible alert is requested by the BSM
system, the radio is also muted.
When the system is in RCP, the system shall respond with
both visual and audible alerts when a detected object is
present. Whenever an audible alert is requested, the radio
volume is reduced. Turn/hazard signal status is ignored;
the RCP state always requests the chime.
5
SAFETY 157
Blind Spot Alert Off
When the BSM system is turned off there will be no visual
or audible alerts from either the BSM or RCP systems.
NOTE:
The BSM system will store the current operating
mode when the vehicle is shut off. Each time the vehicle is
started the previously stored mode will be recalled and used.
Blocked Sensor
If the system detects degraded performance due to con-
tamination or foreign objects, a message will warn you of a
blocked sensor and the warning indicators in side view
mirrors will be illuminated. The warning indicators will
remain illuminated until blockage clearing conditions are
met. First clear the fascia area around the sensors of the
blockage. After removing the blockage, reset the system by
cycling the ignition from ON to OFF and then back ON.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received, in-
cluding interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With Mitigation
— If Equipped
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With Mitigation
Operation
The Forward Collision Warning (FCW) system with miti-
gation provides the driver with audible warnings, visual
warnings (within the instrument cluster display), and may
apply a brake jerk to warn the driver when it detects a
potential frontal collision. The warnings and limited brak-
ing are intended to provide the driver with enough time to
react, avoid or mitigate the potential collision.
NOTE: FCW monitors the information from the forward
looking sensors as well as the Electronic Brake Controller
(EBC), to calculate the probability of a forward collision.
When the system determines that a forward collision is
probable, the driver will be provided with audible and
visual warnings and may provide a brake jerk warning.
158 SAFETY
If the driver does not take action based upon these pro-
gressive warnings, then the system will provide a limited
level of active braking to help slow the vehicle and mitigate
the potential forward collision. If the driver reacts to the
warnings by braking and the system determines that the
driver intends to avoid the collision by braking but has not
applied sufficient brake force, the system will compensate
and provide additional brake force as required.
If a Forward Collision Warning with Mitigation event
begins at a speed below 26 mph (42 km/h), the system may
provide the maximum braking possible to mitigate the
potential forward collision. If the Forward Collision Warn-
ing with Mitigation event stops the vehicle completely, the
system will hold the vehicle at standstill for two seconds
and then release the brakes.
When the system determines a collision with the vehicle in
front of you is no longer probable, the warning message
will be deactivated.
NOTE:
• The minimum speed for FCW activation is 1 mph
(2 km/h).
• The FCW alerts may be triggered on objects other than
vehicles such as guard rails or sign posts based on the
course prediction. This is expected and is a part of
normal FCW activation and functionality.
FCW Message
5
SAFETY 159
• It is unsafe to test the FCW system. To prevent such
misuse of the system, after four Active Braking events
within a key cycle, the Active Braking portion of FCW
will be deactivated until the next key cycle.
• The FCW system is intended for on-road use only. If the
vehicle is taken off-road, the FCW system should be
deactivated to prevent unnecessary warnings to the
surroundings.
WARNING!
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not intended to
avoid a collision on its own, nor can FCW detect every
type of potential collision. The driver has the respon-
sibility to avoid a collision by controlling the vehicle
via braking and steering. Failure to follow this warn-
ing could lead to serious injury or death.
FCW Settings
The forward collision menu setting is located in the
Uconnect settings.
NOTE: The default status of FCW is “Full On,” this allows
the system to provide warning and autonomous braking in
the event of a potential frontal collision.
Changing the FCW status to “Warning Only” prevents the
system from providing autonomous braking, or additional
brake support if the driver is not braking adequately in the
event of a potential frontal collision.
Changing the FCW status to off deactivates the system, so
no warning or autonomous braking will be available in
case of a possible collision
NOTE: The FCW system state is kept in memory from one
ignition cycle to the next. If the system is turned off, it will
remain off when the vehicle is restarted.
Changing FCW Sensitivity And Operating Status
The FCW Sensitivity And Operation Settings are program-
mable through the Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect
Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.
The default status of FCW is the “Medium” setting and the
FCW is in the “Full On” setting. This allows the system to
warn the driver of a possible collision with the vehicle in
front using audible/visual warnings and it applies autono-
mous braking.
160 SAFETY
Changing the FCW status to “Far” setting allows the
system to warn the driver of a possible collision with the
vehicle in front using audible/visual warning when the
latter is at a farther distance than ⬙Medium⬙ setting. This
provides the most reaction time to avoid a possible colli-
sion.
Changing the FCW status to the “Near” setting, allows the
system to warn the driver of a possible collision with the
vehicle in front when the distance between the vehicle in
the front is much closer. This setting provides less reaction
time than the “Far” and “Medium” settings, which allows
for a more dynamic driving experience.
NOTE:
• The system will retain the last setting selected by the
driver after ignition shut down.
• FCW may not react to irrelevant objects such as over-
head objects, ground reflections, objects not in the path
of the vehicle, stationary objects that are far away,
oncoming traffic, or leading vehicles with the same or
higher rate of speed.
• If FCW is disabled, unavailable screens will be dis-
played.
FCW Limited Warning
If the instrument cluster display reads “FCW Limited
Functionality” or “FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front
Windshield” momentarily, there may be a condition that
limits FCW functionality. Although the vehicle is still
drivable under normal conditions, the active braking may
not be fully available. Once the condition that limited the
system performance is no longer present, the system will
return to its full performance state. If the problem persists,
see an authorized dealer.
Service FCW Warning
If the system turns off, and the instrument cluster display
reads “FCW Unavailable Service Required”, there is an
internal system fault. Although the vehicle is still drivable
under normal conditions, have the system checked by an
authorized dealer.
5
SAFETY 161
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received, in-
cluding interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn the
driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recom-
mended cold placard pressure.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by approxi-
mately 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that
when the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure
will decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on
cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire
pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a three
hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure must not
exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the
tire sidewall. Refer to “Tires” in “Servicing And Mainte-
nance” for information on how to properly inflate the
vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will also increase as the
vehicle is driven. This is normal and there should be no
adjustment for this increased pressure.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the
tire pressure falls below the low-pressure warning limit for
any reason, including low temperature effects and natural
pressure loss through the tire. The TPMS will continue to
warn the driver of low tire pressure as long as the
condition exists, and will not turn off until the tire pressure
is at or above the recommended cold placard pressure.
NOTE: Once the low tire pressure warning (Tire Pressure
Monitoring System Warning Light) illuminates, you must
increase the tire pressure to the recommended cold placard
pressure in order for the Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Warning Light to turn off.
162 SAFETY
NOTE: When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need
to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (28 kPa) above the
recommended cold placard pressure in order to turn the
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light off.
The system will automatically update and the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System Warning Light will turn off once the
system receives the updated tire pressures. The vehicle
may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
(24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this informa-
tion.
For example, your vehicle may have a recommended cold
(parked for more than three hours) placard pressure of 33
psi (227 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C) and
the measured tire pressure is 28 psi (193 kPa), a tempera-
ture drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire pressure to
approximately 24 psi (165 kPa). This tire pressure is low
enough to turn on the Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Warning Light. Driving the vehicle may cause the tire
pressure to rise to approximately 28 psi (193 kPa), but the
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light will still be
on. In this situation, the Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Warning Light will turn off only after the tires are inflated
to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure value.
NOTE: When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need
to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (28 kPa) above the
recommended cold placard pressure in order to turn the
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light off.
CAUTION!
• The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system op-
eration or sensor damage may result when using
replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. The TPM sensor is not designed
for use on aftermarket wheels and may contribute to
a poor overall system performance or sensor damage.
Customers are encouraged to use OEM wheels to
assure proper TPM feature operation.
• Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to be-
come inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire
sealant it is recommended that you take your vehicle
to your authorized dealer to have your sensor func-
tion checked.
(Continued)
5
SAFETY 163
CAUTION! (Continued)
• After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always
reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent mois-
ture and dirt from entering the valve stem, which
could damage the TPMS sensor.
NOTE:
• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care and
maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire failure or
condition.
• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
while adjusting your tire pressure.
• Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Underinfla-
tion also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and
may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte-
nance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure
gauge, even if underinflation has not reached the level to
trigger illumination of the Tire Pressure Monitoring
System Warning Light.
• Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure,
and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in the
tire.
Premium System
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure
readings to the receiver module.
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the tire
pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly and to
maintain the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
• Receiver Module
• Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
• Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System messages,
which will display in the instrument cluster display.
• Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light
164 SAFETY
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light
will illuminate in the instrument cluster and a
chime will sound when tire pressure is low in one or more
of the four active road tires. In addition, the instrument
cluster will display a ⬙Tire Low⬙ message, an “Inflate to
XX” message, and a graphic showing the pressure values
of each tire with the low tire pressure values highlighted or
in a different color.
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible and
inflate the tires with low pressure (those highlighted or in
a different color in the instrument cluster display graphic)
to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure value,
as shown in the “Inflate to XX” message. Once the system
receives the updated tire pressures, the system will auto-
matically update, the pressure values in the graphic dis-
play in the instrument cluster will stop being highlighted
or return to their original color, and the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System Warning Light will turn off.
NOTE: When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need
to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (28 kPa) above the
recommended cold placard pressure in order to turn the
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light off.
The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive
this information.
Service TPMS Warning
When a system fault is detected, the Tire Pressure Moni-
toring System Warning Light will flash on and off for 75
seconds and then remain on solid. The system fault will
also sound a chime. In addition, the instrument cluster will
display a ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message for a mini-
mum of five seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place
of the pressure value to indicate which sensor is not being
received.
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warning
5
SAFETY 165
If the ignition key is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault no
longer exists, the Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning
Light will no longer flash, and the “SERVICE TPM SYS-
TEM” message will no longer display, and a pressure value
will display in place of the dashes. A system fault can occur
due to any of the following:
• Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the
TPMS sensors.
• Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that
affects radio wave signals.
• Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel hous-
ings.
• Using tire chains on the vehicle.
• Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS sensors.
Vehicles With Compact Spare or Non-Matching Full Size
Spare
1. The compact spare tire or non-matching full size does
not have a tire pressure monitoring sensor. Therefore,
the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the compact
or non-matching full size spare tire.
2. If you install the compact or non-matching full size
spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below
the low-pressure warning limit, upon the next ignition
key cycle, the Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning
Light will remain on and a chime will sound. In
addition, the graphic in the instrument cluster will still
display a different color or highlighted pressure value
and the “Inflate to XX” message.
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h), the Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Warning Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and
then remain on solid. In addition, the instrument cluster
will display a “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message for
five seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the
pressure value.
4. For each subsequent ignition key cycle, a chime will
sound, the Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning
Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then
remain on solid, and the instrument cluster will display
a “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message for five seconds
and then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure
value.
166 SAFETY
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare or
non-matching full size, the TPMS will update automati-
cally. In addition, the Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Warning Light will turn off and the graphic in the
instrument cluster will display a new pressure value
instead of dashes (- -), as long as no tire pressure is
below the low-pressure warning limit in any of the four
active road tires. The vehicle may need to be driven for
up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for
the TPMS to receive this information.
TPMS Deactivation — If Equipped
The TPMS can be deactivated if replacing all four wheel
and tire assemblies (road tires) with wheel and tire assem-
blies that do not have TPMS Sensors, such as when
installing winter wheel and tire assemblies on your vehicle.
To deactivate the TPMS, first replace all four wheel and tire
assemblies (road tires) with tires not equipped with Tire
Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Sensors. Then, drive the ve-
hicle for 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h). The TPMS
will chime, the Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning
Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain
on. The instrument cluster will display the “SERVICE TPM
SYSTEM” message and then display dashes (--) in place of
the pressure values.
Beginning with the next ignition cycle, the TPMS will no
longer chime or display the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM”
message in the instrument cluster but dashes (--) will
remain in place of the pressure values.
To reactivate the TPMS, replace all four wheel and tire
assemblies (road tires) with tires equipped with TPM
sensors. Then, drive the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h). The TPMS will chime, the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System Warning Light will flash on and off for
75 seconds and then turn off. The instrument cluster will
display the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message and then
display pressure values in place of the dashes. On the next
ignition cycle the ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message will
no longer be displayed as long as no system fault exists.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all radio
frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
5
SAFETY 167
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle
are the restraint systems:
Occupant Restraint Systems Features
• Seat Belt Systems
• Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags
• Child Restraints
Some of the safety features described in this section may be
standard equipment on some models, or may be optional
equipment on others. If you are not sure, ask an authorized
dealer.
Important Safety Precautions
Please pay close attention to the information in this section.
It tells you how to use your restraint system properly, to
keep you and your passengers as safe as possible.
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the
risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride
buckled up in the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat.
2. A child who is not big enough to wear the vehicle seat
belt properly (Refer to “Child Restraints” in this section
for further information) must be secured in the appro-
priate child restraint or belt-positioning booster seat in a
rear seating position.
3. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear-facing child
restraint) must ride in the front passenger seat, move the
seat as far back as possible and use the proper child
restraint (Refer to “Child Restraints” in this section for
further information).
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind
them or under their arm.
5. You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it
properly.
6. All occupants should always wear their lap and shoul-
der belts properly.
168 SAFETY
7. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved
back as far as practical to allow the front air bags room
to inflate.
8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your vehicle
has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the side air
bags will inflate forcefully into the space between occu-
pants and the door and occupants could be injured.
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be modified
to accommodate a disabled person, refer to the “Cus-
tomer Assistance” section for customer service contact
information.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
• Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front
seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child re-
straint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not have a
rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing child restraint
in that vehicle.
Seat Belt Systems
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even on
short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver and
could cause a collision that includes you. This can happen
far away from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they can
reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some of the
worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the
vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the
risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle.
Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times.
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System (BeltAlert)
Driver and Passenger BeltAlert (if equipped)
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the driver
and outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with
outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) to buckle their
seat belts. The Belt Alert feature is active whenever the
ignition switch is in the START or ON/RUN position.
Initial Indication
If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first
in the START or ON/RUN position, a chime will signal for
5
SAFETY 169
a few seconds. If the driver or outboard front seat passen-
ger (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first in
the START or ON/RUN position the Seat Belt Reminder
Light will turn on and remain on until both outboard front
seat belts are buckled. The outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert is not active when an outboard front passenger
seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert Warning Sequence
The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated when the
vehicle is moving above a specified vehicle speed range
and the driver or outboard front seat passenger is unbuck-
led (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) (the outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is
not active when the outboard front passenger seat is
unoccupied). The BeltAlert warning sequence starts by
blinking the Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding an
intermittent chime. Once the BeltAlert warning sequence
has completed, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will remain on
until the seat belts are buckled. The BeltAlert warning
sequence may repeat based on vehicle speed until the
driver and occupied outboard front seat passenger seat
belts are buckled. The driver should instruct all occupants
to buckle their seat belts.
Change of Status
If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped
with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) unbuckles
their seat belt while the vehicle is traveling, the BeltAlert
warning sequence will begin until the seat belts are buck-
led again.
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active
when the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or other items
are placed on the outboard front passenger seat or when
the seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is recommended that
pets be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet
harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts, and
cargo is properly stowed.
BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by an authorized
dealer. FCA US LLC does not recommend deactivating
BeltAlert.
NOTE: If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver or
outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard
front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled the Seat Belt
Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until the driver
and outboard front seat passenger seat belts are buckled.
170 SAFETY
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with
lap/shoulder belts.
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during very
sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the shoulder
part of the seat belt to move freely with you under normal
conditions. However, in a collision the seat belt will lock
and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the vehicle or
being thrown out of the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with
your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some
collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all. Always
wear your seat belt even though you have air bags.
• In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled
up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or
other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the
vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your
vehicle are buckled up properly.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or
killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly. Occupants, including the
driver, should always wear their seat belts whether
or not an air bag is also provided at their seating
position to minimize the risk of severe injury or
death in the event of a crash.
• Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your
injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer
internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the
seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat
belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too.
• Two people should never be belted into a single seat
belt. People belted together can crash into one an-
other in a collision, hurting one another badly. Never
use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one
person, no matter what their size.
5
SAFETY 171
WARNING!
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
injury in a collision. The seat belt forces won’t be at
the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your
abdomen. Always wear the lap part of your seat belt
as low as possible and keep it snug.
• A twisted seat belt may not protect you properly. In
a collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the seat
belt is flat against your body, without twists. If you
can’t straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take it to
an authorized dealer immediately and have it fixed.
• A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will
not protect you properly. The lap portion could ride
too high on your body, possibly causing internal
injuries. Always buckle your seat belt into the
buckle nearest you.
• A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you
properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear
your seat belt snugly.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• A seat belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous.
Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the
vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck
injury. A seat belt worn under the arm can cause
internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the seat belt over your shoulder so that
your strongest bones will take the force in a collision.
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
• A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a collision
and leave you with no protection. Inspect the seat
belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or
loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced imme-
diately. Do not disassemble or modify the seat belt
system. Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
collision.
172 SAFETY
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and adjust
the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front
seat, and next to your arm in the rear seat (for vehicles
equipped with a rear seat). Grasp the latch plate and
pull out the seat belt. Slide the latch plate up the
webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to go
around your lap.
3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low across
your hips, below your abdomen. To remove slack in the
lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To loosen
the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the latch plate and pull
on the lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces the risk of
sliding under the seat belt in a collision.
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
5
SAFETY 173
5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and chest
with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfortable and
not resting on your neck. The retractor will withdraw
any slack in the shoulder belt.
6. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the
buckle. The seat belt will automatically retract to its
stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate down
the webbing to allow the seat belt to retract fully.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the anchor
point.
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above the latch
plate, grasp and twist the seat belt webbing 180 degrees
to create a fold that begins immediately above the latch
plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the
latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
folded webbing and the seat belt is no longer twisted.
Positioning The Lap Belt
174 SAFETY
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the driver and outboard front passenger seats, the top of
the shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward to
position the seat belt away from your neck. Push or
squeeze the anchorage button to release the anchorage, and
move it up or down to the position that serves you best.
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will prefer
the shoulder belt anchorage in a lower position, and if you
are taller than average, you will prefer the shoulder belt
anchorage in a higher position. After you release the
anchorage button, try to move it up or down to make sure
that it is locked in position.
NOTE: The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is
equipped with an Easy Up feature. This feature allows the
shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted in the upward
position without pushing or squeezing the release button.
To verify the shoulder belt anchorage is latched, pull
downward on the shoulder belt anchorage until it is locked
into position.
WARNING!
• Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your
injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer
internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the
seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat
belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too.
• Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and
chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfort-
able and not resting on your neck. The retractor will
withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
• Misadjustment of the seat belt could reduce the
effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.
• Always make all seat belt height adjustments when
the vehicle is stationary.
Adjustable Anchorage
5
SAFETY 175
Second Row Center Seat Belt Operating Instructions
The second row center seat belt may feature a seat belt with
a mini-latch plate and buckle. The mini-latch plate and
buckle, if equipped, should remain connected at all times.
If the mini-latch plate and buckle become disconnected,
they must be properly reconnected prior to the rear center
seat belt being used by an occupant.
1. Grasp the mini-latch plate and pull the seat belt over the
seat.
2. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the
mini-latch plate into the mini-buckle until you hear a
“click.”
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
Inserting Mini-Latch Plate Into Mini-Buckle
176 SAFETY
3. Sit back in seat. Slide the regular latch plate up the
webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to go
around your lap.
4. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
5. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low across
your hips, below your abdomen. To remove slack in the
lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To loosen
the lap belt if it is too tight, pull on the lap belt. A snug
seat belt reduces the risk of sliding under the seat belt in
a collision.
6. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor
will withdraw any slack in the seat belt.
7. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the
buckle.
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
5
SAFETY 177
8. To disengage the mini-latch plate from the mini-buckle,
insert the regular latch plate into the center red slot on
the mini-buckle.
WARNING!
• If the mini-latch plate and mini-buckle are not prop-
erly connected when the seat belt is used by an
occupant, the seat belt will not be able to provide
proper restraint and will increase the risk of injury in
a collision.
• When reattaching the mini-latch plate and mini-
buckle, ensure the seat belt webbing is not twisted.
If the webbing is twisted, follow the preceding
procedure to detach the mini-latch plate and mini-
buckle, untwist the webbing, and reattach the mini-
latch plate and mini-buckle.
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly, even when
the webbing is fully extended and the adjustable upper
shoulder belt anchorage (if equipped) is in its lowest
position, an authorized dealer can provide you with a Seat
Belt Extender. The Seat Belt Extender should be used only
if the existing seat belt is not long enough. When the Seat
Belt Extender is not required for a different occupant, it
must be removed.
Detaching Mini-Buckle With Seat Belt Tongue
178 SAFETY
WARNING!
• ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physically
required in order to properly fit the original seat belt
system. DO NOT USE the Seat Belt Extender if,
when worn, the distance between the front edge of
the Seat Belt Extender buckle and the center of the
occupant’s body is LESS than 6 inches.
• Using a Seat Belt Extender when not needed can
increase the risk of serious injury or death in a
collision. Only use the Seat Belt Extender when the
lap belt is not long enough and only use in the
recommended seating positions. Remove and store
the Seat Belt Extender when not needed.
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Seat belts must be worn by all occupants including preg-
nant women: the risk of injury in the event of an accident
is reduced for the mother and the unborn child if they are
wearing a seat belt.
Position the lap belt snug and low below the abdomen and
across the strong bones of the hips. Place the shoulder belt
across the chest and away from the neck. Never place the
shoulder belt behind the back or under the arm.
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts
5
SAFETY 179
Seat Belt Pretensioner
The front outboard seat belt system is equipped with
pretensioning devices that are designed to remove slack
from the seat belt in the event of a collision. These devices
may improve the performance of the seat belt by removing
slack from the seat belt early in a collision. Pretensioners
work for all size occupants, including those in child
restraints.
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
worn snugly and positioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the pretensioners are
single use items. A deployed pretensioner or a deployed air
bag must be replaced immediately.
Energy Management Feature
The front outboard seat belt system is equipped with an
Energy Management feature that may help further reduce
the risk of injury in the event of a collision. The seat belt
system has a retractor assembly that is designed to release
webbing in a controlled manner.
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR)
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) which is used to secure a child restraint system. For
additional information, refer to “Installing Child Restraints
Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child Restraints”
section of this manual. The figure below illustrates the
locking feature for each seating position.
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
180 SAFETY
If the passenger seating position is equipped with an ALR
and is being used for normal usage, only pull the seat belt
webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap around the
occupant’s mid-section so as to not activate the ALR. If the
ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking sound as the seat
belt retracts. Allow the webbing to retract completely in
this case and then carefully pull out only the amount of
webbing necessary to comfortably wrap around the occu-
pant’s mid-section. Slide the latch plate into the buckle
until you hear a ⬙click.⬙
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is automati-
cally pre-locked. The seat belt will still retract to remove
any slack in the shoulder belt. Use the Automatic Locking
Mode anytime a child restraint is installed in a seating
position that has a seat belt with this feature. Children 12
years old and under should always be properly restrained
in the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
• Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front
seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child re-
straint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not have a
rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing child restraint
in that vehicle.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
the entire seat belt is extracted.
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt retracts,
you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the seat
belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
5
SAFETY 181
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it
to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking
Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency) lock-
ing mode.
WARNING!
• The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the
switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) fea-
ture or any other seat belt function is not working
properly when checked according to the procedures
in the Service Manual.
• Failure to replace the seat belt assembly could in-
crease the risk of injury in collisions.
• Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to restrain
occupants who are wearing the seat belt or children
who are using booster seats. The locked mode is only
used to install rear-facing or forward-facing child
restraints that have a harness for restraining the
child.
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS)
Some of the safety features described in this section may be
standard equipment on some models, or may be optional
equipment on others. If you are not sure, ask an authorized
dealer.
The air bag system must be ready to protect you in a
collision. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) moni-
tors the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring asso-
ciated with the electrical Air Bag System Components.
Your vehicle may be equipped with the following Air Bag
System Components:
Air Bag System Components
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Air Bag Warning Light
• Steering Wheel and Column
• Instrument Panel
• Knee Impact Bolsters
• Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
• Seat Belt Buckle Switch
• Supplemental Side Air Bags
182 SAFETY
• Supplemental Knee Air Bags
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
• Seat Belt Pretensioners
• Seat Track Position Sensors
• Occupant Classification System
Air Bag Warning Light
The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of
the air bag system whenever the ignition switch
is in the START or ON/RUN position. If the
ignition switch is in the OFF position or in the
ACC position, the air bag system is not on and
the air bags will not inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that may
deploy the air bag system even if the battery loses power or
it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the
instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds
for a self-check when the ignition switch is first in the
ON/RUN position. After the self-check, the Air Bag Warn-
ing Light will turn off. If the ORC detects a malfunction in
any part of the system, it turns on the Air Bag Warning
Light, either momentarily or continuously. A single chime
will sound to alert you if the light comes on again after
initial startup.
The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the
instrument panel Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is
detected that could affect the air bag system. The diagnos-
tics also record the nature of the malfunction. While the air
bag system is designed to be maintenance free, if any of the
following occurs, have an authorized dealer service the air
bag system immediately.
• The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during the
four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is first in
the ON/RUN position.
• The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to
eight-second interval.
• The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving.
5
SAFETY 183
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. In this condition
the air bags may not be ready to inflate for your protection.
Have an authorized dealer service the air bag system
immediately.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument
panel could mean you won’t have the air bag system to
protect you in a collision. If the light does not come on
as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned on,
stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes on as
you drive, have an authorized dealer service the air bag
system immediately.
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
If a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light is detected, which
could affect the Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS), the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light will
illuminate on the instrument panel. The Redun-
dant Air Bag Warning Light will stay on until the
fault is cleared. In addition, a single chime will sound to
alert you that the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light has
come on and a fault has been detected. If the Redundant
Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or remains
on while driving have an authorized dealer service the
vehicle immediately.
For additional information regarding the Redundant Air
Bag Warning Light refer to “Getting To Know Your Instru-
ment Panel” section of this manual.
184 SAFETY
Front Air Bags
This vehicle has front air bags and lap/shoulder belts for both
the driver and front passenger. The front air bags are a
supplement to the seat belt restraint systems. The driver front
air bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The
passenger front air bag is mounted in the instrument panel,
above the glove compartment. The words “SRS AIRBAG” or
“AIRBAG” are embossed on the air bag covers.
WARNING!
• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during front air bag deployment could cause
serious injury, including death. Air bags need room
to inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending your arms
to reach the steering wheel or instrument panel.
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
• Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front
seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child re-
straint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not have a
rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing child restraint
in that vehicle.
Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag Features
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage driver
and front passenger air bags. This system provides output
appropriate to the severity and type of collision as deter-
mined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), which
may receive information from the front impact sensors (if
equipped) or other system components.
Front Air Bag/Knee Bolster Locations
1 — Driver And Passenger Front Air Bags
2 — Passenger Knee Impact Bolster
3 — Driver Knee Impact Bolster/Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
5
SAFETY 185
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an
impact that requires air bag deployment. A low energy
output is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy
output is used for more severe collisions.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether the
driver or front passenger seat belt is buckled. The seat belt
buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the Ad-
vanced Front Air Bags.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front
passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the
inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon
seat position.
This vehicle is equipped with a right front passenger
Occupant Classification System (“OCS”) that is designed to
provide Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag output appro-
priate to the occupant’s seated weight input, as determined
by the OCS.
WARNING!
• No objects should be placed over or near the air bag
on the instrument panel or steering wheel because
any such objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in
a collision severe enough to cause the air bag to
inflate.
• Do not put anything on or around the air bag covers
or attempt to open them manually. You may damage
the air bags and you could be injured because the air
bags may no longer be functional. The protective
covers for the air bag cushions are designed to open
only when the air bags are inflating.
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with
your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some
collisions, air bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear
your seat belts even though you have air bags.
186 SAFETY
Front Air Bag Operation
Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional protec-
tion by supplementing the seat belts. Front air bags are not
expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear, side, or
rollover collisions. The front air bags will not deploy in all
frontal collisions, including some that may produce sub-
stantial vehicle damage — for example, some pole colli-
sions, truck underrides, and angle offset collisions.
On the other hand, depending on the type and location of
impact, front air bags may deploy in crashes with little
vehicle front-end damage but that produce a severe initial
deceleration.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over
time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are not
good indicators of whether or not an air bag should have
deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all collisions,
and also are needed to help keep you in position, away
from an inflating air bag.
When the ORC detects a collision requiring the front air
bags, it signals the inflator units. A large quantity of
non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the front air bags.
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper passen-
ger side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of
the way as the air bags inflate to their full size. The front air
bags fully inflate in less time than it takes to blink your
eyes. The front air bags then quickly deflate while helping
to restrain the driver and front passenger.
Occupant Classification System (OCS) — Front
Passenger Seat
The OCS is part of a Federally regulated safety system for
this vehicle. It is designed to provide Passenger Advanced
Front Air Bag output appropriate to the occupant’s seated
weight, as determined by the OCS.
The Occupant Classification System (OCS) consists of the
following:
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Occupant Classification Module (OCM) and Sensor lo-
cated in the front passenger seat
• Air Bag Warning Light
5
SAFETY 187
Occupant Classification Module (OCM) And Sensor
The Occupant Classification Module (OCM) is located
underneath the front passenger seat. The Sensor is located
beneath the passenger seat cushion foam. Any weight on
the seat will be sensed by the Sensor. The OCM uses input
from the Sensor to determine the front passenger’s most
probable classification. The OCM communicates this infor-
mation to the ORC. The ORC may reduce the inflation rate
of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag deployment
based on occupant classification. In order for the OCS to
operate as designed, it is important for the front passenger
to be seated properly and properly wearing the seat belt.
The OCS will NOT prevent deployment of the Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag. The OCS may reduce the inflation
rate of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag if the OCS
estimates that:
• The front passenger seat is unoccupied or has very light
objects on it; or
• The front passenger seat is occupied by a small passen-
ger, including a child; or
• The front passenger seat is occupied by a rear-facing
child restraint; or
• The front passenger is not properly seated or his or her
weight is taken off of the seat for a period of time.
Front Passenger Seat
Occupant Status
Front Passenger Air Bag
Output
Rear-facing child restraint Reduced-power deploy-
ment
Child, including a child in
a forward-facing child re-
straint or booster seat*
Reduced-power deploy-
ment OR Full-power de-
ployment
Properly seated adult Full-power deployment
OR reduced-power de-
ployment
Unoccupied seat Reduced-power deploy-
ment
* It is possible for a child to be classified as an adult,
allowing a full-power Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
deployment. Never allow children to ride in the front
passenger seat and never install a child restraint system,
including a rear-facing child restraint, in the front passen-
ger seat.
188 SAFETY
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
• Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front
seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child re-
straint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not have a
rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing child restraint
in that vehicle.
• Children 12 years or younger should always ride
buckled up in the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear
seat.
The OCS determines the front passenger’s most probable
classification. The OCS estimates the seated weight on the
front passenger seat and where that weight is located. The
OCS communicates the classification status to the ORC.
The ORC uses the classification to determine whether the
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag inflation rate should be
adjusted.
In order for the OCS to operate as designed, it is important
for the front passenger to be seated properly and properly
wearing the seat belt. Properly seated passengers are:
• Sitting upright
• Facing forward
• Sitting in the center of the seat with their feet comfort-
ably on or near the floor
• Sitting with their back against the seatback and the
seatback in an upright position
Seated Properly
5
SAFETY 189
Lighter Weight Passengers (Including Small Adults)
When a lighter weight passenger, including a small adult,
occupies the front passenger seat, the OCS may reduce the
inflation rate of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag.
This does not mean that the OCS is working improperly.
Do not decrease OR increase the front passenger’s seated
weight on the front passenger seat
The front passenger’s seated weight must be properly
positioned on the front passenger seat. Failure to do so may
result in serious injury or death. The OCS determines the
most probable classification of the occupant that it detects.
The OCS will detect the front passenger’s decreased or
increased seated weight, which may result in an adjusted
inflation rate of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag in a
collision. This does not mean that the OCS is working
improperly. Decreasing the front passenger’s seated weight
on the front passenger seat may result in a reduced-power
deployment of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag.
Increasing the front passenger’s seated weight on the front
passenger seat may result in a full-power deployment of
the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag.
Examples of improper front passenger seating include:
• The front passenger’s weight is transferred to another
part of the vehicle (like the door, arm rest or instrument
panel).
• The front passenger leans forward, sideways, or turns to
face the rear of the vehicle.
• The front passenger’s seatback is not in the full upright
position.
• The front passenger carries or holds an object while
seated (e.g., backpack, box, etc.).
• Objects are lodged under the front passenger seat.
• Objects are lodged between the front passenger seat and
center console.
• Accessories that may change the seated weight on the
front passenger seat are attached to the front passenger
seat.
• Anything that may decrease or increase the front pas-
senger’s seated weight.
190 SAFETY
The OCS determines the front passenger’s most probable
classification. If an occupant in the front passenger seat is
seated improperly, the occupant may provide an output
signal to the OCS that is different from the occupant’s
properly seated weight input, for example:
Not Seated Properly
Not Seated Properly
5
SAFETY 191
Not Seated Properly Not Seated Properly
192 SAFETY
WARNING!
• If a child restraint system, child, small teenager or
adult in the front passenger seat is seated improp-
erly, the occupant may provide an output signal to
the OCS that is different from the occupant’s prop-
erly seated weight input. This may result in serious
injury or death in a collision.
• Always wear your seat belt and sit properly, with the
seatback in an upright position, your back against
the seatback, sitting upright, facing forward, in the
center of the seat, with your feet comfortably on or
near the floor.
• Do not carry or hold any objects (e.g., backpacks,
boxes, etc.) while seated in the front passenger seat.
Holding an object may provide an output signal to
the OCS that is different than the occupant’s prop-
erly seated weight input, which may result in serious
injury or death in a collision.
• Placing an object on the floor under the front pas-
senger seat may prevent the OCS from working
properly, which may result in serious injury or death
in a collision. Do not place any objects on the floor
under the front passenger seat.
The Air Bag Warning Light
in the instrument panel
will turn on whenever the OCS is unable to classify the
front passenger seat status. A malfunction in the OCS
may affect the operation of the air bag system.
If the Air Bag Warning Light
does not come on, or
stays on after you start the vehicle, or it comes on as you
drive, take the vehicle to an authorized dealer for
service immediately.
The passenger seat assembly contains critical OCS compo-
nents that may affect the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
inflation. In order for the OCS to properly classify the seated
weight of a front seat passenger, the OCS components must
function as designed. Do not make any modifications to the
front passenger seat components, assembly, or to the seat
cover. If the seat, trim cover, or cushion needs service for any
reason, take the vehicle to an authorized dealer. Only FCA
US LLC approved seat accessories may be used.
The following requirements must be strictly followed:
• Do not modify the front passenger seat assembly or
components in any way.
• Do not use prior or future model year seat covers or
cushions not designated by FCA US LLC for the specific
model being repaired. Always use the correct seat cover
and cushion specified for the vehicle.
5
SAFETY 193
• Do not replace the seat cover or cushion with an
aftermarket seat cover or cushion.
• Do not add a secondary seat cover or mat.
• At no time should any Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) component or SRS related component or fastener
be modified or replaced with any part except those
which are approved by FCA US LLC.
WARNING!
• Unapproved modifications or service procedures to
the passenger seat assembly, its related components,
seat cover or cushion may inadvertently change the
air bag deployment in case of a frontal collision. This
could result in death or serious injury to the front
passenger if the vehicle is involved in a collision. A
modified vehicle may not comply with required
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS)
and/or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards
(CMVSS).
• If it is necessary to modify the air bag system for
persons with disabilities, contact an authorized
dealer.
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the
driver and front passenger, and position the front occu-
pants for improved interaction with the front air bags.
WARNING!
• Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee impact
bolsters in any way.
• Do not mount any accessories to the knee impact
bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band
radios, etc.
Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental Driver Knee
Air Bag mounted in the instrument panel below the
steering column. The Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
provides enhanced protection during a frontal impact by
working together with the seat belts, pretensioners, and
front air bags.
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Seat-Mounted
Side Air Bags (SABs).
194 SAFETY
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs) are
located in the outboard side of the front seats. The SABs are
marked with “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” on a label or on
the seat trim on the outboard side of the seats.
The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant injury
during certain side impacts, in addition to the injury
reduction potential provided by the seat belts and body
structure.
When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the outboard
side of the seatback’s trim cover. The inflating SAB deploys
through the seat seam into the space between the occupant
and the door. The SAB moves at a very high speed and
with such a high force that it could injure occupants if they
are not seated properly, or if items are positioned in the
area where the SAB inflates. Children are at an even greater
risk of injury from a deploying air bag.
WARNING!
Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the Side Air Bags; the performance
could be adversely affected and/or objects could be
pushed into you, causing serious injury.
Front Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag
5
SAFETY 195
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side Air Bag
Inflatable Curtains (SABICs).
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs)
are located above the side windows. The trim covering the
SABICs is labeled “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG.”
SABICs may help reduce the risk of head and other injuries
to front and rear seat outboard occupants in certain side
impacts, in addition to the injury reduction potential
provided by the seat belts and body structure.
The SABIC deploys downward, covering the side windows.
An inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge of the headliner
out of the way and covers the window. The SABICs inflate
with enough force to injure occupants if they are not belted
and seated properly, or if items are positioned in the area
where the SABICs inflate. Children are at an even greater risk
of injury from a deploying air bag.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or complete
ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in
certain side impact events.
WARNING!
• Do not mount equipment, or stack luggage or other
cargo up high enough to block the deployment of the
SABICs. The trim covering above the side windows
where the SABIC and its deployment path are lo-
cated should remain free from any obstructions.
• In order for the SABICs to work as intended, do not
install any accessory items in your vehicle which
could alter the roof. Do not add an aftermarket
sunroof to your vehicle. Do not add roof racks that
require permanent attachments (bolts or screws) for
installation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the
roof of the vehicle for any reason.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC)
Label Location
196 SAFETY
Side Impacts
The Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain side
impacts. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) deter-
mines whether the deployment of the Side Air Bags in a
particular impact event is appropriate, based on the sever-
ity and type of collision. The side impact sensors aid the
ORC in determining the appropriate response to impact
events. The system is calibrated to deploy the Side Air Bags
on the impact side of the vehicle during impacts that
require Side Air Bag occupant protection. In side impacts,
the Side Air Bags deploy independently; a left side impact
deploys the left Side Air Bags only and a right-side impact
deploys the right Side Air Bags only. Vehicle damage by
itself is not a good indicator of whether or not Side Air
Bags should have deployed.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side collisions,
including some collisions at certain angles, or some side
collisions that do not impact the area of the passenger
compartment. The Side Air Bags may deploy during
angled or offset frontal collisions where the front air bags
deploy.
Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint
system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time than it takes to
blink your eyes.
WARNING!
• Occupants, including children, who are up against or
very close to Side Air Bags can be seriously injured
or killed. Occupants, including children, should
never lean on or sleep against the door, side win-
dows, or area where the side air bags inflate, even if
they are in an infant or child restraint.
• Seat belts (and child restraints where appropriate)
are necessary for your protection in all collisions.
They also help keep you in position, away from an
inflating Side Air Bag. To get the best protection
from the Side Air Bags, occupants must wear their
seat belts properly and sit upright with their backs
against the seats. Children must be properly re-
strained in a child restraint or booster seat that is
appropriate for the size of the child.
5
SAFETY 197
WARNING!
• Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not lean
against the door or window. Sit upright in the center
of the seat.
• Being too close to the Side Air Bags during deploy-
ment could cause you to be severely injured or
killed.
• Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The Side Air Bags
work with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, Side Air Bags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belt even though you have
Side Air Bags.
NOTE: Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.
Rollover Events
Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain rollover
events. The ORC determines whether the deployment of
the Side Air Bags in a particular rollover event is appro-
priate, based on the severity and type of collision. Vehicle
damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or not
Side Air Bags should have deployed.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all rollover events. The
rollover sensing system determines if a rollover event may
be in progress and whether deployment is appropriate. In
the event the vehicle experiences a rollover or near rollover
event, and deployment of the Side Air Bags is appropriate,
the rollover sensing system will also deploy the seat belt
pretensioners on both sides of the vehicle.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or complete
ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in
certain rollover or side impact events.
Air Bag System Components
NOTE: The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors
the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated
with electrical Air Bag System Components listed below:
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Air Bag Warning Light
• Steering Wheel and Column
• Instrument Panel
• Knee Impact Bolsters
• Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
• Seat Belt Buckle Switch
198 SAFETY
• Supplemental Side Air Bags
• Supplemental Knee Air Bags
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
• Seat Belt Pretensioners
• Seat Track Position Sensors
• Occupant Classification System
If A Deployment Occurs
The front air bags are designed to deflate immediately after
deployment.
NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all
collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with the
air bag system.
If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any
or all of the following may occur:
• The air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions
and/or skin reddening to the occupants as the air bags
deploy and unfold. The abrasions are similar to friction
rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet
or gymnasium floor. They are not caused by contact with
chemicals. They are not permanent and normally heal
quickly. However, if you haven’t healed significantly
within a few days, or if you have any blistering, see your
doctor immediately.
•
As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air bag
inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the skin,
eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irritation, rinse
the area with cool water. For nose or throat irritation, move
to fresh air. If the irritation continues, see your doctor. If
these particles settle on your clothing, follow the garment
manufacturer’s instructions for cleaning.
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have deployed.
If you are involved in another collision, the air bags will
not be in place to protect you.
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
protect you in another collision. Have the air bags, seat
belt pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor assem-
blies replaced by an authorized dealer immediately.
Also, have the Occupant Restraint Controller System
serviced as well.
5
SAFETY 199
NOTE:
• Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
but they will open during air bag deployment.
• After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an
authorized dealer immediately.
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact, if the communication network
remains intact, and the power remains intact, depending
on the nature of the event, the ORC will determine whether
to have the Enhanced Accident Response System perform
the following functions:
• Cut off fuel to the engine (If Equipped)
• Cut off battery power to the electric motor (If Equipped)
• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power
•
Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as the
battery has power or for 15 minutes from the intervention
of the Enhanced Accident Response System.
• Unlock the power door locks.
Your vehicle may also be designed to perform any of these
other functions in response to the Enhanced Accident
Response System:
• Turn off the Fuel Filter Heater, Turn off the HVAC
Blower Motor, Close the HVAC Circulation Door
• Cut off battery power to the:
• Engine
• Electric Motor (if equipped)
• Electric power steering
• Brake booster
• Electric park brake
• Automatic transmission gear selector
• Horn
• Front wiper
• Headlamp washer pump
200 SAFETY
NOTE: After an accident, remember to cycle the ignition
to the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position and remove the key
from the ignition switch to avoid draining the battery.
Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine
compartment and on the ground near the engine compart-
ment and fuel tank before resetting the system and starting
the engine. If there are no fuel leaks or damage to the
vehicle electrical devices (e.g. headlights) after an accident,
reset the system by following the procedure described
below. If you have any doubt, contact an authorized dealer.
Enhanced Accident Response System Reset
Procedure
After the event occurs, when the system is active, a
message regarding fuel cutoff is displayed. Turn the igni-
tion switch from ignition AVV/START or MAR/ACC/
ON/RUN to ignition STOP/OFF/LOCK. Carefully check
the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine compartment and on
the ground near the engine compartment and fuel tank
before resetting the system and starting the engine.
Depending on the nature of the event the left and right turn
signal lights, located in the instrument panel, may both be
blinking and will continue to blink. In order to move your
vehicle to the side of the road, you must follow the system
reset procedure.
Customer Action
Customer Will See
NOTE: Each step MUST
BE held for at least two
seconds
1. Turn ignition STOP/
OFF/LOCK. (Turn Signal
Switch Must be placed in
Neutral State).
2. Turn ignition MAR/
ACC/ON/RUN.
Right turn light BLINKS.
Left turn light is OFF.
3. Turn right turn signal
switch ON.
Right turn light is ON
SOLID.
Left turn light BLINKS.
4. Place turn signal in
neutral state.
Right turn light is OFF.
Left turn light BLINKS.
5
SAFETY 201
Customer Action
Customer Will See
NOTE: Each step MUST
BE held for at least two
seconds
5. Turn left turn signal
switch ON.
Right turn light BLINKS.
Left turn light is ON
SOLID.
6. Place turn signal in
neutral state.
Right turn light BLINKS.
Left turn light is OFF.
7. Turn right turn signal
switch ON.
Right turn light is ON
SOLID.
Left turn light BLINKS.
8. Place turn signal in
neutral state.
Right turn light is OFF.
Left turn light BLINKS.
9. Turn left turn signal
switch ON.
Right turn light is ON
SOLID.
Left turn light is ON
SOLID.
10. Turn left turn signal
switch OFF. (Turn Signal
Switch Must be placed in
Neutral State).
Right turn light is OFF.
Left turn light is OFF.
Customer Action
Customer Will See
NOTE: Each step MUST
BE held for at least two
seconds
11. Turn ignition STOP/
OFF/LOCK.
12. Turn ignition MAR/
ACC/ON/RUN. (Entire
sequence needs to be
completed within one
minute or sequence will
need to be repeated).
System is now reset and
the engine may be started.
Turn hazard flashers OFF
(Manually).
If a reset procedure step is not completed within 60
seconds, then the turn signal lights will blink and the reset
procedure must be performed again in order to be success-
ful.
202 SAFETY
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING!
• Modifications to any part of the air bag system could
cause it to fail when you need it. You could be
injured if the air bag system is not there to protect
you. Do not modify the components or wiring, in-
cluding adding any kind of badges or stickers to the
steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper passenger
side of the instrument panel. Do not modify the front
bumper, vehicle body structure, or add aftermarket
side steps or running boards.
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air bag
system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who works on
your vehicle that it has an air bag system.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag
system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may
not function properly if modifications are made.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any air
bag system service. If your seat, including your trim
cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any way
(including removal or loosening/tightening of seat
attachment bolts), take the vehicle to an authorized
dealer. Only manufacturer approved seat accessories
may be used. If it is necessary to modify the air bag
system for persons with disabilities, contact an au-
thorized dealer.
5
SAFETY 203
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain
crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag
deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist
in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The
EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics
and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30
seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to
record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts
were buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accel-
erator and/or brake pedal; and,
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better understanding of the
circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE:
EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by the
EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data
(e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded.
However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could
combine the EDR data with the type of personally identify-
ing data routinely acquired during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In
addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as
law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read
the information if they have access to the vehicle or the
EDR.
Child Restraints
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all
times, including babies and children. Every state in the
United States, and every Canadian province, requires that
small children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the
law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years or younger should ride properly buckled
up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash statistics,
children are safer when properly restrained in the rear
seats rather than in the front.
204 SAFETY
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a
projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to hold
even an infant on your lap could become so great that
you could not hold the child, no matter how strong you
are. The child and others could be badly injured or
killed. Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a
proper restraint for the child’s size.
There are different sizes and types of restraints for children
from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an
adult safety belt. Always check the child seat Owner’s
Manual to make sure you have the correct seat for your
child. Carefully read and follow all the instructions and
warnings in the child restraint Owner’s Manual and on all
the labels attached to the child restraint.
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has a
label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Stan-
dards. You should also make sure that you can install it in
the vehicle where you will use it.
NOTE:
• For additional information, refer to
http://www.nhtsa.gov/parents-and-caregivers or call:
1–888–327–4236
• Canadian residents should refer to Transport Canada’s
website for additional information:
http://www.tc.gc.ca/eng/motorvehiclesafety/
safedrivers-childsafety-index-53.htm
5
SAFETY 205
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining
Children In Vehicles
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age
Recommended Type Of Child
Restraint
Infants and Toddlers Children who are two years old or
younger and who have not reached
the height or weight limits of their
child restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convert-
ible Child Restraint, facing rearward
in a rear seat of the vehicle
Small Children Children who are at least two years
old or who have outgrown the
height or weight limit of their rear-
facing child restraint
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with
a five-point Harness, facing forward
in a rear seat of the vehicle
Larger Children Children who have outgrown their
forward-facing child restraint, but
are too small to properly fit the
vehicle’s seat belt
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the
vehicle seat belt, seated in a rear seat
of the vehicle
Children Too Large for
Child Restraints
Children 12 years old or younger,
who have outgrown the height or
weight limit of their booster seat
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in a rear seat
of the vehicle
206 SAFETY
Infant And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride rear-facing in
the vehicle until they are two years old or until they reach
either the height or weight limit of their rear-facing child
restraint. Two types of child restraints can be used rear-
facing: infant carriers and convertible child seats.
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the vehicle. It
is recommended for children from birth until they reach
the weight or height limit of the infant carrier. Convertible
child seats can be used either rear-facing or forward-facing
in the vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higher
weight limit in the rear-facing direction than infant carriers
do, so they can be used rear-facing by children who have
outgrown their infant carrier but are still less than at least
two years old. Children should remain rear-facing until
they reach the highest weight or height allowed by their
convertible child seat.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
• Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front
seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child re-
straint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not have a
rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing child restraint
in that vehicle.
5
SAFETY 207
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have outgrown
their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forward-
facing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and con-
vertible child seats used in the forward-facing direction are
for children who are over two years old or who have
outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of their
rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should remain
in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for as long as
possible, up to the highest weight or height allowed by the
child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the forward-
facing limit for the child seat should use a belt-positioning
booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts fit properly. If the
child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle’s seat
cushion while the child’s back is against the seatback, they
should use a belt-positioning booster seat. The child and
belt-positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the
seat belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant
or child restraint. It could come loose in a collision.
The child could be badly injured or killed. Follow
the child restraint manufacturer’s directions exactly
when installing an infant or child restraint.
• After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle, do
not move the vehicle seat forward or rearward be-
cause it can loosen the child restraint attachments.
Remove the child restraint before adjusting the ve-
hicle seat position. When the vehicle seat has been
adjusted, reinstall the child restraint.
• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in
the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchorages,
or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it loose in
the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it could
strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious
personal injury.
208 SAFETY
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend over
the front of the seat when their back is against the seatback,
should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this simple 5-step
test to decide whether the child can use the vehicle’s seat
belt alone:
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of the
vehicle seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front of
the vehicle seat – while the child is still sitting all the
way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder be-
tween the neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching the
child’s thighs and not the stomach?
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then the
child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the
child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check seat belt fit
periodically and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched.
A child’s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of
position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck,
move the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or use a
booster seat to position the seat belt on the child correctly.
WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an
arm or behind their back. In a crash, the shoulder belt
will not protect a child properly, which may result in
serious injury or death. A child must always wear both
the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt correctly.
5
SAFETY 209
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Restraint Type Combined
Weight of the
Child + Child
Restraint
Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An “X” Below
LATCH – Lower
Anchors Only
Seat Belt Only LATCH – Lower
Anchors + Top
Tether Anchor
Seat Belt + Top
Tether Anchor
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
XX
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
More than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
XX
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
More than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X
210 SAFETY
Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren (LATCH)
Restraint System
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchorage
system called LATCH, which stands for Lower Anchors
and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system has three
vehicle anchor points for installing LATCH-equipped child
seats. There are two lower anchorages located at the back
of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback and one top
tether anchorage located behind the seating position. These
anchorages are used to install LATCH-equipped child seats
without using the vehicle’s seat belts. Some seating posi-
tions may have a top tether anchorage but no lower
anchorages. In these seating positions, the seat belt must be
used with the top tether anchorage to install the child
restraint. Please see the following table for more
information.
LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In
This Vehicle
LATCH Label
LATCH Positions
Lower Anchorage Symbol (2 Anchorages Per Seating Position)
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
5
SAFETY 211
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
What is the weight limit (child’s
weight + weight of the child re-
straint) for using the LATCH anchor-
age system to attach the child re-
straint?
65 lbs (29.5 kg) Use the LATCH anchorage system
until the combined weight of the
child and the child restraint is 65 lbs
(29.5 kg). Use the seat belt and tether
anchor instead of the LATCH system
once the combined weight is more
than 65 lbs (29.5 kg).
Can the LATCH anchorages and the
seat belt be used together to attach a
rear-facing or forward-facing child
restraint?
No Do not use the seat belt when you
use the LATCH anchorage system to
attach a rear-facing or forward-facing
child restraint.
Booster seats may be attached to the
LATCH anchorages if allowed by the
booster seat manufacturer. See your
booster seat owner’s manual for
more information.
Can a child seat be installed in the
center position using the inner
LATCH lower anchorages?
Yes You can install child restraints with
flexible lower anchors in the center
position. The inner anchorages are 16
inches (400 mm) apart. Do not install
child restraints with rigid lower an-
chors in the center position.
212 SAFETY
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
Can two child restraints be attached
using a common lower LATCH an-
chorage?
No Never “share” a LATCH anchorage
with two or more child restraints. If
the center position does not have
dedicated LATCH lower anchorages,
use the seat belt to install a child seat
in the center position next to a child
seat using the LATCH anchorages in
an outboard position.
Can the rear-facing child restraint
touch the back of the front passenger
seat?
Yes The child seat may touch the back of
the front passenger seat if the child
restraint manufacturer also allows
contact. See your child restraint own-
er’s manual for more information.
Can the rear head restraints be re-
moved?
No
5
SAFETY 213
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars that are
found at the rear of the seat cushion where it
meets the seatback, below the anchorage sym-
bols on the seatback. They are just visible when
you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint. You
will easily feel them if you run your finger along the gap
between the seatback and seat cushion.
Locating The Upper Tether Anchorages
There are tether strap anchorages behind each
rear seating position located on the back of the
seat.
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be
equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side.
Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower
anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the
anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and some rear-
facing child restraints will also be equipped with a tether
Lower Anchorage Location
Tether Anchorage Locations
214 SAFETY
strap. The tether strap will have a hook at the end to attach
to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten the strap
after it is attached to the anchorage.
Center Seat LATCH
Do not install child restraints with rigid lower attachments
in the center seating position. Only install this type of child
restraint in the outboard seating positions. Child restraints
with flexible, webbing mounted lower attachments can be
installed in any rear seating position.
WARNING!
Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more
than one child restraint. If you are installing LATCH-
compatible child restraints next to each other, you must
use the seat belt for the center position. You can then
use either the LATCH anchors or the vehicle’s seat belt
for installing child seats in the outboard positions.
Please refer to “Installing The LATCH-Compatible
Child Restraint System” for typical installation in-
structions.
Always follow the directions of the child restraint manu-
facturer when installing your child restraint. Not all child
restraint systems will be installed as described here.
To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint
If the selected seating position has a Switchable Automatic
Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat belt,
following the instructions below. See the section “Installing
Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt” to check what
type of seat belt each seating position has.
1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the
tether strap of the child seat so that you can more easily
attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchor-
ages.
2. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for
that seating position. For some second row seats, you
may need to recline the seat and / or raise the head
restraint (if adjustable) to get a better fit. If the rear seat
can be moved forward and rearward in the vehicle, you
may wish to move it to its rear-most position to make
room for the child seat. You may also move the front seat
forward to allow more room for the child seat.
3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child
restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected seating
position.
5
SAFETY 215
4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to the
top tether anchorage. See the section “Installing Child
Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for direc-
tions to attach a tether anchor.
5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint
rearward and downward into the seat. Remove slack in
the straps according to the child restraint manufactur-
er’s instructions.
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling
back and forth on the child seat at the belt path. It
should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any
direction.
How To Stow An Unused Switchable-ALR (ALR)
Seat Belt:
When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child
restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being used by
other occupants or being used to secure child restraints. An
unused belt could injure a child if they play with it and
accidentally lock the seat belt retractor. Before installing a
child restraint using the LATCH system, buckle the seat
belt behind the child restraint and out of the child’s reach.
If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child restraint
installation, instead of buckling it behind the child re-
straint, route the seat belt through the child restraint belt
path and then buckle it. Do not lock the seat belt. Remind
all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and
that they should not play with them.
WARNING!
• Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the re-
straint. The child could be badly injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
• Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand
only those loads imposed by correctly-fitted child
restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be
used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for attaching
other items or equipment to the vehicle.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat
Belt
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in
vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a
lap/shoulder belt.
216 SAFETY
WARNING!
• Improper installation or failure to properly secure a
child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint. The
child could be badly injured or killed.
• Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) that is designed to keep the lap portion of the seat
belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not
necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can be
“switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the
webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing
retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will
make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back into
the retractor.
Refer to the “Automatic Locking Mode” description in
“Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR)” under
“Occupant Restraint Systems” for additional information
on ALR.
Please see the table below and the following sections for
more information.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing Child
Restraints In This Vehicle
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations
ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
5
SAFETY 217
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts
What is the weight limit (child’s
weight + weight of the child re-
straint) for using the Tether Anchor
with the seat belt to attach a forward
facing child restraint?
Weight limit of the Child Restraint Always use the tether anchor when
using the seat belt to install a for-
ward facing child restraint, up to the
recommended weight limit of the
child restraint.
Can the rear-facing child restraint
touch the back of the front passenger
seat?
Yes Contact between the front passenger
seat and the child restraint is al-
lowed, if the child restraint manufac-
turer also allows contact.
Can the rear head restraints be
removed?
No
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to
tighten the seat belt against the belt
path of the child restraint?
No Do not twist the buckle stalk in a
seating position with an
ALR retractor.
Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR):
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in
vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a
lap/shoulder belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation or failure to properly secure a
child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint. The
child could be badly injured or killed.
• Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
218 SAFETY
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating position.
For some second row seats, you may need to recline the
seat and/or raise the head restraint (if adjustable) to get
a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and
rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its
rear-most position to make room for the child seat. You
may also move the front seat forward to allow more
room for the child seat.
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor
to pass it through the belt path of the child restraint. Do
not twist the belt webbing in the belt path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
“click.”
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight
against the child seat.
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of
the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt webbing
out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract
back into the retractor. As the webbing retracts, you will
hear a clicking sound. This means the seat belt is now in
the Automatic Locking mode.
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is
locked, you should not be able to pull out any webbing.
If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the lap
portion around the child restraint while you push the
child restraint rearward and downward into the vehicle
seat.
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the
seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect the
tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether
strap. See the section “Installing Child Restraints Using
the Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to attach a
tether anchor.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling
back and forth on the child seat at the belt path. It
should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any
direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the
belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
5
SAFETY 219
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether
Anchorage:
WARNING!
Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car seat to
any location in front of the car seat, including the seat
frame or a tether anchorage. Only attach the tether
strap of a rear-facing car seat to the tether anchorage
that is approved for that seating position, located
behind the top of the vehicle seat. See the section
“Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren (LATCH)
Restraint System” for the location of approved tether
anchorages in your vehicle.
1. Look behind the seating position where you plan to
install the child restraint to find the tether anchorage.
You may need to move the seat forward to provide
better access to the tether anchorage. If there is no top
tether anchorage for that seating position, move the
child restraint to another position in the vehicle if one is
available.
2. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path for
the strap between the anchor and the child seat. If your
vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head restraints,
raise the head restraint, and where possible, route the
tether strap under the head restraint and between the
two posts. If not possible, lower the head restraint and
pass the tether strap around the outboard side of the
head restraint.
3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to the
top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram.
4. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
220 SAFETY
WARNING!
• An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchorage position directly be-
hind the child seat to secure a child restraint top
tether strap.
• If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat,
make sure the tether strap does not slip into the
opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack
in the strap.
Transporting Pets
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in a
collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in
pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
SAFETY TIPS
Transporting Passengers
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
AREA.
WARNING!
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
(Continued)
Rear Seat Tether Anchors
5
SAFETY 221
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Exhaust Gas
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can even-
tually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO), follow
these safety tips:
• Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
confined areas any longer than needed to move your
vehicle in or out of the area.
• If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate/
rear doors open, make sure that all windows are
closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is set
at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation mode.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running, adjust your heating or cooling con-
trols to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the
blower at high speed.
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the
vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the complete
exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, dam-
aged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or
loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into
the passenger compartment. In addition, inspect the ex-
haust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication
or oil change. Replace as required.
222 SAFETY
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle
Seat Belts
Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced
immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision.
Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision
if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn web-
bing, etc.). If there is any question regarding seat belt or
retractor condition, replace the seat belt.
Air Bag Warning Light
The Air Bag warning light
will turn on for four to
eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch
is first turned to ON/RUN. If the light is either not on
during starting, stays on, or turns on while driving,
have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as
soon as possible. After the bulb check, this light will
illuminate with a single chime when a fault with the Air
Bag System has been detected. It will stay on until the
fault is removed. If the light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving, have an authorized dealer
service the vehicle immediately.
Refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety” for
further information.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to
feel the air directed against the windshield. See an autho-
rized dealer for service if your defroster is inoperable.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit your vehicle. Only
use a floor mat that does not interfere with the operation of
the accelerator, brake or clutch pedals. Only use a floor mat
that is securely attached using the floor mat fasteners so it
cannot slip out of position and interfere with the accelera-
tor, brake or clutch pedals or impair safe operation of your
vehicle in other ways.
5
SAFETY 223
WARNING!
An improperly attached, damaged, folded, or stacked
floor mat, or damaged floor mat fasteners may cause
your floor mat to interfere with the accelerator, brake,
or clutch pedals and cause a loss of vehicle control. To
prevent SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH:
• ALWAYS securely attach
your floor mat using the
floor mat fasteners. DO NOT install your floor mat
upside down or turn your floor mat over. Lightly pull
to confirm mat is secured using the floor mat fasten-
ers on a regular basis.
• ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING FLOOR MAT
FROM THE VEHICLE
before installing any other
floor mat. NEVER install or stack an additional floor
mat on top of an existing floor mat.
• ONLY install floor mats designed to fit your vehicle.
NEVER install a floor mat that cannot be properly
attached and secured to your vehicle. If a floor mat
needs to be replaced, only use a FCA approved floor
mat for the specific make, model, and year of your
vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• ONLY use the driver’s side floor mat on the driver’s
side floor area. To check for interference, with the
vehicle properly parked with the engine off, fully
depress the accelerator, the brake, and the clutch
pedal (if present) to check for interference. If your
floor mat interferes with the operation of any pedal,
or is not secure to the floor, remove the floor mat
from the vehicle and place the floor mat in your
trunk.
• ONLY use the passenger’s side floor mat on the
passenger’s side floor area.
• ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or slide into
the driver’s side floor area when the vehicle is
moving. Objects can become trapped under accelera-
tor, brake, or clutch pedals and could cause a loss of
vehicle control.
• NEVER place any objects under the floor mat (e.g.,
towels, keys, etc.). These objects could change the
position of the floor mat and may cause interference
with the accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals.
(Continued)
224 SAFETY
WARNING! (Continued)
• If the vehicle carpet has been removed and re-
installed, always properly attach carpet to the floor
and check the floor mat fasteners are secure to the
vehicle carpet. Fully depress each pedal to check for
interference with the accelerator, brake, or clutch
pedals then re-install the floor mats.
• It is recommended to only use mild soap and water
to clean your floor mats. After cleaning, always check
your floor mat has been properly installed and is
secured to your vehicle using the floor mat fasteners
by lightly pulling mat.
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts
and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges.
Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the tires (includ-
ing spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and
exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn
signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument
panel.
Door Latches
Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under the vehicle after overnight parking for
fuel, coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or if fuel, or brake fluid leaks are
suspected. The cause should be located and corrected
immediately.
5
SAFETY 225
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵 STARTING THE ENGINE ..................230
▫ Normal Starting .......................230
▫ Cold Weather Operation
(Below –22°F Or −30°C) ..................232
▫ Extended Park Starting ...................232
▫ After Starting — Warming Up The Engine .....233
▫ If Engine Fails To Start ..................233
▫ Stopping The Engine ....................234
䡵 ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED . . . .234
䡵 ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS . . . .235
䡵 PARK BRAKE ..........................236
▫ Electric Park Brake (EPB) .................236
䡵 MANUAL TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED . . .241
▫ Shifting ..............................242
▫ Downshifting..........................243
▫ Parking ..............................245
䡵 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED. .245
▫ Ignition Park Interlock ...................247
▫ Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . . .247
▫ Six-Speed Or Nine-Speed Automatic
Transmission ..........................247
䡵 FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION —
IF EQUIPPED ...........................254
▫ Jeep Active Drive .......................254
䡵 SELEC-TERRAIN — IF EQUIPPED............256
▫ Mode Selection Guide....................257
䡵 POWER STEERING.......................258
䡵 STOP/START SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED........259
▫ Automatic Mode .......................259
6
▫ Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not
Autostop .............................260
▫ To Start The Engine While In Autostop Mode . . .261
▫ To Manually Turn Off The Stop/Start System . .262
▫ To Manually Turn On The Stop/Start System . . .262
▫ System Malfunction .....................262
䡵 SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED ..........263
▫ To Activate ...........................263
▫ To Set A Desired Speed...................264
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting ................264
▫ To Accelerate For Passing .................265
▫ To Resume Speed ......................265
▫ To Deactivate .........................265
䡵 ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) — IF
EQUIPPED ............................266
▫ Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation .....268
▫ To Activate/Deactivate ...................268
▫ Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) .....269
▫ To Set A Desired ACC Speed ...............270
▫ To Cancel ............................270
▫ ToTurnOff...........................271
▫ To Resume ...........................271
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting ................271
▫ Setting The Following Distance In ACC .......273
▫ Overtake Aid ..........................276
▫ ACC Operation At Stop ..................276
▫ Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu ........277
▫ Display Warnings And Maintenance .........278
▫ Precautions While Driving With ACC.........280
▫ General
Information .....................283
▫ Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode . . . .283
䡵 PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST —
IF EQUIPPED ..........................286
▫ ParkSense Sensors ......................286
▫ ParkSense Warning Display................287
228 STARTING AND OPERATING
▫ ParkSense Display ......................287
▫ Enabling And Disabling ParkSense ..........291
▫ Service The ParkSense Rear Park Assist System. .291
▫ Cleaning The ParkSense System.............292
▫ ParkSense System Usage Precautions .........292
䡵 LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED ..............293
▫ LaneSense Operation ....................293
▫ Turning LaneSense On Or Off ..............294
▫ LaneSense Warning Message ...............295
▫ Changing LaneSense Status ................300
䡵 PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA ........300
䡵 REFUELING THE VEHICLE ................302
䡵 VEHICLE LOADING .....................304
▫ Certification Label ......................304
䡵 TRAILER TOWING ......................305
▫ Common Towing Definitions...............306
▫ Trailer Towing Weights
(Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings) ..........308
▫ Trailer And Tongue Weight ...............309
▫ Towing Requirements ...................309
▫ Towing Tips ..........................313
䡵 RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME, ETC.) ....................314
▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle . . .314
▫ Recreational Towing — Front-Wheel Drive (FWD)
Models ..............................314
▫ Recreational Towing — 4X4 Models ..........315
䡵 DRIVING TIPS ..........................315
▫ On-Road Driving Tips ...................315
▫ Of
f-Road Driving Tips ...................316
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 229
STARTING THE ENGINE
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust both
inside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat belts.
WARNING!
• When exiting the vehicle, always remove the key fob
from the vehicle and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others
could be seriously or fatally injured. Children
should be warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the transmission gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in
a location accessible to children, and do not leave the
ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-
N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
Start the engine with the gear selector in the NEUTRAL or
PARK position. Apply the brake before shifting to any
driving range.
Normal Starting
NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine
is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator
pedal.
Cycle the ignition switch to the START position and release
when the engine starts. If the engine fails to start within 10
seconds, cycle the ignition switch to the LOCK/OFF posi-
tion, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal
Starting” procedure.
Tip Start Feature
Cycle the ignition switch to START position and release it
as soon as the starter engages. The starter motor will
continue to run, and will automatically disengage itself
when the engine is running. If the engine fails to start, cycle
the ignition switch to the OFF position, wait 10 to 15
seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.
230 STARTING AND OPERATING
Automatic Transmission
The gear selector must be in the NEUTRAL or PARK
position before you can start the engine. Apply the brakes
before shifting into any driving gear.
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following
precautions are not observed:
• Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL,
or DRIVE when the engine is above idle speed.
• Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after the
vehicle has come to a complete stop.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot is
firmly on the brake pedal.
Keyless Enter-N-Go Functions — Using The ENGINE
START/STOP Button
1. The transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pushing the
ENGINE START/STOP button once.
3. The system takes over and attempts to start the vehicle.
If the vehicle fails to start, the starter will disengage
automatically after 10 seconds.
4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior to
the engine starting, push the button again.
NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine
is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator
pedal.
Keyless Enter-N-Go — With Driver’s Foot OFF The Brake
Pedal/Clutch Pedal (In PARK Or NEUTRAL Position)
The Keyless Enter-N-Go feature operates similar to an
ignition switch. It has three positions, OFF, RUN, and
START. To change the ignition switch positions without
starting the vehicle and use the accessories follow these
steps starting with the ignition switch in the OFF position:
1. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button once to change
the ignition switch to the RUN position,
2. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a second time
to change the ignition switch to the OFF position,
Manual Transmission
The gear selector must be in the NEUTRAL position before
you can start the engine. Apply the brakes before shifting
into any driving gear.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 231
Keyless Enter-N-Go Functions — Using The ENGINE
START/STOP Button
1. The transmission must be in NEUTRAL.
2. Press and hold the clutch pedal while pushing the
ENGINE START/STOP button once.
3. The system takes over and attempts to start the vehicle.
If the vehicle fails to start, the starter will disengage
automatically after 10 seconds.
4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior to
the engine starting, push the button again.
NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine
is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator
pedal.
Keyless Enter-N-Go Functions — With Driver’s Foot OFF
The Brake Pedal/Clutch Pedal (In PARK Or NEUTRAL
Position)
The Keyless Enter-N-Go feature operates similar to an
ignition switch. It has three positions, OFF, RUN, and
START. To change the ignition switch positions without
starting the vehicle and use the accessories follow these
steps starting with the ignition switch in the OFF position:
1. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button once to change
the ignition switch to the RUN position,
2. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a second time
to change the ignition switch to the OFF position,
Cold Weather Operation (Below –22°F Or −30°C)
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of an
externally powered electric engine block heater (available
from your authorized dealer) is recommended.
Extended Park Starting
NOTE: Extended Park condition occurs when the vehicle
has not been started or driven for at least 30 days.
1. Install a battery charger or jumper cables to the battery
to ensure a full battery charge during the crank cycle.
2. Cycle the ignition in the START position and release it
when the engine starts.
3. If the engine fails to start within ten seconds, cycle the
ignition to the OFF position, wait five seconds to allow
the starter to cool, then repeat the Extended Park
Starting procedure.
232 STARTING AND OPERATING
4. If the engine fails to start after eight attempts, allow the
starter to cool for at least 10 minutes, then repeat the
procedure.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank continu-
ously for more than 10 seconds at a time. Wait 10 to 15
seconds before trying again.
After Starting — Warming Up The Engine
The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will
decrease as the engine warms up.
If Engine Fails To Start
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
⬙Normal Starting⬙ or ⬙Extreme Cold Weather⬙ procedure,
and has not experienced an extended park condition as
identified in ⬙Extended Park Starting⬙ procedure it may be
flooded. Push the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor
and hold it there. Crank the engine for no more than 15
seconds. This should clear any excess fuel in case the
engine is flooded. Leave the ignition key in the RUN
position, release the accelerator pedal and repeat the “Nor-
mal Starting” procedure.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not continuously
crank the engine for more than 25 seconds at a time.
Wait 60 seconds before trying again.
WARNING!
• Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the
throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start
the vehicle. This could result in flash fire causing
serious personal injury.
• Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic trans-
mission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel
could enter the catalytic converter and once the
engine has started, ignite and damage the converter
and vehicle.
• If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster cables
may be used to obtain a start from a booster battery
or the battery in another vehicle. This type of start
can be dangerous if done improperly. Refer to “Jump
Starting Procedure” in “In Case Of Emergency” for
further information.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 233
Stopping The Engine
Vehicles Equipped With Electronic Key (Keyless Enter-
N-Go):
To shut off the engine with vehicle speed greater than
5 mph (8 km/h), you must push and hold the ignition or
push the START/STOP button three times consecutively
within a few seconds. The engine will shut down, and the
ignition will be placed in the RUN position.
Turning Off the car (placing the ignition from the RUN
position to the STOP position), the power supply to the
accessories are maintained for a period of three minutes.
Opening the driver side door with the ignition in RUN will
sound a short chime that reminds the driver to place the
ignition to STOP.
When the ignition is in the STOP/OFF position, the win-
dow switches remains active for three minutes. Opening a
front door will cancel this function.
After severe driving, idle the engine to allow the tempera-
ture inside the engine compartment to cool before shutting
off the engine.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
The engine block heater warms the engine and permits
quicker starts in cold weather.
Connect the cord to a 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with
a grounded, three-wire extension cord.
For ambient temperatures below 0°F (-18°C), the engine
block heater is recommended. For ambient temperatures
below -20°F (-29°C), the engine block heater is required.
The engine block heater cord is routed under the hood,
behind to the driver’s side headlamp. Follow the steps
below to properly use the engine block heater:
1. Locate the engine block heater cord (behind the driver’s
side headlamp).
2. Undo the hook-and-loop strap that secures the heater
cord in place.
3. Pull the cord to the front of the vehicle and plug it into
a grounded, three-wire extension cord.
4. After the vehicle is running, reattach the cord to the
hook-and-loop strap, and properly stow away behind
the driver’s side headlamp.
234 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
• The engine block heater cord is a factory installed
option. If your vehicle is not equipped, heater cords are
available from your authorized Mopar dealer.
• The engine block heater will require 110 Volts AC and 6.5
Amps to activate the heater element.
• The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one
hour to have an adequate warming effect on the engine.
WARNING!
Remember to disconnect the engine block heater cord
before driving. Damage to the 110-115 Volt electrical
cord could cause electrocution.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the engine and
drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km). After
the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80
or 90 km/h) are desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the
limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in.
Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri-
mental and should be avoided.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil changes
should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions
under which vehicle operations will occur. For the recom-
mended viscosity and quality grades, refer to “Dealer
Service” in “Servicing And Maintenance”.
CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil
in the engine or damage may result.
NOTE: A new engine may consume some oil during its
first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This
should be considered a normal part of the break-in and not
interpreted as a problem.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 235
PARK BRAKE
Electric Park Brake (EPB)
Your vehicle is equipped with an Electric Park Brake
System (EPB) that offers simple operation, and some
additional features that make the parking brake more
convenient and useful.
The parking brake is primarily intended to prevent the
vehicle from rolling while parked. Before leaving the
vehicle, make sure that the park brake is applied. Also, be
certain to leave the transmission in PARK.
You can engage the park brake in two ways:
• Manually, by applying the park brake switch.
• Automatically, by enabling the Auto Park Brake feature
in the customer programmable features section of the
Uconnect settings.
The park brake switch is located in the center console.
To apply the park brake manually, pull up on the switch
momentarily. You may hear a slight whirring sound from
the back of the vehicle while the park brake engages. Once
the park brake is fully engaged, the BRAKE warning lamp
in the instrument cluster and an indicator on the switch
will illuminate. If your foot is on the brake pedal while you
apply the park brake, you may notice a small amount of
brake pedal movement. The park brake can be applied
even when the ignition switch is OFF but the BRAKE
warning lamp will not illuminate, however, it can only be
released when the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN
position.
Electric Park Brake Switch
236 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: The EPB fault lamp will illuminate if the EPB
switch is held for longer than 60 seconds in either the
released or applied position. The light will extinguish upon
releasing the switch.
If the Auto Park Brake feature is enabled, the parking brake
will automatically engage whenever the transmission is
placed into PARK, or with a manual transmission, when
the ignition switch is turned OFF. If your foot is on the
brake pedal, you may notice a small amount of brake pedal
movement while the park brake is engaging.
The park brake will release automatically when the igni-
tion switch is ON, the transmission is in DRIVE or RE-
VERSE, the driver seat belt is buckled, and an attempt is
made to drive away.
To release the park brake manually, the ignition switch
must be in the ON/RUN position. Put your foot on the
brake pedal, then push the park brake switch down
momentarily. You may hear a slight whirring sound from
the back of the car while the parking brake disengages. You
may also notice a small amount of movement in the brake
pedal. Once the park brake is fully disengaged, the BRAKE
warning lamp in the instrument cluster and the LED
indicator on the switch will extinguish.
NOTE: When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the
front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and
away from the curb on an uphill grade. Apply the park
brake before placing the gear selector in PARK, otherwise
the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make
it difficult to move the gear selector out of PARK. The
parking brake should always be applied whenever the
driver is not in the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Do not rely on the parking brake to operate effec-
tively if the rear brakes have been immersed in water
or mud.
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully
when parked to guard against vehicle movement and
possible injury or damage.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key fob
from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
(Continued)
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 237
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number
of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear
selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in
a location accessible to children, and do not leave the
ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-
N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before
driving; failure to do so can lead to brake failure and
a collision.
• Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving
your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage or
injury. Also be certain to leave the transmission in
PARK. Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll
and cause damage or injury.
CAUTION!
If the Brake System Warning Light remains on with the
parking brake released, a brake system malfunction is
indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an au-
thorized dealer immediately.
If exceptional circumstances should make it necessary to
engage the park brake while the vehicle is in motion,
maintain upward pressure on the electric park brake
switch for as long as engagement is desired. The BRAKE
warning lamp will illuminate, and a continuous chime will
sound. The rear stop lamps will also be illuminated auto-
matically while the vehicle remains in motion.
To disengage the park brake while the vehicle is in motion,
release the switch. If the vehicle is brought to a complete
stop using the parking brake, when the vehicle reaches
approximately 3 mph, (5 km/h) the parking brake will
remain engaged.
WARNING!
Driving the vehicle with the parking brake engaged, or
repeated use of the parking brake to slow the vehicle
may cause serious damage to the brake system; failure
to do so can lead to brake failure and a collision.
238 STARTING AND OPERATING
In the unlikely event of a malfunction of the Electric Park
Brake system, a yellow EPB fault lamp will illuminate. This
may be accompanied by the BRAKE warning lamp flash-
ing. In this event, urgent service of the electric park brake
system is required. Do not rely on the parking brake to
hold the vehicle stationary.
Auto Park Brake
The EPB can be programmed to be applied automatically
whenever the vehicle speed is below 1.9 mph (3 km/h) and
the automatic transmission is placed in PARK, or with a
manual transmission, whenever the ignition switch is in
the OFF position. Auto Park Brake is enabled and disabled
by customer selection through the Customer Program-
mable Features section of the Uconnect Settings.
Any single Auto Park Brake application can be bypassed
by pushing the EPB switch to the release position while the
transmission is placed in PARK (automatic transmission)
and the ignition is in the ON/RUN position.
SafeHold
SafeHold is a safety feature of the EPB system that will
engage the park brake automatically if the vehicle is left
unsecured while the ignition switch is in ON/RUN.
For automatic transmissions, the EPB will automatically
engage if all of the following conditions are met:
• Vehicle speed is below 1.9 mph (3 km/h).
• There is no attempt to depress the brake pedal or
accelerator pedal.
• The seat belt is unbuckled.
• The driver door is open.
• The vehicle is not in the PARK position.
For manual transmissions, the EPB will automatically
engage if all of the following conditions are met:
• Vehicle speed is below 1.9 mph (3 km/h).
• There is no attempt to depress the brake pedal or
accelerator pedal.
• The clutch pedal is not pressed.
• The seat belt is unbuckled.
• The driver door is open.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 239
SafeHold can be temporarily bypassed by pushing the EPB
Switch while the driver door is open and the brake pedal is
pressed. Once manually bypassed, SafeHold will be en-
abled again once the vehicle reaches 12 mph (20 km/h) or
the ignition is turned to the OFF position and back to
ON/RUN again.
Brake Service Mode
We recommend having your brakes serviced by an autho-
rized dealer.
You should only make repairs for which you have the
knowledge and the right equipment. You should only enter
Brake Service Mode during brake service.
When servicing your rear brakes, it may be necessary for
you or your technician to push the rear piston into the rear
caliper bore. With the electric park brake system, this can
only be done after retracting the EPB actuator. The actuator
retraction can be done easily by entering the Brake Service
Mode through the Uconnect Settings in your vehicle. This
menu based system will guide you through the steps
necessary to retract the EPB actuator in order to perform
rear brake service.
Service Mode has requirements that must be met in order
to be activated:
• The vehicle must be at a standstill.
• The parking brake must be disabled.
• The transmission must be in park or neutral.
• The EPB switch not activated.
• The vehicle in ignition ON/RUN position.
• The brake pedal not pressed.
While in service mode, the EPB fault lamp will flash
continuously while the ignition switch is ON/RUN.
NOTE: A dedicated message will appear in the instrument
cluster display if Brake Service Mode cannot be activated.
When brake service work is complete, the following steps
must be followed to reset the parking brake system to
normal operation:
• Ensure the vehicle is at a standstill.
• Press the brake pedal with moderate force.
• Apply the EPB Switch.
240 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
A dedicated message will appear in the instrument
cluster display if Brake Service Mode cannot be deactivated.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only that service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you
have any doubt about your ability to perform a service
job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
MANUAL TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED
WARNING!
You or others could be injured if you leave the vehicle
unattended without having the park brake fully ap-
plied. The park brake should always be applied when
the driver is not in the vehicle, especially on an incline.
CAUTION!
• Never drive with your foot resting on the clutch
pedal, or attempt to hold the vehicle on a hill with
the clutch pedal partially engaged, as this will cause
abnormal wear on the clutch.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Do not drive with your hand resting on the gear
selector as the force exerted, even if slight, could lead
over time to premature wear of the gearbox internal
components.
NOTE: During cold weather, you may experience in-
creased effort in shifting until the transmission fluid warms
up. This is normal.
Gear Selector
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 241
To shift the gears, fully press the clutch pedal and place the
gear selector into the desired gear position (the diagram for
the engagement of the gears is displayed on the handle of
the selector).
To engage REVERSE gear from the NEUTRAL position, lift
the REVERSE ring, located below the knob and move the
gear selector all the way left and then forward.
Shifting
Fully press the clutch pedal before shifting gears. As you
release the clutch pedal, lightly press the accelerator pedal.
You should always use first gear when starting from a
standing position.
Recommended Vehicle Shift Speeds
To utilize your manual transmission efficiently for fuel
economy and performance, it should be upshifted as listed
in the recommended shift speed chart. Shift at the vehicle
speeds listed for acceleration. When heavily loaded or
pulling a trailer, these recommended up-shift speeds may
not apply.
Shift Pattern
242 STARTING AND OPERATING
Manual Transmission Shift Speeds in MPH (KM/H)
All Engines Gear Selection 2 to 3 3 to 4 4 to 5 5 to 6
Accel. 24 (39) 34 (55) 47 (76) 56 (90)
Cruise 19 (31) 27 (43) 37 (60) 41 (66)
NOTE: A certain amount of noise from the transmission is
normal. This noise can be most noticeable when the vehicle
is idling in NEUTRAL with the clutch engaged (clutch
pedal released), but it may also be heard when driving. The
noise may also be more noticeable when the transmission is
warm. This noise is normal and is not an indication of a
problem with your clutch or transmission.
Downshifting
Moving from a high gear down to a lower gear is recom-
mended to preserve brakes when driving down steep hills.
In addition, downshifting at the right time provides better
acceleration when you desire to resume speed. Downshift
progressively. Do not skip gears to avoid overspeeding the
engine and clutch.
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their
grip, and the vehicle could skid.
CAUTION!
• Skipping gears and downshifting into lower gears at
higher vehicle speeds can damage the engine and
clutch systems, Any attempt to shift into lower gear
with clutch pedal depressed may result damage to
the clutch system. Shifting into lower gear and
releasing the clutch may result in engine damage.
(Continued)
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 243
CAUTION! (Continued)
• When descending a hill, be very careful to downshift
one gear at a time to prevent overspeeding the engine
which can cause engine damage, and/or clutch dam-
age, even if the clutch pedal is pressed. If transfer
case is in low range the vehicle speeds to cause
engine and clutch damage are significantly lower.
• Failure to follow the maximum recommended down-
shifting speeds may cause the engine damage and/or
damage the clutch, even if the clutch pedal is
pressed.
• Descending a hill in low range with clutch pedal
depressed could result in clutch damage.
Maximum Recommended Downshift Speeds
CAUTION!
Failure to follow the maximum recommended down-
shifting speeds may cause the engine to overspeed
and/or damage the clutch disc, even if the clutch pedal
is pressed.
Manual Transmission Shift Speeds in MPH (KM/H)
Gear Selection 6 to 5 5 to 4 4 to 3 3 to 2 2 to 1
Maximum Speed 80 (129) 70 (113) 50 (81) 30 (48) 15 (24)
244 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
If you skip a gear while downshifting or downshift at
too high of a vehicle speed, these conditions may cause
the engine to overspeed if too low of a gear is selected
and the clutch pedal is released. Damage to the clutch
and the transmission can result from skipping a gear
while downshifting or downshifting at too high of a
vehicle speed even if the clutch pedal is held pressed
(i.e., not released).
Parking
When parking and leaving the vehicle, proceed as follows:
• Engage a gear (first gear if facing uphill or reverse if
facing downhill) and leave the wheels turned.
• Stop the engine and engage the park brake.
• Always remove the key fob.
• Block the wheels with a wedge or a stone if the vehicle
is parked on a steep slope.
NOTE: NEVER leave the car with the gearbox in neutral
(or, if equipped with automatic transmission, before plac-
ing the gear lever in PARK).
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. Al-
ways remove the key fob when exiting the vehicle and
take it with you.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
park brake. Always apply the park brake fully when
exiting the vehicle to guard against vehicle move-
ment and possible injury or damage.
• Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if
it is not in PARK. Check by trying to move the gear
selector out of PARK with the brake pedal released.
Make sure the transmission is in PARK before exit-
ing the vehicle.
(Continued)
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 245
WARNING! (Continued)
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if
the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your
foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re-
verse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when the
engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly
pressing the brake pedal.
• The vehicle may not engage a newly selected gear
when shifting between PARK, REVERSE, or DRIVE
if the vehicle is moving while shifting.
•
Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those
in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you should
never exit a vehicle while the engine is running. Before
exiting a vehicle, always come to a complete stop, then
apply the park brake, shift the transmission into PARK,
and turn the ignition OFF. When the ignition is in the
OFF mode, the transmission is locked in PARK, secur-
ing the vehicle against unwanted movement.
• When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the key fob from
the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number
of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the park brake, brake pedal or the transmis-
sion gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or in
a location accessible to children), and do not leave
the ignition in the ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following
precautions are not observed:
• Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after the
vehicle has come to a complete stop.
• Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL,
or DRIVE when the engine is above idle speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
246 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: You must press and hold the brake pedal while
shifting out of PARK.
Ignition Park Interlock
This vehicle is equipped with an Ignition Park Interlock
which requires the transmission to be in PARK before the
ignition can be turned to the OFF mode. This helps the
driver avoid inadvertently leaving the vehicle without
placing the transmission in PARK. This system also locks
the transmission in PARK whenever the ignition is in the
OFF mode.
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift
Interlock system (BTSI) that holds the transmission gear
selector in PARK unless the brakes are applied. To shift the
transmission out of PARK, the ignition must be in the
ON/RUN mode (whether the engine is running or not),
and the brake pedal must be pressed. The brake pedal must
also be pressed to shift from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or
REVERSE when the vehicle is stopped or moving at low
speeds.
Six-Speed Or Nine-Speed Automatic Transmission
NOTE: Your vehicle may be equipped with a six-speed or
nine-speed automatic transmission, depending on model.
This section describes operation of both the six-speed and
nine-speed transmission.
The transmission gear range (PRND) is displayed both
beside the gear selector and in the instrument cluster. To
select a gear range, push the lock button on the gear
selector and move the selector rearward or forward. You
must also press the brake pedal to shift the transmission
out of PARK (or NEUTRAL, when the vehicle is stopped or
moving at low speeds). Select the DRIVE range for normal
driving.
NOTE: In the event of a mismatch between the gear
selector position and the actual transmission gear (for
example, driver selects REVERSE while driving forward),
the position indicator will blink continuously until the
selector is returned to the proper position, or the requested
shift can be completed.
The electronically-controlled transmission adapts its shift
schedule based on driver inputs, along with environmental
and road conditions. The transmission electronics are self-
calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new vehicle
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 247
may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal condition, and
precision shifts will develop within a few hundred miles
(kilometers).
The nine-speed transmission has been developed to meet
the needs of current and future FWD/AWD vehicles.
Software and calibration is refined to optimize the custom-
er’s driving experience and fuel economy. By design, some
vehicle and driveline combinations utilize 9th gear only in
very specific driving situations and conditions.
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the
accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped. Be
sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when shifting
between these gears.
The transmission gear selector provides PARK, REVERSE,
NEUTRAL, DRIVE, and AutoStick (+/-) shift positions.
Manual shifts can be made using the AutoStick shift
control. Moving the gear selector into the AutoStick (+/-)
position (beside the DRIVE position) activates AutoStick
mode, providing manual shift control and displaying the
current gear in the instrument cluster (as 1, 2, 3, etc.).
Toggling the gear selector forward (-) or rearward (+) while
in the AutoStick position will manually select the transmis-
sion gear. Refer to ⬙AutoStick⬙ in this section for further
information.
NOTE: If the gear selector cannot be moved to the PARK,
REVERSE, or NEUTRAL position (when pushed forward)
it is probably in the AutoStick (+/-) position (beside the
DRIVE position). In AutoStick mode, the transmission gear
(1, 2, 3, etc.) is displayed in the instrument cluster. Move
the gear selector to the right (into the DRIVE [D] position)
for access to PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL.
Gear Ranges
Do not depress the accelerator pedal when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range.
Gear Selector
248 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to
allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating. This
is especially important when the engine is cold.
PARK (P)
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in motion.
Apply the parking brake when exiting the vehicle in this
range.
When parking on a level surface, you may shift the
transmission into PARK first, and then apply the parking
brake.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
shifting the transmission to PARK, otherwise the load on
the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult
to move the gear selector out of PARK. As an added
precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a
downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade.
When exiting the vehicle, always:
1. Apply the parking brake.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
3. Turn the ignition OFF.
4. Remove the key fob from the vehicle.
NOTE: Block the wheels with a wedge or a stone if the
vehicle is parked on a steep slope.
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
park brake. Always apply the park brake fully when
exiting the vehicle to guard against vehicle move-
ment and possible injury or damage.
• Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if
it is not in PARK. Check by trying to move the gear
selector out of PARK with the brake pedal released.
Make sure the transmission is in PARK before exit-
ing the vehicle.
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if
the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your
foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re-
verse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when the
engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly
pressing the brake pedal.
(Continued)
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 249
WARNING! (Continued)
• The vehicle may not engage a newly selected gear
when shifting between PARK, REVERSE, or DRIVE
if the vehicle is moving while shifting.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you
should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a
complete stop, then apply the park brake, shift the
transmission into PARK, and turn the ignition OFF.
When the ignition is in the OFF mode, the transmis-
sion is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against
unwanted movement.
• When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the key fob from
the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number
of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the park brake, brake pedal or the transmis-
sion gear selector.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or in
a location accessible to children), and do not leave
the ignition in the ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
CAUTION!
• Before moving the transmission gear selector out of
PARK, you must turn the ignition to the ON/RUN
mode, and also press the brake pedal. Otherwise,
damage to the gear selector could result.
• DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK
or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this can
damage the drivetrain.
The following indicators should be used to ensure that you
have properly engaged the transmission into the PARK
position:
• When shifting into PARK, push the lock button on the
gear selector, and firmly move the selector all the way
forward until it stops and is fully seated.
250 STARTING AND OPERATING
• Look at the transmission gear position display and
verify that it indicates the PARK position (P).
• With brake pedal released, verify that the gear selector
will not move out of PARK.
REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
NEUTRAL (N)
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged
periods with the engine running. The engine may be
started in this range. Apply the park brake and shift the
transmission into PARK if you must exit the vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe practices
that limit your response to changing traffic or road
conditions. You might lose control of the vehicle and
have a collision.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause
severe transmission damage.
Refer to “Recreational Towing” in “Starting And Op-
erating” and “Towing A Disabled Vehicle” in “In Case
Of Emergency” for further information.
DRIVE (D)
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downshifts,
and the best fuel economy. The transmission automatically
upshifts through all forward gears. The DRIVE position
provides optimum driving characteristics under all normal
operating conditions.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as when
operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions, in
hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or while
towing a heavy trailer), use the AutoStick shift control to
select a lower gear (refer to ⬙AutoStick⬙ in this section for
further information). Under these conditions, using a lower
gear will improve performance and extend transmission
life by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 251
If the transmission temperature exceeds normal operating
limits, the transmission controller may modify the trans-
mission shift schedule, reduce engine torque, and/or ex-
pand the range of torque converter clutch engagement.
This is done to prevent transmission damage due to
overheating.
If the transmission becomes extremely hot, the ⬙Transmis-
sion Temperature Warning Light⬙ may illuminate, and the
transmission may operate differently until the transmission
cools down.
During cold temperatures, transmission operation may be
modified depending on engine and/or transmission tem-
perature as well as vehicle speed. This feature improves
warm up time of the engine and transmission to achieve
maximum efficiency. Engagement of the torque converter
clutch (and, for the nine-speed, shifts into 8th or 9th gear),
are inhibited until the engine and/or transmission is warm
(refer to the “Note” under “Torque Converter Clutch” in
this section). Normal operation will resume once the
temperature(s) have risen to a suitable level.
AutoStick
AutoStick is a driver-interactive transmission feature pro-
viding manual shift control, giving you more control of the
vehicle. AutoStick allows you to maximize engine braking,
eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts, and im-
prove overall vehicle performance. This system can also
provide you with more control during passing, city driv-
ing, cold slippery conditions, mountain driving, trailer
towing, and many other situations.
Operation
When the gear selector is in the AutoStick position (beside
the DRIVE position), it can be moved forward and rear-
ward. This allows the driver to manually select the trans-
mission gear being used. Moving the gear selector forward
(-) triggers a downshift and rearward (+) an upshift. The
current gear is displayed in the instrument cluster.
In AutoStick mode, the transmission will shift up or down
when the driver moves the gear selector rearward (+) or
forward (-), unless an engine lugging or overspeed condi-
tion would result. It will remain in the selected gear until
another upshift or downshift is chosen, except as described
below.
252 STARTING AND OPERATING
• Six-speed transmissions will automatically upshift when
necessary to prevent engine over-speed.
• The transmission will automatically downshift as the
vehicle slows (to prevent engine lugging) and will
display the current gear.
• The transmission will automatically downshift to first
gear when coming to a stop. After a stop, the driver
should manually upshift (+) the transmission as the
vehicle is accelerated.
• You can start out, from a stop, in first or second gear (or
third gear, in six-speed models, or in 4LO range, Snow
mode, or Sand mode, where available). Tapping (+) (at a
stop) will allow starting in second gear. Starting out in
second gear can be helpful in snowy or icy conditions.
• If a requested downshift would cause the engine to
over-speed, that shift will not occur.
• The system will ignore attempts to upshift at too low of
a vehicle speed.
• Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when
AutoStick is enabled.
• The system may revert to automatic shift mode if a fault
or overheat condition is detected.
NOTE: When Selec-Speed or Hill Descent Control is en-
abled, AutoStick is not active.
To disengage AutoStick, return the gear selector to the
DRIVE position. You can shift in or out of the AutoStick
position at any time without taking your foot off the
accelerator pedal.
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their grip
and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or
personal injury.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is monitored electronically for ab-
normal conditions. If a condition is detected that could
result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home
Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission may
operate only in a fixed gear, or may remain in NEUTRAL.
The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be illuminated.
Limp Home Mode may allow the vehicle to be driven to an
authorized dealer for service without damaging the trans-
mission.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 253
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission can
be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the
following steps:
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK, if possible. If not, shift
the transmission to NEUTRAL.
3. Push and hold the ignition until the engine turns OFF.
4. Wait approximately 30 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no
longer detected, the transmission will return to normal
operation.
NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recom-
mend that you visit an authorized dealer at your earliest
possible convenience. An authorized dealer has diagnostic
equipment to assess the condition of your transmission. If
the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer service
is required.
Torque Converter Clutch
A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been
included in the automatic transmission on your vehicle. A
clutch within the torque converter engages automatically
at calibrated speeds. This may result in a slightly different
feeling or response during normal operation in the upper
gears. When the vehicle speed drops or during some
accelerations, the clutch automatically disengages.
NOTE: The torque converter clutch will not engage until
the engine and/or transmission is warm (usually after 1 to
3 miles [2 to 5 km] of driving). Because the engine speed is
higher when the torque converter clutch is not engaged, it
may seem as if the transmission is not shifting properly
when the vehicle is cold. This is normal. The torque
converter clutch will function normally once the pow-
ertrain is sufficiently warm.
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION — IF EQUIPPED
Jeep Active Drive
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Power Transfer Unit
(PTU). This system is automatic with no driver inputs or
additional driving skills required. Under normal driving
conditions, the front wheels provide most of the traction. If
the front wheels begin to lose traction, power is shifted
automatically to the rear wheels. The greater the front
wheel traction loss, the greater the power transfer to the
rear wheels.
254 STARTING AND OPERATING
Additionally, on dry pavement under heavy throttle input
(where one may have no wheel spin), torque will be sent to
the rear in a preemptive effort to improve vehicle launch
and performance characteristics.
CAUTION!
All wheels must have the same size and type tires.
Unequal tire sizes must not be used. Unequal tire size
may cause failure of the power transfer unit.
Four Wheel Drive (4x4)
The four wheel drive (4WD) is fully automatic in normal
driving mode.
NOTE: It is not possible to carry out the change of mode
when the vehicle exceeds the speed of 75 mph (120 km/h).
Enabling Four Wheel Drive (4x4)
The buttons for the activation of four wheel drive are
located on the device Selec-Terrain and allow you to select
the following:
• 4WD LOCK
• 4WD LOW — (Trailhawk models only)
Active Drive Control — If Equipped
The Power Transfer Unit (PTU) is locked to ensure imme-
diate availability of torque to the rear drive axles. This
feature is selectable in AUTO mode and automatic in the
other driving mode. 4WD LOCK can be enabled by the
following ways:
• When the 4WD LOCK button is pushed.
• When the Selec-Terrain switch is rotated from AUTO to
any other off-road modes.
Selec-Terrain Switch
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 255
Active Drive With Low Control — (Trailhawk models
only)
The 4WD LOW mode helps to improve the off-road
performance in all modes. To enable 4WD LOW, please
follow the steps below:
Enabling 4WD LOW
With the vehicle stationary, the ignition in the ON/RUN or
with the engine running, shift the transmission into NEU-
TRAL and push the button once 4WD LOW. The instru-
ment cluster will display the message ⬙4WD LOW⬙ once
the shift is complete.
NOTE:
• Both LOCK and LOW LEDs will blink and then become
active on the Selec-Terrain switch until the shift is
complete.
• The instrument cluster display will illuminate the ⬙4WD
LOW⬙ icon.
Disabling 4WD LOW
To disable the 4WD LOW mode, the vehicle must be
stationary and the transmission shifted into NEUTRAL.
Push the 4WD LOW button once.
SELEC-TERRAIN — IF EQUIPPED
Selec-Terrain combines the capabilities of the vehicle con-
trol systems, along with driver input, to provide the best
performance for all terrains.
Selec-Terrain Switch (Trailhawk)
256 STARTING AND OPERATING
Mode Selection Guide
Rotate the Selec-Terrain knob to select the desired mode.
• AUTO: This four-wheel drive operation is a continuous
operation, is fully automatic and can be used on and off
road. This mode balances traction to ensure maneuver-
ability and acceleration improvement compared to a
vehicle with two wheel drive. This mode also reduces
fuel consumption, since it allows the disconnect of the
drive shaft where conditions permit.
• SNOW: This mode allows you to have greater stability
under conditions of bad weather. For use on and off road
on surfaces with poor traction, such as roads covered
with snow. When in SNOW mode (depending on certain
Selec-Terrain Switch
Selec-Terrain Switch (Trailhawk)
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 257
operating conditions), the transmission may use second
gear (rather than first gear) during launches, to mini-
mize wheel slippage.
• SAND: For off-road driving or use on surfaces with poor
traction, such as dry sand. The transmission is set to
provide maximum traction.
• MUD: For off-road driving or use on surfaces with poor
traction, such as roads covered by mud or wet grass.
• ROCK (Trailhawk only): This mode is only available in
4WD LOW range. The device sets the vehicle to maxi-
mize traction and allow the highest steering capacity for
off-road surfaces. This mode gives you the maximum
performance off-road. Use for low speed obstacles such
as large rocks, deep ruts, etc.
NOTE:
• Rock mode is only available on the vehicles equipped
with the Off-Road package.
• Activate the Hill Descent Control for steep downhill
control. See “Electronic Brake Control System” in this
section for further information.
POWER STEERING
The electric power steering system will give you good
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in
tight spaces. The system will vary its assist to provide light
efforts while parking and good feel while driving. If the
electric steering system experiences a fault that reduces
assist or prevents the vehicle from providing assist, you
will still have the ability to steer the vehicle manually.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced assist could pose a
safety risk to yourself and others. Service should be
obtained as soon as possible.
If the “SERVICE POWER STEERING⬙ OR
⬙POWER STEERING ASSIST OFF - SERVICE
SYSTEM” message and a steering wheel icon are
displayed on the instrument cluster display, it
indicates that the vehicle needs to be taken to the dealer for
service. It is likely the vehicle has lost power steering
assistance. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Get-
ting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for further informa-
tion.
258 STARTING AND OPERATING
If the “POWER STEERING SYSTEM HOT - PERFOR-
MANCE MAY BE LIMITED” message and an icon are
displayed on the instrument cluster display, it indicates
that extreme steering maneuvers may have occurred,
which caused an over temperature condition in the power
steering system. You will lose power steering assistance
momentarily until the over temperature condition no lon-
ger exists. Once driving conditions are safe, then pull over
and let vehicle idle for a few moments until the light turns
off. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To
Know Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
NOTE:
• Even if the power steering assistance is no longer
operational, it is still possible to steer the vehicle. Under
these conditions there will be a substantial increase in
steering effort, especially at low speeds and during
parking maneuvers.
• If the condition persists, see your authorized dealer for
service.
STOP/START SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The Stop/Start function is developed to reduce fuel con-
sumption. The system will stop the engine automatically
during a vehicle stop if the required conditions are met.
Releasing the brake pedal or pressing the accelerator pedal
will automatically re-start the engine.
This vehicle has been upgraded with a heavy duty starter,
enhanced battery, and other upgraded engine parts, to
handle the additional engine starts.
Automatic Mode
The Stop/Start feature is enabled after every normal cus-
tomer engine start. At that time, the system will go into
STOP/START READY and if all other conditions are met,
can go into a STOP/START AUTOSTOP ACTIVE “Au-
tostop” mode.
To Activate The Autostop Mode, The Following Must
Occur:
• The system must be in STOP/START READY state. A
STOP/START READY message will be displayed in the
instrument cluster display within the Stop/Start section.
Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To
Know Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 259
• The vehicle must be completely stopped.
• The gear selector must be in a forward gear and the
brake pedal depressed.
The engine will shut down, the tachometer will move to
the zero position and the Stop/Start telltale will illuminate
indicating you are in Autostop. Customer settings will be
maintained upon return to an engine running condition.
Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not Autostop
Prior to engine shut down, the system will check many
safety and comfort conditions to see if they are fulfilled.
Detailed information about the operation of the Stop/Start
system may be viewed in the instrument cluster display
Stop/Start Screen. In the following situations the engine
will not stop:
• Driver’s seat belt is not buckled.
• Driver’s door is not closed.
• Battery temperature is too warm or cold.
• Battery charge is low.
• The vehicle is on a steep grade.
• Cabin heating or cooling is in process and an acceptable
cabin temperature has not been achieved.
• HVAC is set to full defrost mode at a high blower speed.
• HVAC set to MAX A/C.
• Engine has not reached normal operating temperature.
• The transmission is not in a forward gear.
• Hood is open.
• Vehicle is in 4WD LOW transfer case mode.
• Brake pedal is not pressed with sufficient pressure.
Other Factors Which Can Inhibit Autostop Include:
• Accelerator pedal input.
• Engine temp too high.
• 5 MPH (8 km/h) threshold not achieved from previous
AUTOSTOP.
• Steering angle beyond threshold.
• Adaptive Cruise Control is on and speed is set.
It may be possible for the vehicle to be driven several times
without the STOP/START system going into a STOP/
START READY state under more extreme conditions of the
items listed above.
260 STARTING AND OPERATING
To Start The Engine While In Autostop Mode
While in a forward gear, the engine will start when the
brake pedal is released or the throttle pedal is depressed.
The transmission will automatically re-engage upon en-
gine restart.
Conditions That Will Cause The Engine To Start Auto-
matically While In Autostop Mode:
• The transmission selector is moved out of DRIVE.
• To maintain cabin temperature comfort.
• HVAC is set to full defrost mode.
• HVAC system temperature or fan speed is manually
adjusted.
• Battery voltage drops too low.
• Low brake vacuum (e.g. after several brake pedal appli-
cations).
• STOP/START OFF switch is pressed.
• A STOP/START system error occurs.
• 4WD system is put into 4WD LOW mode.
Conditions That Force An Application Of The Electric
Park Brake While In Autostop Mode:
• The drivers door is open and brake pedal released.
• The drivers door is open and the drivers seat belt is
unbuckled.
• The engine hood has been opened.
• A STOP/START system error occurs.
If the Electric Park Brake is applied with the engine off, the
engine may require a manual restart and the electric park
brake may require a manual release (depress brake pedal
and press Electric Park Brake switch). Refer to “Instrument
Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 261
To Manually Turn Off The Stop/Start System
1. Push the STOP/START Off switch (located on the
switch bank). The light on the switch will illuminate.
2. The “STOP/START OFF” message will appear in instru-
ment cluster display. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Dis-
play” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
3. At the next vehicle stop (after turning off the STOP/
START system) the engine will not be stopped.
4. The STOP/START system will reset itself back to an ON
condition every time the ignition is turned off and back
on.
To Manually Turn On The Stop/Start System
Push the STOP/START OFF switch (located on the switch
bank). The light on the switch will turn off.
System Malfunction
If there is a malfunction in the STOP/START system, the
system will not shut down the engine. A “SERVICE STOP/
START SYSTEM” message will appear in the instrument
cluster display. Refer to “Display” in “Getting To Know
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
If the “SERVICE STOP/START SYSTEM” message appears
in the instrument cluster display, have the system checked
by your authorized dealer.
STOP/START OFF Switch
262 STARTING AND OPERATING
SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
When engaged, the Speed Control takes over accelerator
operations at speeds greater than 25 mph (40 km/h).
The Speed Control buttons are located on the right side of
the steering wheel.
NOTE:
• In order to ensure proper operation, the Speed Control
System has been designed to shut down if multiple
speed control functions are operated at the same time. If
this occurs, the Speed Control System can be reactivated
by pushing the Speed Control on/off button and reset-
ting the desired vehicle set speed.
WARNING!
Speed Control can be dangerous where the system
cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could
go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose
control and have an accident. Do not use Speed Control
in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding, icy,
snow-covered or slippery.
To Activate
Push the On/Off button to activate the Speed Control. The
cruise indicator light in the instrument cluster display will
illuminate. To turn the system off, push the On/Off button
a second time. The cruise indicator light will turn off. The
system should be turned off when not in use.
Speed Control Buttons
1 — On/Off
2 — SET (+)/Accel
3 — RES/Resume
4 — SET (-)/Decel
5 — CANC/Cancel
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 263
WARNING!
Leaving the Speed Control system on when not in use
is dangerous. You could accidentally set the system or
cause it to go faster than you want. You could lose
control and have an accident. Always leave the system
off when you are not using it.
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Speed Control on.
NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed
and on level ground before pushing the SET (+) or SET (-)
button.
When the vehicle has reached the desired speed, push the
SET (+) or SET (-) button and release. Release the accelera-
tor and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed
When the Speed Control is set, you can increase speed by
pushing the SET (+) button.
The driver’s preferred units can be selected through the
instrument panel settings. Refer to “Instrument Cluster
Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for
more information. The speed increment shown is depen-
dent on the chosen speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric
(km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET (+) button once will result ina1mph
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in an increase of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase until the button is released, then the
new set speed will be established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in a 1 km/h
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in an increase of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase until the button is released, then the
new set speed will be established.
264 STARTING AND OPERATING
To Decrease Speed
When the Speed Control is set, you can decrease speed by
pushing the SET (-) button.
The driver’s preferred units can be selected through the
instrument panel settings. Refer to “Instrument Cluster
Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for
more information. The speed increment shown is depen-
dent on the chosen speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric
(km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 mph
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in a decrease of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease until the button is released, then the
new set speed will be established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 km/h
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease until the button is released, then the
new set speed will be established.
To Accelerate For Passing
Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES button and
release. Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph
(32 km/h).
To Deactivate
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANC (cancel)
button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the vehicle
will deactivate the speed control without erasing the set
speed from memory.
Pushing the on/off button or cycling the ignition to OFF,
erases the set speed from memory.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 265
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) — IF
EQUIPPED
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) increases the driving con-
venience provided by cruise control while traveling on
highways and major roadways. However, it is not a safety
system and not designed to prevent collisions. Speed
Control function performs differently. Please refer to the
proper section within this chapter.
ACC will allow you to keep cruise control engaged in light
to moderate traffic conditions without the constant need to
reset your cruise control. ACC utilizes a radar sensor and a
forward facing camera designed to detect a vehicle directly
ahead of you.
NOTE:
• If the sensor does not detect a vehicle ahead of you, ACC
will maintain a fixed set speed.
• If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead, ACC will
apply limited braking or acceleration (not to exceed the
original set speed) automatically to maintain a preset
following distance, while matching the speed of the
vehicle ahead.
The Cruise Control system has two control modes:
• Adaptive Cruise Control mode for maintaining an ap-
propriate distance between vehicles.
• Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode for cruising
at a constant preset speed. For additional information,
refer to “Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode” in
this section.
NOTE: Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control will not react
to preceding vehicles. Always be aware of the mode
selected.
You can change the mode by using the cruise control
buttons. The two control modes function differently. Al-
ways confirm which mode is selected.
266 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
• Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a convenience
system. It is not a substitute for active driving
involvement. It is always the driver’s responsibility
to be attentive of road, traffic, and weather condi-
tions, vehicle speed, distance to the vehicle ahead;
and, most importantly, brake operation to ensure safe
operation of the vehicle under all road conditions.
Your complete attention is always required while
driving to maintain safe control of your vehicle.
Failure to follow these warnings can result in a
collision and death or serious personal injury.
• The ACC system:
• Does not react to pedestrians, oncoming vehicles,
and stationary objects (e.g., a stopped vehicle in a
traffic jam or a disabled vehicle).
• Cannot take street, traffic, and weather conditions
into account, and may be limited upon adverse
sight distance conditions.
• Does not always fully recognize complex driving
conditions, which can result in wrong or missing
distance warnings.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• In vehicles with automatic transmission, will bring
the vehicle to a complete stop while following a
target vehicle and hold the vehicle for approxi-
mately three minutes in the stop position. If the
target vehicle does not start moving within three
minutes, the parking brake will be activated and
the ACC system will be canceled.
You should turn the ACC system off:
• When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy snow, sleet,
heavy traffic, and complex driving situations (i.e., in
highway construction zones).
• When entering a turn lane or highway off ramp;
when driving on roads that are winding, icy, snow-
covered, slippery, or have steep uphill or downhill
slopes.
• When towing a trailer up or down steep slopes.
• When circumstances do not allow safe driving at a
constant speed.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 267
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation
The speed control buttons (located on the right side of the
steering wheel) operate the ACC system.
NOTE: Any chassis/suspension or tire size modifications
to the vehicle will effect the performance of the Adaptive
Cruise Control and Forward Collision Warning System.
To Activate/Deactivate
Push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
on/off button. The ACC menu in the instrument cluster
display will read “ACC Ready.”
To turn the system off, push and release the Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button again. At this time, the
system will turn off and the instrument cluster display will
read “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
Speed Control Buttons
1 — CANC/Cancel
2 — Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control On/Off
3 — SET (+)/Accel
4 — RES/Resume
5 — SET (-)/Decel
6 — Distance Setting — Increase
7 — Distance Setting — Decrease
8 — Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) On/Off
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
268 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have a collision. Always
leave the system off when you are not using it.
Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
You can only engage ACC if the vehicle speed is above
0 mph (0 km/h).
The minimum set speed for the ACC system is 20 mph
(32 km/h).
When the system is turned on and in the ready state, the
instrument cluster display will read “ACC Ready.”
When the system is off, the instrument cluster display will
read “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
NOTE: You cannot engage ACC under the following con-
ditions:
• When in Four-Wheel Drive Low.
• When you apply the brakes.
• When the parking brake is applied.
• When the automatic transmission is in PARK, REVERSE
or NEUTRAL.
• When the vehicle speed is outside of the speed range.
• When the brakes are overheated.
• When the driver door is open at low speeds.
• When the driver seat belt is unbuckled at low speeds.
• When driver switches ESC to full-off mode.
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 269
To Set A Desired ACC Speed
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, push the SET
(+) button or the SET (-) button and release. The instrument
cluster display will show the set speed.
If the system is set when the vehicle speed is below 20 mph
(32 km/h), the set speed shall be defaulted to 20 mph
(32 km/h). If the system is set when the vehicle speed is
above 20 mph (32 km/h), the set speed shall be the current
speed of the vehicle.
NOTE: ACC cannot be set if there is a stationary vehicle in
front of your vehicle in close proximity.
Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. If you do not,
the vehicle may continue to accelerate beyond the set
speed. If this occurs:
• The message “DRIVER OVERRIDE” will display in the
instrument cluster display.
• The system will not be controlling the distance between
your vehicle and the vehicle ahead. The vehicle speed
will only be determined by the position of the accelera-
tor pedal.
To Cancel
The following conditions cancel the system:
• The brake pedal is applied.
• The CANC button is pushed.
• An Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) event occurs.
• The gear selector is removed from the Drive position.
• The braking temperature exceeds normal range (over-
heated).
• The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control Sys-
tem (ESC/TCS) activates.
• The vehicle parking brake is applied.
• Driver seatbelt is unbuckled at low speeds.
• Driver door is opened at low speeds.
• The driver switches ESC to full-off mode.
• Manual transmission is not in a forward gear, if
equipped.
• Manual transmission is in NEUTRAL or clutch pressed
down for a fixed amount of time, if equipped.
• Manual transmission vehicle speed drops below 15 mph
(24 km/h), if equipped.
270 STARTING AND OPERATING
To Turn Off
The system will turn off and clear the set speed in memory if:
• The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button is
pushed.
• The Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control on/off button
is pushed.
• The ignition is turned OFF.
• You switch to Four-Wheel Drive Low.
To Resume
If there is a set speed in the memory, push the RES button
and then remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. The
instrument cluster display will show the last set speed.
WARNING!
The Resume function should only be used if traffic
and road conditions permit. Resuming a set speed that
is too high or too low for prevailing traffic and road
conditions could cause the vehicle to accelerate or
decelerate too sharply for safe operation. Failure to
follow these warnings can result in a collision and
death or serious personal injury.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed
While ACC is set, you can increase the set speed by
pushing the SET (+) button.
The driver’s preferred units can be selected through the
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Getting To
Know Your Instrument Panel” for more information. The
speed increment shown is dependant on the chosen speed
unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET (+) button once will result ina1mph
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in an increase of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase in 5 mph increments until the
button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected
in the instrument cluster display.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in a 1 km/h
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in an increase of 1 km/h.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 271
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase in 10 km/h increments until the
button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected
in the instrument cluster display.
To Decrease Speed
While ACC is set, the set speed can be decreased by
pushing the SET (-) button.
The driver’s preferred units can be selected through the
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Getting To
Know Your Instrument Panel” for more information. The
speed decrement shown is dependant on the chosen speed
unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 mph
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in a decrease of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease in 5 mph decrements until the
button is released. The decrease in set speed is reflected
in the instrument cluster display.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 km/h
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease in 10 km/h decrements until the
button is released. The decrease in set speed is reflected
in the instrument cluster display.
NOTE:
• When you override and push the SET (+) button or SET
(-) buttons, the new set speed will be the current speed
of the vehicle.
• When you use the SET (-) button to decelerate, if the
engine’s braking power does not slow the vehicle suffi-
ciently to reach the set speed, the brake system will
automatically slow the vehicle.
• If equipped with a manual transmission, the ACC sys-
tem applies the brake down to 15 mph (24 km/h) when
following a target vehicle.
272 STARTING AND OPERATING
• If equipped with a automatic transmission, The ACC
system decelerates the vehicle to a full stop when
following a target vehicle. If an ACC host vehicle follows
a target vehicle to a standstill, after two seconds the
driver will either have to push the RES (resume) button,
or apply the accelerator pedal to reengage the ACC to
the existing set speed.
• The ACC system maintains set speed when driving up
hill and down hill. However, a slight speed change on
moderate hills is normal. In addition, downshifting may
occur while climbing uphill or descending downhill.
This is normal operation and necessary to maintain set
speed. When driving up hill and down hill, the ACC
system will cancel if the braking temperature exceeds
normal range (overheated).
Setting The Following Distance In ACC
The specified following distance for ACC can be set by
varying the distance setting between four bars (longest),
three bars (long), two bars (medium) and one bar (short).
Using this distance setting and the vehicle speed, ACC
calculates and sets the distance to the vehicle ahead. This
distance setting will show in the instrument cluster display.
Distance Setting 4 Bars (Longest)
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 273
Distance Setting 3 Bars (Long) Distance Setting 2 Bars (Medium)
274 STARTING AND OPERATING
To increase the distance setting, push the Distance Setting
— Increase button and release. Each time the button is
pushed, the distance setting increases by one bar (longer).
Once the longest setting is reached, if the button is pushed
again it will be set to the shortest setting available.
If there is no vehicle ahead, the vehicle will maintain the set
speed. If a slower moving vehicle is detected in the same
lane, the instrument cluster display will show the “Sensed
Vehicle Indicator” icon, and the system adjusts vehicle
speed automatically to maintain the distance setting, re-
gardless of the set speed.
The vehicle will then maintain the set distance until:
• The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed above the set
speed.
• The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or view of the
sensor.
• The distance setting is changed.
• The system disengages. (Refer to the information on
ACC Activation).
The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited; how-
ever, the driver can always apply the brakes manually, if
necessary.
NOTE: The brake lights will illuminate whenever the ACC
system applies the brakes.
A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC predicts
that its maximum braking level is not sufficient to maintain
the set distance. If this occurs, a visual alert “BRAKE” will
flash in the instrument cluster display and a chime will
sound while ACC continues to apply its maximum braking
capacity.
Distance Setting 1 Bar (Short)
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 275
NOTE: The “Brake!” Screen in the instrument cluster
display is a warning for the driver to take action and does
not necessarily mean that the Forward Collision Warning
system is applying the brakes autonomously.
Overtake Aid
When driving with ACC engaged and following a vehicle,
the system will provide an additional acceleration up to the
ACC set speed to assist in passing the vehicle. This
additional acceleration is triggered when the driver utilizes
the left turn signal and will only be active when passing on
the left hand side.
ACC Operation At Stop
In the event that the ACC system brings your vehicle to a
standstill while following a target vehicle, if the target
vehicle starts moving within two seconds of your vehicle
coming to a standstill, your vehicle will resume motion
without the need for any driver action.
If the target vehicle does not start moving within two
seconds of your vehicle coming to a standstill, the driver
will either have to push the RES (resume) button, or apply
the accelerator pedal to reengage the ACC to the existing
Set Speed.
NOTE: After the ACC system holds your vehicle at a
standstill for approximately three consecutive minutes, the
parking brake will be activated, and the ACC system will
be cancelled.
While ACC is holding your vehicle at a standstill, if the
driver seatbelt is unbuckled or the driver door is opened,
the parking brake will be activated, and the ACC system
will be cancelled.
Brake Alert
276 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
When the ACC system is resumed, the driver must
ensure that there are no pedestrians, vehicles or objects
in the path of the vehicle. Failure to follow these
warnings can result in a collision and death or serious
personal injury.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu
The instrument cluster display shows the current ACC
system settings. The instrument cluster display is located
in the center of the instrument cluster. The information it
displays depends on ACC system status.
Push the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button
(located on the steering wheel) until one of the following
shows in the instrument cluster display:
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read “Adaptive
Cruise Control Off.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed setting has
not been selected, the display will read “Adaptive Cruise
Control Ready.”
Push the SET (+) or the SET (-) button (located on the
steering wheel) and the following will read in the instru-
ment cluster display:
ACC SET
When ACC is set, the set speed will appear in the instru-
ment cluster display.
The ACC screen may display once again if any ACC
activity occurs, which may include any of the following:
• System Cancel
• Driver Override
• System Off
• ACC Proximity Warning
• ACC Unavailable Warning
• The instrument cluster display will return to the last
display selected after five seconds of no ACC display
activity
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 277
Display Warnings And Maintenance
“Wipe Front Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle”
Warning
The “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
warning will display and also a chime will indicate when
conditions temporarily limit system performance.
This most often occurs at times of poor visibility, such as in
snow or heavy rain. The ACC system may also become
temporarily blinded due to obstructions, such as mud, dirt
or ice. In these cases, the instrument cluster display will
read “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
and the system will deactivate.
The “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
message can sometimes be displayed while driving in
highly reflective areas (i.e. tunnels with reflective tiles, or
ice and snow). The ACC system will recover after the
vehicle has left these areas. Under rare conditions, when
the radar is not tracking any vehicles or objects in its path
this warning may temporarily occur.
NOTE: If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
Sensor” warning is active Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise
Control is still available. For additional information refer to
“Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode” in this
section.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should
examine the sensor. It may require cleaning or removal of
an obstruction. The sensor is located in the center of the
vehicle behind the lower grille.
To keep the ACC System operating properly, it is important
to note the following maintenance items:
• Always keep the sensor clean. Carefully wipe the sensor
lens with a soft cloth. Be cautious not to damage the
sensor lens.
• Do not remove any screws from the sensor. Doing so
could cause an ACC system malfunction or failure and
require a sensor realignment.
• If the sensor or front end of the vehicle is damaged due
to a collision, see your authorized dealer for service.
• Do not attach or install any accessories near the sensor,
including transparent material or aftermarket grilles.
Doing so could cause an ACC system failure or malfunc-
tion.
278 STARTING AND OPERATING
When the condition that deactivated the system is no
longer present, the system will return to the “Adaptive
Cruise Control Off” state and will resume function by
simply reactivating it.
NOTE:
• If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sen-
sor” message occurs frequently (e.g. more than once on
every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or other
obstruction, have the radar sensor realigned at your
authorized dealer.
• Installing a snow plow, front-end protector, an aftermar-
ket grille or modifying the grille is not recommended.
Doing so may block the sensor and inhibit ACC/FCW
operation.
“Clean Front Windshield” Warning
The “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front Wind-
shield” warning will display and also a chime will indicate
when conditions temporarily limit system performance.
This most often occurs at times of poor visibility, such as in
snow or heavy rain and fog. The ACC system may also
become temporarily blinded due to obstructions, such as
mud, dirt, or ice on windshield and fog on the inside of
glass. In these cases, the instrument cluster display will
read “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front Wind-
shield” and the system will have degraded performance.
The “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front Wind-
shield” message can sometimes be displayed while driving
in adverse weather conditions. The ACC/FCW system will
recover after the vehicle has left these areas. Under rare
conditions, when the camera is not tracking any vehicles or
objects in its path this warning may temporarily occur.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should
examine the windshield and the camera located on the
back side of the inside rear view mirror. They may require
cleaning or removal of an obstruction.
When the condition that created limited functionality is no
longer present, the system will return to full functionality.
NOTE: If the “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean
Front Windshield” message occurs frequently (e.g. more
than once on every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or
other obstruction, have the windshield and forward facing
camera inspected at an authorized dealer.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 279
Service ACC/FCW Warning
If the system turns off, and the instrument cluster display
reads “ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required” or
“Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service Required”, there may
be an internal system fault or a temporary malfunction that
limits ACC functionality. Although the vehicle is still
drivable under normal conditions, ACC will be temporar-
ily unavailable. If this occurs, try activating ACC again
later, following an ignition cycle. If the problem persists,
see your authorized dealer.
Precautions While Driving With ACC
In certain driving situations, ACC may have detection
issues. In these cases, ACC may brake late or unexpectedly.
The driver needs to stay alert and may need to intervene.
Towing A Trailer
Towing a trailer is not advised when using ACC.
Offset Driving
ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane that is offset
from your direct line of travel, or a vehicle merging in from
a side lane. There may not be sufficient distance to the
vehicle ahead. The offset vehicle may move in and out of
the line of travel, which can cause your vehicle to brake or
accelerate unexpectedly.
Offset Driving Condition Example
280 STARTING AND OPERATING
Turns And Bends
When driving on a curve with ACC engaged, the system
may decrease the vehicle speed and acceleration for stabil-
ity reasons, with no target vehicle detected. Once the
vehicle is out of the curve the system will resume your
original set speed. This is a part of normal ACC system
functionality.
NOTE: On tight turns ACC performance may be limited.
Using ACC On Hills
When driving on hills, ACC may not detect a vehicle in
your lane. Depending on the speed, vehicle load, traffic
conditions, and the steepness of the hills, ACC perfor-
mance may be limited.
Turn Or Bend Example
ACC Hill Example
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 281
Lane Changing
ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the
lane in which you are traveling. In the illustration shown,
ACC has not yet detected the vehicle changing lanes and it
may not detect the vehicle until it’s too late for the ACC
system to take action. ACC may not detect a vehicle until it
is completely in the lane. There may not be sufficient
distance to the lane-changing vehicle. Always be attentive
and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
Narrow Vehicles
Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer edges of the
lane or edging into the lane are not detected until they have
moved fully into the lane. There may not be sufficient
distance to the vehicle ahead.
Lane Changing Example
Narrow Vehicle Example
282 STARTING AND OPERATING
Stationary Objects And Vehicles
ACC does not react to stationary objects and stationary
vehicles. For example, ACC will not react in situations
where the vehicle you are following exits your lane and the
vehicle ahead is stopped in your lane. Always be attentive
and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received, in-
cluding interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Changes or modifications to any of these systems by other
than an authorized service facility could void authorization
to use this equipment.
Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode
In addition to Adaptive Cruise Control mode, a Normal
(Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode is available for cruising
at fixed speeds. The Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control
mode is designed to maintain a set cruising speed without
requiring the driver to operate the accelerator. Speed
Control can only be operated if the vehicle speed is above
20 mph (32 km/h).
Stationary Object And Stationary Vehicle Example
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 283
To change between the different control modes, push the
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button which turns
the ACC on and the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control
off. Pushing of the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control
on/off button will result in turning on (changing to) the
Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode.
WARNING!
In the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode, the
system will not react to vehicles ahead. In addition, the
proximity warning does not activate and no alarm will
sound even if you are too close to the vehicle ahead
since neither the presence of the vehicle ahead nor the
vehicle-to-vehicle distance is detected. Be sure to main-
tain a safe distance between your vehicle and the
vehicle ahead. Always be aware which mode is se-
lected.
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control
on. When the vehicle has reached the desired
speed, push the SET (+) or SET (-) button and
release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle
will operate at the selected speed. Once a speed has been
set a message (CRUISE CONTROL SET TO MPH/km/h)
will appear indicating what speed was set. This light will
turn on when the speed control is set.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed
When the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control is set, you
can increase speed by pushing the SET (+) button.
The driver’s preferred units can be selected through the
instrument panel settings. Refer to ”Instrument Cluster
Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for
more information. The speed increment shown is depen-
dant on the speed of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h) units:
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET (+) button once will result ina1mph
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in an increase of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase in 5 mph increments until the
button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected
in the instrument cluster display.
284 STARTING AND OPERATING
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in a 1 km/h
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in an increase of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase in 10 km/h increments until the
button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected
in the instrument cluster display.
To Decrease Speed
When the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control is set, you
can decrease speed by pushing the SET (-) button.
The driver’s preferred units can be selected through the
instrument panel settings. Refer to ”Instrument Cluster
Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for
more information. The speed decrement shown is depen-
dant on the speed of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h) units:
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 mph
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in a decrease of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease in 5 mph decrements until the
button is released. The decrease in set speed is reflected
in the instrument cluster display.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 km/h
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease in 10 km/h decrements until the
button is released. The decrease in set speed is reflected
in the instrument cluster display.
To Cancel
The following conditions will cancel the Normal (Fixed
Speed) Cruise Control without clearing the memory:
• The brake pedal is applied.
• The CANC button is pushed.
• The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control Sys-
tem (ESC/TCS) activates.
• The vehicle parking brake is applied.
• The braking temperature exceeds normal range (over-
heated).
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 285
• The gear selector is removed from the DRIVE position.
• Manual transmission is not in a forward gear, if
equipped.
• Manual transmission is in NEUTRAL or clutch pressed
down, if equipped.
• The driver switches ESC to full-off mode.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES button and
release. Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph
(32 km/h).
To Turn Off
The system will turn off and erase the set speed in memory
if:
• The Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control on/off button
is pushed.
• The ignition is turned OFF.
• You engage Four-Wheel Drive Low.
• The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button is
pushed.
PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED
The ParkSense Rear Park Assist system provides visual and
audible indications of the distance between the rear fascia and
a detected obstacle when backing up, e.g. during a parking
maneuver. Refer to “ParkSense System Usage Precautions”
for limitations of this system and recommendations.
ParkSense will retain the last system state (enabled or
disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is
changed to the ON/RUN position.
ParkSense can be active only when the gear selector is in
REVERSE. The system will remain active until the vehicle
speed is increased to approximately 7 mph (11 km/h) or
above. While in REVERSE and above the system’s operat-
ing speed, a warning will appear in the instrument cluster
display indicating the vehicle speed is too fast. The system
will become active again if the vehicle speed is decreased to
speeds less than approximately 6 mph (9 km/h).
ParkSense Sensors
The four ParkSense sensors, located in the rear fascia/
bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is within
the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect obstacles
from approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to 79 inches (200
286 STARTING AND OPERATING
cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal direc-
tion, depending on the location, type and orientation of the
obstacle.
ParkSense Warning Display
The ParkSense Warning screen will only be displayed if
“Sound and Display” is selected from the Customer -
Programmable Features section of the Uconnect System.
Refer to ⬙Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further
information.
The ParkSense Warning screen is located within the instru-
ment cluster display. It provides visual warnings to indi-
cate the distance between the rear fascia/bumper and the
detected obstacle. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in
“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
ParkSense Display
When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the instrument cluster
display will show the park assist system status.
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing a
single arc in one or more regions based on the obstacle’s
distance and location relative to the vehicle.
If an obstacle is detected in the center rear region, the
display will show a single solid arc in the center rear region
As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the display will
show the single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the
audible chime increases as the objects gets close to the
vehicle.
If an obstacle is detected in the left and /or right rear
region, the display will show a single flashing arc in the left
and/or right rear region As the vehicle moves closer to the
obstacle, the display will show the single arc moving closer
to the vehicle and the audible chime increases as the objects
gets close to the vehicle.
Single 1/2 Second Tone/Solid Arc
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 287
Slow Tone/Solid Arc Slow Tone/Solid Arc
288 STARTING AND OPERATING
Fast Tone/Flashing Arc Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 289
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning
display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous
tone. The following chart shows the warning alert opera-
tion when the system is detecting an obstacle:
WARNING ALERTS
Rear Dis-
tance
(inches/cm)
Greater
than
79 inches
(200 cm)
79-59 inches
(200-150
cm)
59-47 inches
(150-120
cm)
47-39 inches
(120-100
cm)
39-25 inches
(100-65 cm)
25-12 inches
(65-30 cm)
Less than
12 inches
(30 cm)
Arcs — Left None None None None None 2nd Flash-
ing
1st Flashing
Arcs —
Center
None 6th Solid 5th Solid 4th Solid 3rd Flash-
ing
2nd Flash-
ing
1st Flashing
Arcs —
Right
None None None None None 2nd Flash-
ing
1st Flashing
Audible
Alert
Chime
None Single, 1/2
second, au-
dible chime
is heard.
Audible chime increases as the objects get close to the
vehicle.
Continuous
Radio Vol-
ume Re-
duced
No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
290 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio, if
on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense
ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with the
ParkSense switch, located on the switch panel
below the Uconnect display.
When the ParkSense switch is pushed to disable the
system, the instrument cluster display will show the
“PARKSENSE OFF” message for approximately five sec-
onds. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To
Know Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
When the gear selector is moved to REVERSE and the
system is disabled, the instrument cluster display will
show the “PARKSENSE OFF” message for as long as the
vehicle is in REVERSE.
The ParkSense switch LED will be on when ParkSense is
disabled or requires service. The ParkSense switch LED
will be off when the system is enabled. If the ParkSense
switch is pushed, and requires service, the ParkSense
switch LED will blink momentarily, and then the LED will
be on.
Service The ParkSense Rear Park Assist System
During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense Rear Park
Assist System has detected a faulted condition, the instru-
ment cluster display will actuate a single chime, once per
ignition cycle, and it will display the “PARKSENSE UN-
AVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS” or the “PARKSENSE
UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED” message. Refer to
“Instrument Cluster Display” for more information. Under
this condition, ParkSense will not operate.
If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS”
appears in the instrument cluster display make sure the
outer surface and the underside of the rear fascia/bumper
is clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other obstruc-
tion and then cycle the ignition. If the message continues to
appear, see your authorized dealer.
If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED”
appears in the instrument cluster display, see your autho-
rized dealer.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 291
Cleaning The ParkSense System
Clean the Rear Park Assist sensors with water, car wash
soap and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. In
washing stations, clean sensors quickly keeping the vapor
jet/high pressure washing nozzles at least 4 inches (10 cm)
from the sensors. Do not scratch or poke the sensors.
Otherwise, you could damage the sensors.
ParkSense System Usage Precautions
• Ensure that the rear bumper is free of snow, ice, mud,
dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense system operating
properly.
• Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could
affect the performance of ParkSense.
• When you turn ParkSense OFF, the instrument cluster
display will read “PARKSENSE OFF.” Furthermore,
once you turn ParkSense OFF, it remains off until you
turn it on again, even if you cycle the ignition.
• ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume of the radio
when it is sounding a tone.
• Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking care not to
scratch or damage them. The sensors must not be
covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris.
Failure to do so can result in the system not working
properly. The ParkSense system might not detect an
obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it could provide a
false indication that an obstacle is behind the fascia/
bumper.
• Use the ParkSense switch to turn the ParkSense system
OFF if objects such as bicycle carriers, etc. are attached to
the rear fascia/bumper. Failure to do so can result in the
system misinterpreting a close object as a sensor prob-
lem, causing the “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SER-
VICE REQUIRED” message to be displayed in the
instrument cluster display.
NOTE: If any objects are attached to the bumper within a
6.5ft (2 m) field of view, they will interfere and cause false
alerts and possibly blockage.
• The operation of the rear sensors is automatically deac-
tivated when the trailer’s electric plug is inserted in the
vehicle’s tow hook socket. The rear sensors are automati-
cally reactivated when the trailer’s cable plug is re-
moved.
292 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
• Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using ParkSense. Always check carefully behind
your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure to check
for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions,
and blind spots before backing up. You are respon-
sible for safety and must continue to pay attention to
your surroundings. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
• Before using ParkSense, it is strongly recommended
that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly is
disconnected from the vehicle when the vehicle is
not used for towing. Failure to do so can result in
injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles because the
hitch ball will be much closer to the obstacle than the
rear fascia when the loudspeaker sounds the con-
tinuous tone. Also, the sensors could detect the ball
mount and hitch ball assembly, depending on its size
and shape, giving a false indication that an obstacle
is behind the vehicle.
CAUTION!
• ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable to
recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles.
Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not
detected at all. Obstacles located above or below the
sensors will not be detected when they are in close
proximity.
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time when an
obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the
driver looks over his/her shoulder when using
ParkSense.
LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED
LaneSense Operation
The LaneSense system is operational at speeds above
37 mph (60 km/h) and below 112 mph (180 km/h). The
LaneSense system uses a forward looking camera to detect
lane markings and measure vehicle position within the
lane boundaries.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 293
When both lane markings are detected and the driver
unintentionally drifts out of the lane (no turn signal
applied), the LaneSense system provides a haptic warning
in the form of torque applied to the steering wheel, as well
as a visual warning in the instrument cluster display, to
prompt the driver to remain within the lane boundaries.
The driver may manually override the haptic warning by
applying torque into the steering wheel at any time.
When only a single lane marking is detected and the driver
unintentionally drifts across the lane marking (no turn
signal applied), the LaneSense system provides a visual
warning through the instrument cluster display to prompt
the driver to remain within the lane. When only a single
lane marking is detected, a haptic (torque) warning will not
be provided.
NOTE: When operating conditions have been met, the
LaneSense system will monitor if the driver’s hands are on
the steering wheel and provide an audible and visual
warning to the driver when the driver’s hands are not
detected on the steering wheel. The system will cancel if
the driver does not return their hands to the wheel.
Turning LaneSense On Or Off
The default status of LaneSense is “Off”.
The LaneSense button is located on the switch
panel below the Uconnect display.
To turn the LaneSense system on, push the LaneSense
button to turn the system on (LED turns off). A “Lane Sense
On” message is shown in the instrument cluster display.
To turn the LaneSense system off, push the LaneSense
button once to turn the system off (LED turns on).
Lane Sense On Message
294 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: The LaneSense system will retain the last system
state on or off from the last ignition cycle when the ignition
is changed to the ON/RUN position.
LaneSense Warning Message
The LaneSense system will indicate the current lane drift
condition through the instrument cluster display.
Base Instrument Cluster Display — If Equipped
When the LaneSense system is on; the lane lines are gray
when both of the lane boundaries have not been detected
and the LaneSense telltale
is solid white.
Left Lane Departure — Only Left Lane Detected
• When the LaneSense system is on, the LaneSense telltale
is solid white when only the left lane marking has
been detected and the system is ready to provide
visual warnings in the instrument cluster display if an
unintentional lane departure occurs.
• When the LaneSense system senses the lane has been
approached and is in a lane departure situation, the left
thick lane line flashes from white to gray, the left thin
line remains solid white and the LaneSense telltale
changes from solid white to flashing yellow.
System On (Gray Lines/White Telltale )
Lane Approached (Flashing White To Gray Thick
Line/Flashing Yellow Telltale
)
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 295
NOTE: The LaneSense system operates with the similar
behavior for a right lane departure when only the right
lane marking has been detected.
Left Lane Departure — Both Lanes Detected
• When the LaneSense system is on, the lane lines turn
from gray to white to indicate that both of the lane
markings have been detected. The LaneSense telltale
is solid green when both lane markings have been
detected and the system is “armed” to provide visual
warnings in the instrument cluster display and a
torque warning in the steering wheel if an uninten-
tional lane departure occurs.
• When the LaneSense system senses a lane drift situation,
the left thick lane line and the left thin line turn solid
white. The LaneSense telltale
changes from solid
green to solid yellow. At this time torque is applied to
the steering wheel in the opposite direction of the
lane boundary.
• For example: if approaching the left side of the lane the
steering wheel will turn to the right.
Lanes Sensed (White Lines/Green Telltale )
Lane Sensed (Solid White Thick Line, Solid White Thin
Line/Solid Yellow Telltale
)
296 STARTING AND OPERATING
• When the LaneSense system senses the lane has been
approached and is in a lane departure situation, the left
thick lane line flashes from white to gray, the left thin
line remains solid white and the LaneSense telltale
changes from solid yellow to flashing yellow. At
this time torque is applied to the steering wheel in the
opposite direction of the lane boundary.
• For example: if approaching the left side of the lane the
steering wheel will turn to the right.
NOTE: The LaneSense system operates with the similar
behavior for a right lane departure.
Premium Instrument Cluster Display — If Equipped
When the LaneSense system is on; the lane lines are gray
when both of the lane boundaries have not been detected
and the LaneSense telltale
is solid white.
Left Lane Departure — Only Left Lane Detected
• When the LaneSense system is on, the LaneSense telltale
is solid white when only the left lane marking has
been detected and the system is ready to provide
visual warnings in the instrument cluster display if an
unintentional lane departure occurs.
Lane Approached (Flashing White To Gray Thick Line,
Solid White Thin Line/Flashing Yellow Telltale
)
System On (Gray Lines/White Telltale )
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 297
• When the LaneSense system senses the lane has been
approached and is in a lane departure situation, the left
thick lane line flashes yellow, the left thin line remains
solid yellow and the LaneSense telltale
changes from
solid white to flashing yellow.
NOTE: The LaneSense system operates with the similar
behavior for a right lane departure when only the right
lane marking has been detected.
Left Lane Departure — Both Lanes Detected
• When the LaneSense system is on, the lane lines turn
from gray to white to indicate that both of the lane
markings have been detected. The LaneSense telltale
is solid green when both lane markings have been
detected and the system is “armed” to provide visual
warnings in the instrument cluster display and a
torque warning in the steering wheel if an uninten-
tional lane departure occurs.
Lane Approached (Flashing Yellow Thick Line, Solid
Yellow Thin Line/Flashing Yellow Telltale
)
Lanes Sensed (White Lines/Green Telltale )
298 STARTING AND OPERATING
• When the LaneSense system senses a lane drift situation,
the left thick lane line and left thin line turn solid yellow.
The LaneSense telltale
changes from solid green to
solid yellow. At this time torque is applied to the
steering wheel in the opposite direction of the lane
boundary.
• For example: if approaching the left side of the lane the
steering wheel will turn to the right.
• When the LaneSense system senses the lane has been
approached and is in a lane departure situation, the left
thick lane line flashes yellow and the left thin line
remains solid yellow. The LaneSense telltale
stays
solid yellow. At this time torque is applied to the
steering wheel in the opposite direction of the lane
boundary.
• For example: if approaching the left side of the lane the
steering wheel will turn to the right.
NOTE: The LaneSense system operates with the similar
behavior for a right lane departure.
Lane Sensed (Solid Yellow Thick Line, Solid Yellow Thin
Line/Solid Yellow Telltale
)
Lane Approached (Flashing Yellow Thick Line, Solid
Yellow Thin Line/Solid Yellow Telltale
)
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 299
Changing LaneSense Status
The LaneSense system has settings to adjust the intensity of
the torque warning (Low/Medium/High) and the warn-
ing zone sensitivity (Early/Medium/Late) that you can
configure through the Uconnect system screen. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further informa-
tion.
NOTE:
• The system will not apply torque to the steering wheel
whenever a safety system engages (anti-lock brakes,
traction control system, electronic stability control, for-
ward collision warning, etc.).
• Use of the turn signals and Hazard Warning flashers also
suppresses the warnings.
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA
The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera allows you to see an
on-screen image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle
whenever the gear selector is put into REVERSE. The
image will be displayed in the touchscreen display along
with a caution note to “check entire surroundings” across
the top of the screen. After five seconds this note will
disappear. The ParkView camera is located on the rear of
the vehicle above the rear license plate.
NOTE: The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera has program-
mable modes of operation that may be selected through the
Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multi-
media” for further information.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera
delay turned off), the rear camera mode is exited and the
previous screen appears again. When the vehicle is shifted
out of REVERSE (with camera delay turned on), the camera
image will continue to be displayed for up to 10 seconds
after shifting out of REVERSE unless the vehicle speed
exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the vehicle is shifted into PARK
or the vehicles ignition is switched to the OFF position.
NOTE: With Camera Delay turned on, the camera image
can be disabled via the Image Defeat (X) button on the
touch screen when the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE.
When enabled, active guide lines are overlaid on the image
to illustrate the width of the vehicle and its projected
backup path based on the steering wheel position. A
dashed center line overlay indicates the center of the
vehicle to assist with parking or aligning to a hitch/
receiver.
Different colored zones indicate the distance to the rear of
the vehicle.
300 STARTING AND OPERATING
The following table shows the approximate distances for
each zone:
Zone Distance To The Rear Of The Vehicle
Red 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
Yellow 1 ft - 6.5 ft (30 cm - 2 m)
Green 6.5 ft or greater (2 m or greater)
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera. Always
check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to
check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstruc-
tions, or blind spots before backing up. You are re-
sponsible for the safety of your surroundings and must
continue to pay attention while backing up. Failure to
do so can result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
• To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should only be
used as a parking aid. The ParkView camera is
unable to view every obstacle or object in your drive
path.
• To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be driven
slowly when using ParkView to be able to stop in
time when an obstacle is seen. It is recommended
that the driver look frequently over his/her shoulder
when using ParkView.
NOTE: If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds
up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water, and
dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 301
REFUELING THE VEHICLE
The Capless Fuel System uses a flapper placed at the filler
pipe of the fuel tank; it opens and closes automatically
upon insertion/extraction of the fuel nozzle. The Capless
Fuel System is designed so that it prevents the filling of an
incorrect type of fuel.
1. Open the fuel filler door by pushing on the outer edge of
the Fuel Door.
2. There is no fuel filler cap. A flapper door inside the pipe
seals the system.
3. Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the filler pipe; the nozzle
opens and holds the flapper door while refueling.
4. Fill the vehicle with fuel, and when the fuel nozzle
“clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank is full.
5. Wait ten seconds before removing the fuel nozzle to
allow fuel to drain from nozzle.
6. Remove the fuel nozzle and close the fuel door.
Fuel Filler Door
Filling Procedure
302 STARTING AND OPERATING
Emergency Gas Can Refueling
Most gas cans will not open the flapper door. A funnel is
provided to open the flapper door to allow emergency
refueling with a gas can.
1. Retrieve funnel from the spare tire storage area.
2. Insert funnel into same filler pipe opening as the fuel
nozzle.
3. Ensure funnel is inserted fully to hold flapper door
open.
4. Pour fuel into funnel opening.
5. Remove funnel from filler pipe, clean off prior to putting
back in the spare tire storage area.
NOTE:
• When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank
is full.
WARNING!
• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the
vehicle when the fuel door is open or the tank is
being filled.
• Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is
in violation of most state and federal fire regulations
and may cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light” to
turn on.
• A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a portable
container that is inside of a vehicle. You could be
burned. Always place fuel containers on the ground
while filling.
Fuel Funnel
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 303
VEHICLE LOADING
Certification Label
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Adminis-
tration regulations, your vehicle has a certification label
affixed to the driver’s side door or pillar.
This label contains the month and year of manufacture,
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) front and rear, and Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN). A Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number is
included on this label and indicates the Month, Day and
Hour of manufacture. The bar code that appears on the
bottom of the label is your VIN.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
including driver, passengers, vehicle, options and cargo.
The label also specifies maximum capacities of front and
rear axle systems (GAWR). Total load must be limited so
GVWR and front and rear GAWR are not exceeded.
Payload
The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable load
weight a truck can carry, including the weight of the driver,
all passengers, options and cargo.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the front
and rear axles. The load must be distributed in the cargo
area so that the GAWR of each axle is not exceeded.
Each axle GAWR is determined by the components in the
system with the lowest load carrying capacity (axle,
springs, tires or wheels). Heavier axles or suspension
components sometimes specified by purchasers for in-
creased durability does not necessarily increase the vehi-
cle’s GVWR.
Tire Size
The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label represents
the actual tire size on your vehicle. Replacement tires must
be equal to the load capacity of this tire size.
Rim Size
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size
listed.
Inflation Pressure
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for
all loading conditions up to full GAWR.
304 STARTING AND OPERATING
Curb Weight
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight
of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full
capacity conditions, and with no occupants or cargo loaded
into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight values are
determined by weighing your vehicle on a commercial
scale before any occupants or cargo are added.
Loading
The actual total weight and the weight of the front and rear
of your vehicle at the ground can best be determined by
weighing it when it is loaded and ready for operation.
The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commercial
scale to insure that the GVWR has not been exceeded. The
weight on the front and rear of the vehicle should then be
determined separately to be sure that the load is properly
distributed over the front and rear axle. Weighing the
vehicle may show that the GAWR of either the front or rear
axles has been exceeded but the total load is within the
specified GVWR. If so, weight must be shifted from front to
rear or rear to front as appropriate until the specified
weight limitations are met. Store the heavier items down
low and be sure that the weight is distributed equally. Stow
all loose items securely before driving.
Improper weight distributions can have an adverse effect
on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way
the brakes operate.
CAUTION!
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR
or the maximum front and rear GAWR. If you do, parts
on your vehicle can break, or it can change the way
your vehicle handles. This could cause you to lose
control. Also overloading can shorten the life of your
vehicle.
TRAILER TOWING
In this section you will find safety tips and information on
limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do with
your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully review this
information to tow your load as efficiently and safely as
possible.
To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage,
follow the requirements and recommendations in this
manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 305
Common Towing Definitions
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
you in understanding the following information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue weight.
The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed
the GVWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certification
Label” in “Starting And Operating” for further informa-
tion.
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all
cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or tempo-
rary) loaded in or on the trailer in its ⬙loaded and ready for
operation⬙ condition.
The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your
fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight of
the trailer must be supported by the scale.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
rear GAWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certifica-
tion Label” in “Starting And Operating” for further infor-
mation.
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition
can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have a collision.
Tongue Weight (TW)
The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the
hitch ball by the trailer. You must consider this as part of
the load on your vehicle.
Trailer Frontal Area
The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the
maximum width of the front of a trailer.
306 STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer Sway Control
The trailer sway control can be a mechanical telescoping
link that can be installed between the hitch receiver and the
trailer tongue that typically provides adjustable friction
associated with the telescoping motion to dampen any
unwanted trailer swaying motions while traveling.
If equipped, the electronic Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
recognizes a swaying trailer and automatically applies
individual wheel brakes and/or reduces engine power to
attempt to eliminate the trailer sway.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue weight,
just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or some
other connecting point of the vehicle. These kinds of
hitches are the most popular on the market today and they
are commonly used to tow small and medium sized
trailers.
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A weight-distributing system works by applying leverage
through spring (load) bars. They are typically used for
heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the tow
vehicle’s front axle and the trailer axle(s). When used in
accordance with the manufacturer’s directions, it provides
for a more level ride, offering more consistent steering and
brake control thereby enhancing towing safety. The addi-
tion of a friction/hydraulic sway control also dampens
sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and contributes
positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability. Trailer sway
control and a weight distributing (load equalizing) hitch
are recommended for heavier Tongue Weights (TW) and
may be required depending on vehicle and trailer
configuration/loading to comply with Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) requirements.
WARNING!
• An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing Hitch
system may reduce handling, stability, braking per-
formance, and could result in a collision.
• Weight Distributing Systems may not be compatible
with Surge Brake Couplers. Consult with your hitch
and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Recreational
Vehicle dealer for additional information.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 307
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)
Engine/Transmission Model
Maximum GTW
(Gross Trailer Wt.)
Maximum Tongue Wt.
(See Note)
2.4L / Manual FWD or 4WD Trailer towing is not recommended.
2.4L / 6 Speed Auto FWD or 4WD Trailer towing is not recommended.
2.4L / 9 Speed Auto 4WD 2000 lbs (907 kg) 200 lbs (90 kg)
When towing a trailer the technically permissible laden weight may be exceeded by not more than 10% or 220 lbs
(100 kg), whichever is lower provided that the operating speed is restricted to 62 mph (100 km/h) or less.
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds and loads.
Towing limits quoted represent the maximum towing ability of the vehicle at its Gross Combined Mass to restart on a
12 percent gradient at sea level.
The performance and economy of all models will be reduced when used for towing.
308 STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer And Tongue Weight
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on
your trailer hitch.
Consider the following items when computing the weight
on the front/rear axles of the vehicle:
• The trailer tongue weight of the trailer.
• The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment put
in or on your vehicle.
• The weight of the driver and all passengers.
NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options, or authorized dealer-installed
options, must be considered as part of the total load on
your vehicle. Refer to the tire loading information placard
located on the driver’s door pillar for the maximum
combined weight of occupants and cargo for your vehicle.
Towing Requirements
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drivetrain
components, the following guidelines are recommended.
CAUTION!
• Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine, axle
or other parts could be damaged.
•
Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a trailer is
towed, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h) and do not
make starts at full throttle. This helps the engine and
other parts of the vehicle wear in at the heavier loads.
Perform the maintenance listed in the “Scheduled Servic-
ing”. Refer to “Scheduled Servicing” in “Servicing And
Maintenance” for the proper maintenance intervals. When
towing a trailer, never exceed the GAWR or GCWR ratings.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 309
WARNING!
Improper towing can lead to a collision. Follow these
guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as
possible:
• Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
and will not shift during travel. When trailering
cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts
can occur that may be difficult for the driver to
control. You could lose control of your vehicle and
have a collision.
• When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not
overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can
cause a loss of control, poor performance or damage
to brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering, sus-
pension, chassis structure or tires.
• Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to the
hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross the chains
under the trailer tongue and allow enough slack for
turning corners.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a
grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on the
tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle transmission in
PARK. For four-wheel drive vehicles, make sure the
transfer case is not in NEUTRAL. Always, block or
ⴖchockⴖ the trailer wheels.
• GCWR must not be exceeded.
• Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
ratings are not exceeded:
1. GVWR
2. GTW
3. GAWR
4. Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized.
Towing Requirements — Tires
• Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact
spare tire.
• Do not drive more than 50 mph (80 km/h) when towing
while using a full size spare tire.
310 STARTING AND OPERATING
• Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to
“Tires” in “Servicing And Maintenance” for proper tire
inflation procedures.
• Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pressures
before trailer usage.
• Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage before
towing a trailer. Refer to “Tires” in “Servicing And
Maintenance” for the proper inspection procedure.
• When replacing tires, refer to “Tires” in “Servicing And
Maintenance” for the proper tire replacement proce-
dures. Replacing tires with a higher load carrying capac-
ity will not increase the vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR
limits.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
• Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.
This could cause inadequate braking and possible per-
sonal injury.
• An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
required when towing a trailer with electronically actu-
ated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with a
hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic
brake controller is not required.
• Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over
1,000 lbs (453 kg) and required for trailers in excess of
2,000 lbs (907 kg).
WARNING!
• Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s hy-
draulic brake lines. It can overload your brake sys-
tem and cause it to fail. You might not have brakes
when you need them and could have an accident.
• Towing any trailer will increase your stopping dis-
tance. When towing, you should allow for additional
space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front
of you. Failure to do so could result in an accident.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 311
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (453 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they should
be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this could lead to
accelerated brake lining wear, higher brake pedal
effort, and longer stopping distances.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights And Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
stoplights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and seven-pin
wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer harness and
connector.
NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicle’s wiring
harness.
The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle
but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector. Refer
to the following illustrations.
NOTE:
• Disconnect trailer wiring connector from the vehicle
before launching a boat (or any other device plugged
into vehicle’s electrical connect) into water.
• Be sure to reconnect once clear from water area.
Four-Pin Connector
1 — Female Pins 4 — Park
2 — Male Pin 5 — Left Stop/Turn
3 — Ground 6 — Right Stop/Turn
312 STARTING AND OPERATING
Towing Tips
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping, and
backing up the trailer in an area located away from heavy
traffic.
Automatic Transmission
Select the DRIVE range when towing. The transmission
controls include a drive strategy to avoid frequent shifting
when towing. For increased engine braking on steep down-
hill grades, select the LOW range.
Speed Control — If Equipped
• Do not use on hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
• When using the speed control, if you experience speed
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until
you can get back to cruising speed.
• Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to
maximize fuel efficiency.
Cooling System
To reduce potential for engine and transmission overheat-
ing, take the following actions:
City Driving
• In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission in
NEUTRAL, but do not increase engine idle speed.
Highway Driving
• Reduce speed.
• Temporarily turn off air conditioning.
Seven-Pin Connector
1 — Battery 5 — Ground
2 — Backup Lamps 6 — Left Stop/Turn
3 — Right Stop/Turn 7 — Running Lamps
4 — Electric Brakes
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 313
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME,
ETC.)
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
TOWING CONDITION
WHEELS OFF THE
GROUND
FRONT WHEEL DRIVE
(FWD)
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE
(4WD)
Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Dolly Tow REAR NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
FRONT OK NOT ALLOWED
On Trailer ALL BEST METHOD OK
NOTE:
• When towing your vehicle, always follow applicable
state and provincial laws. Contact state and provincial
Highway Safety offices for additional details.
• You must ensure that the Auto Park Brake feature is
disabled before towing this vehicle, to avoid inadvertent
Electric Park Brake engagement. The Auto Park Brake
feature is enabled or disabled via the customer program-
mable features in the Uconnect Settings.
Recreational Towing — Front-Wheel Drive (FWD)
Models
Recreational towing is allowed ONLY if the front wheels
are OFF the ground. This may be accomplished using a tow
dolly (front wheels off the ground) or vehicle trailer (all
four wheels off the ground). If using a tow dolly, follow this
procedure:
1. Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle, following
the dolly manufacturer’s instructions.
2. Drive the front wheels onto the tow dolly.
3. Apply the Electric Park Brake (EPB). Place the transmis-
sion in PARK. Turn the engine OFF.
314 STARTING AND OPERATING
4. Properly secure the front wheels to the dolly, following
the dolly manufacturer’s instructions.
5. Turn the ignition to the ON/RUN position, but do not
start the engine.
6. Press and hold the brake pedal.
7. Release the Electric Park Brake (EPB).
8. Turn the ignition OFF, remove the key fob, and release
the brake pedal.
CAUTION!
• Towing with the front wheels on the ground will
cause severe transmission damage. Damage from
improper towing is not covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is released, and
remains released, while being towed.
• Do not use a bumper mounted clamp-on tow bar on
your vehicle. The bumper face will be damaged.
Recreational Towing — 4X4 Models
Recreational towing (with all four wheels on the ground, or
using a towing dolly) is NOT ALLOWED. This vehicle may
be towed on flatbed or vehicle trailer provided all four
wheels are OFF the ground.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle with ANY of its wheels on the
ground can cause severe transmission and/or power
transfer unit damage. Damage from improper towing is
not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
DRIVING TIPS
On-Road Driving Tips
Utility vehicles have higher ground clearance and a nar-
rower track to make them capable of performing in a wide
variety of off-road applications. Specific design character-
istics give them a higher center of gravity than conven-
tional passenger cars.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 315
An advantage of the higher ground clearance is a better view
of the road, allowing you to anticipate problems. They are
not designed for cornering at the same speeds as conven-
tional passenger cars any more than low-slung sports cars
are designed to perform satisfactorily in off-road conditions.
Avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers. As with other
vehicles of this type, failure to operate this vehicle correctly
may result in loss of control or vehicle rollover.
Off-Road Driving Tips
When To Use 4WD LOW Range
When off-road driving, shift to 4WD LOW for additional
traction and control on slippery or difficult terrain, ascend-
ing or descending steep hills, and to increase low-speed
pulling power (refer to “Four-Wheel Drive Operation — If
Equipped” in this section for further details). This range
should be limited to extreme situations such as deep snow,
mud, or sand where additional low speed pulling power is
needed. Vehicle speeds in excess of 25 mph (40 km/h)
should be avoided when in 4WD LOW range.
Driving Through Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through water,
there are a number of precautions that must be considered
before entering the water:
CAUTION!
When driving through water, do not exceed 5 mph
(8 km/h). Always check water depth before entering as
a precaution, and check all fluids afterward. Driving
through water may cause damage that may not be
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Driving through water more than a few inches/centimeters
deep will require extra caution to ensure safety and pre-
vent damage to your vehicle. If you must drive through
water, try to determine the depth and the bottom condition
(and location of any obstacles) prior to entering. Proceed
with caution and maintain a steady controlled speed less
than 5 mph (8 km/h) in deep water to minimize wave
effects.
316 STARTING AND OPERATING
Flowing Water
If the water is swift flowing and rising (as in storm run-off)
avoid crossing until the water level recedes and/or the
flow rate is reduced. If you must cross flowing-water,
avoid depths in excess of 9 inches (22 cm). The flowing
water can erode the streambed causing your vehicle to sink
into deeper water. Determine exit point(s) that are down-
stream of your entry point to allow for drifting.
Standing Water
Avoid driving in standing water deeper than 16 inches
(40.5 cm), and reduce speed appropriately to minimize
wave effects. Maximum speed in 16 inches (40.5 cm) of
water is less than 5 mph (8 km/h).
(Trailhawk only): Avoid driving in standing water deeper
than 19 inches (48 cm), and reduce speed appropriately to
minimize wave effects. Maximum speed in 19 inches (48
cm) of water is less than 5 mph (8 km/h).
Maintenance
After driving through deep water, inspect your vehicle
fluids and lubricants (engine, transmission, Power Transfer
Unit, and Rear Drive Module) to assure they have not been
contaminated. Contaminated fluids and lubricants (milky,
foamy in appearance) should be flushed/changed as soon
as possible to prevent component damage.
Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand
In heavy snow, when pulling a load, or for additional
control at slower speeds, shift the transmission to a low
gear and shift the 4WD system to the appropriate terrain
mode, using 4WD LOW if necessary. Refer to “Four-Wheel
Drive Operation” in “Starting And Operating” for further
information. Do not shift to a lower gear than necessary to
maintain headway. Over-revving the engine can spin the
wheels and traction will be lost.
Avoid abrupt downshifts on icy or slippery roads because
engine braking may cause skidding and loss of control.
Hill Climbing
NOTE: Before attempting to climb a hill, determine the
conditions at the crest and/or on the other side.
Before climbing a steep hill, shift the transmission to a
lower gear and shift the 4WD System to 4WD LOW. Use
first gear and 4WD LOW for very steep hills.
NOTE: Brakes should be applied at increased slippage, but
before coming to a stop to avoid digging into the loose
surface and rendering the operator of the vehicle stuck/
immobile.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 317
If you stall or begin to lose headway while climbing a
steep hill, allow your vehicle to come to a stop and
immediately apply the brakes. Once stopped, shift to
REVERSE. Back slowly down the hill allowing the com-
pression braking of the engine to help regulate your speed.
If the brakes are required to control vehicle speed, apply
them lightly and avoid locking or skidding the tires.
WARNING!
If the engine stalls or you lose headway or cannot
make it to the top of a steep hill or grade, never attempt
to turn around. To do so may result in tipping and
rolling the vehicle. Always back straight down a hill in
REVERSE gear carefully. Never back down a hill in
NEUTRAL using only the brake.
NOTE: Remember, never drive diagonally across a hill -
drive straight up or down.
If the wheels start to slip as you approach the crest of a hill,
ease off the accelerator and maintain headway by turning
the front wheels slowly left and right. This may provide a
fresh “bite” into the surface and may provide traction to
complete the climb.
Traction Downhill
Shift the transmission into a low gear and the 4WD System
to 4WD LOW range or Select Hill Descent Control if
equipped (refer to ⬙Safety Features⬙ in the “Safety” section
for further information). Let the vehicle go slowly down
the hill with all four wheels turning against engine com-
pression drag. This will permit you to control the vehicle
speed and direction.
When descending mountains or hills, repeated braking can
cause brake fade with loss of braking control. Avoid
repeated heavy braking by downshifting the transmission
whenever possible.
After Driving Off-Road
Off-road operation puts more stress on your vehicle than
does most on-road driving. After going off-road, it is
always a good idea to check for damage.
• Completely inspect the underbody of your vehicle.
Check tires, body structure, steering, suspension, and
exhaust system for damage.
• Inspect the radiator for mud and debris and clean as
required.
318 STARTING AND OPERATING
• Check threaded fasteners for looseness, particularly on
the chassis, drivetrain components, steering, and sus-
pension. Retighten them, if required, and torque to the
values specified in the Service Manual.
• Check for accumulations of plants or brush. These things
could be a fire hazard. They might hide damage to fuel
lines, brake hoses, axle pinion seals, and propeller shafts.
• After extended operation in mud, sand, water, or similar
dirty conditions, have the radiator, fan, brake rotors,
wheels, brake linings, and axle yokes inspected and
cleaned as soon as possible.
WARNING!
Abrasive material in any part of the braking system
may cause excessive wear or unpredictable braking
performance. Full braking power may not be available
to prevent a collision. If you have been operating your
vehicle in dirty conditions, inspect and clean the
braking components as soon as possible.
• Impacted material can cause wheel imbalance. Freeing
the wheels of impacted material will likely rectify im-
balance condition.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 319
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
CONTENTS
䡵 HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS ............323
䡵 ASSIST AND SOS MIRROR — IF EQUIPPED . . . .323
䡵 BULB REPLACEMENT ....................329
▫ Replacement Bulbs ......................329
▫ High Intensity Discharge (HID) Headlamps —
If Equipped ...........................331
▫ Replacing Exterior Bulbs ..................331
▫ Replacing Interior Bulbs ..................337
䡵 FUSES ................................342
▫ General Information .....................343
▫ Fuse Location .........................344
▫ Engine Compartment Fuses/Distribution Unit . .344
▫ Interior Fuses .........................350
▫ Rear Cargo Fuse/Relay Distribution Unit ......352
䡵 JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING ...........354
▫ Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage ...........355
▫ Preparations For Jacking .................357
▫ Jacking Instructions .....................357
▫ Road Tire Installation ....................361
䡵 TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED ..........362
䡵 JUMP STARTING ........................374
▫ Preparations For Jump Start ...............374
▫ Jump Starting Procedure ..................375
䡵 REFUELING IN EMERGENCY...............377
䡵 IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS .............377
䡵 GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE ..............378
䡵 FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE ..............379
䡵 T
OWING A DISABLED VEHICLE ............381
7
▫ Without The Key Fob ....................382
▫ Front-Wheel Drive (FWD) Models — With Key
Fob.................................383
▫ 4x4 Models ...........................383
▫ Emergency Tow Hooks — If Equipped .......384
䡵 ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS) ...............................385
䡵 EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR) ............385
322 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located in the lower
center area of the instrument panel.
Push the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning
flasher. When the switch is activated, all direc-
tional turn signals will flash on and off to warn
oncoming traffic of an emergency. Push the
switch a second time to turn off the Hazard Warning
flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and it should not be
used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your
vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for
other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the
Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even
though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
NOTE: With extended use, the Hazard Warning flashers
may wear down your battery.
ASSIST AND SOS MIRROR — IF EQUIPPED
If equipped, the rearview mirror contains an ASSIST and a
SOS button.
Assist And SOS Mirror
1 — SOS Button
2 — ASSIST Button
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 323
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the
road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
steering wheel. You have full responsibility and as-
sume all risks related to the use of the features and
applications in this vehicle. Only use the features and
applications when it is safe to do so. Failure to do so
may result in an accident involving serious injury or
death.
NOTE:
• Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized by
the subscriber.
• The SOS and ASSIST buttons will only function if you
are connected to an operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G
(data) network. Other Uconnect services will only be
operable if your SiriusXM Guardian service is active and
you are connected to an operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G
(data) network.
ASSIST Call
The ASSIST Button is used to automatically connect you to
any one of the following support centers:
• Roadside Assistance – If you get a flat tire, or need a tow,
just push the ASSIST button and you will be connected
to a representative for assistance. Roadside Assistance
will know what vehicle you’re driving and its location.
Additional fees may apply for roadside assistance.
• SiriusXM Guardian Customer Care – In-vehicle support
for SiriusXM Guardian.
• Vehicle Customer Care – Total support for all other
vehicle issues.
SOS Call
1. Push the SOS Call button on the Rearview Mirror.
NOTE: In case the SOS Call button is pushed in error, there
will be a ten second delay before the SOS Call system
initiates a call to a SOS operator. To cancel the SOS Call
connection, push the SOS call button on the Rearview
Mirror or press the cancellation button on the Device
Screen. Termination of the SOS Call will turn off the green
LED light on the Rearview Mirror.
324 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
2. The LED light located between the ASSIST and SOS
buttons on the Rearview Mirror will turn green once a
connection to a SOS operator has been made.
3. Once a connection between the vehicle and a SOS
operator is made, the SOS Call system may transmit the
following important vehicle information to a SOS op-
erator:
• Indication that the occupant placed a SOS Call.
• The vehicle brand.
• The last known GPS coordinates of the vehicle.
4. You should be able to speak with the SOS operator
through the vehicle audio system to determine if addi-
tional assistance is needed.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the road.
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the steering
wheel. You have full responsibility and assume all risks
related to the use of the features and applications in this
vehicle. Only use the features and applications when it
is safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in an accident
involving serious injury or death.
NOTE:
• Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized
by the subscriber.
• Once a connection is made between the vehicle’s SOS
Call system and the SOS operator, the SOS operator
may be able to open a voice connection with the
vehicle to determine if additional assistance is needed.
Once the SOS operator opens a voice connection with
the vehicle’s SOS Call system, the operator should be
able to speak with you or other vehicle occupants and
hear sounds occurring in the vehicle. The vehicle’s
SOS Call system will attempt to remain connected
with the SOS operator until the SOS operator termi-
nates the connection.
5. The SOS operator may attempt to contact appropriate
emergency responders and provide them with impor-
tant vehicle information and GPS coordinates.
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 325
WARNING!
• If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger (e.g., fire
or smoke is visible, dangerous road conditions or
location), do not wait for voice contact from an
Emergency Services Agent. All occupants should exit
the vehicle immediately and move to a safe location.
• Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s oper-
able network and GPS antennas. You could prevent
operable network and GPS signal reception, which
can prevent your vehicle from placing an emergency
call. An operable network and GPS signal reception
is required for the SOS Call system to function
properly.
• The SOS Call system is embedded into the vehicle’s
electrical system. Do not add aftermarket electrical
equipment to the vehicle’s electrical system. This
may prevent your vehicle from sending a signal to
initiate an emergency call. To avoid interference that
can cause the SOS Call system to fail, never add
aftermarket equipment (e.g., two-way mobile radio,
CB radio, data recorder, etc.) to your vehicle’s electri-
cal system or modify the antennas on your vehicle. IF
YOUR VEHICLE LOSES BATTERY POWER FOR
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
ANY REASON (INCLUDING DURING OR AFTER
AN ACCIDENT), THE UCONNECT FEATURES,
APPS AND SERVICES, AMONG OTHERS, WILL
NOT OPERATE.
• Modifications to any part of the SOS Call system
could cause the air bag system to fail when you need
it. You could be injured if the air bag system is not
there to help protect you.
SOS Call System Limitations
Vehicles sold in Mexico DO NOT have SOS Call system
capabilities.
SOS or other emergency line operators in Mexico may not
answer or respond to SOS system calls.
If the SOS Call system detects a malfunction, any of the
following may occur at the time the malfunction is de-
tected, and at the beginning of each ignition cycle:
• The Rearview Mirror light located between the ASSIST
and SOS buttons will continuously be illuminated red.
• The Device Screen will display the following message
“Vehicle device requires service. Please contact your
dealer.”
326 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
• An In-Vehicle Audio message will state “Vehicle device
requires service. Please contact your dealer.”
WARNING!
• Ignoring the Rearview Mirror light could mean you
will not have SOS Call services. If the Rearview
Mirror light is illuminated, have your authorized
dealer service the SOS Call system immediately.
• The Occupant Restraint Control module turns on the
air bag Warning Light on the instrument panel if a
malfunction in any part of the system is detected. If
the Air Bag Warning Light is illuminated, have your
authorized dealer service the Occupant Restraint
Control system immediately.
Even if the SOS Call system is fully functional, factors
beyond FCA US LLC’s control may prevent or stop the SOS
Call system operation. These include, but are not limited
to, the following factors:
• Delayed accessories mode is active.
• The ignition is in the OFF position.
• The vehicle’s electrical systems are not intact.
• The SOS Call system software and/or hardware are
damaged during a crash.
• The vehicle battery loses power or becomes discon-
nected during a vehicle crash.
• LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network and/or Global
Positioning Satellite signals are unavailable or ob-
structed.
• Equipment malfunction at the SOS operator facility.
• Operator error by the SOS operator.
• LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network congestion.
• Weather.
• Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or tunnels.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the
road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
steering wheel. You have full responsibility and as-
sume all risks related to the use of the features and
applications in this vehicle. Only use the features and
applications when it is safe to do so. Failure to do so
may result in an accident involving serious injury or
death.
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 327
NOTE:
• Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized by
the subscriber.
• Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s LTE
(voice/data) or 4G (data) and GPS antennas. You could
prevent LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) and GPS signal
reception, which can prevent your vehicle from placing
an emergency call. An operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G
(data) network connection and a GPS signal is required
for the SOS Call system to function properly.
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1)
This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received, includ-
ing interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
328 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
BULB REPLACEMENT
Replacement Bulbs
Interior Bulbs
Lamps Bulb Number
Front Courtesy Light C5W
Front Courtesy Lights (Sun Visors) C5W
Rear Dome Light (Models Without Retractable roof) C5W
Rear Interior Lights (Models With Retractable roof) C5W
Interior Lights HT-168
Dome Light (Glove Box) HT-168
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 329
Exterior Bulbs
Lamps Bulb Number
Low Beam Headlamps (Halogen) H11LL
High Beam Headlamps (Halogen) 9005LL
Front Position/Daytime Running Lights (DRL) PSX24W
Front Direction Indicator Lamps 7444NA
Front Position – Premium LED LED (Serviced At An Authorized Dealer)
Front Fog Lamps H11LL
Low Beam / High Beam Headlamps (HID) D3S (HID) (Serviced At An Authorized Dealer)
Side Indicators (Front – Halogen) W5W
Side Indicators (Front – HID) LED (Serviced At An Authorized Dealer)
Side Indicators (Side View Mirror) LED (Serviced At An Authorized Dealer)
Tail/Brake Lights Premium Tail Lights: LED
(Serviced At An Authorized Dealer)
Base Tail Lights: W21/5WLL-M
Turn Indicators W21WLL For Premium Tail Lamps
W21/5WLL For Base Tail Lamps
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) LED (Serviced At An Authorized Dealer)
License Plate Lamp LED (Serviced At An Authorized Dealer)
Liftgate Lamp Reverse W21WLL
Liftgate Lamp Tail LED (Serviced At An Authorized Dealer)
330 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
High Intensity Discharge (HID) Headlamps — If
Equipped
The headlamps contain a type of high voltage discharge
light source. High voltage can remain in the circuit even
with the headlamp switch off. Because of this, you should
not attempt to service a HID headlamp light source your-
self. If an HID headlamp light source fails, take your
vehicle to an authorized dealer for service.
NOTE: On vehicles equipped with HID headlamps, when
the headlamps are turned on, there is a blue hue to the
lights. This diminishes and becomes more white after
approximately 10 seconds, as the system charges.
WARNING!
A transient high voltage occurs at the bulb sockets of
HID headlamps when the headlamp switch is turned
ON. It may cause serious electrical shock or electrocu-
tion if not serviced properly. See your authorized
dealer for service.
Replacing Exterior Bulbs
Headlamps
Hi/Lo Beam Light Halogen
The bulbs can be accessed from the wheel liner with the
following procedure:
1. Turn the front wheels completely.
2. Remove the wheel liner.
3. Remove the headlamp bulb cap.
4. Rotate the headlamp bulb socket counterclockwise then
pull outwards.
Headlamp
1 — Low Beam Bulb Cap
2 — High Beam Bulb Cap
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 331
5. Push on the locking tab on the headlamp bulb connector
and remove the bulb and socket.
6. Install the new headlamp bulb making sure it’s properly
locked.
7. Install the headlamp bulb and socket; turn it clockwise
making sure it is properly locked.
8. Reinstall the wheel liner.
NOTE: We advise referring to an authorized dealer.
WARNING!
Carry out the operation of replacing lamps only with
the engine off. Also make sure that the engine is cold,
to avoid the danger of burns.
Turn Signal Light/Position Lights/Daytime Running
Lights
To replace the bulbs proceed as follows:
1. Turn the front wheels completely.
2. Remove the wheel liner.
3. Remove the electrical connectors.
4. For the DRL bulb, grip the bulb at the top and bottom
locking tabs and squeeze to and remove the bulb.
5. To replace the DRL bulb gently push bulb towards
housing. Be sure to hear both the top and bottom
locking tabs “CLICK” to ensure the bulb is properly
seated.
6. For the turn signal bulb, rotate in a counterclockwise
direction and remove the bulb and bulb socket. Pull the
bulb axially to remove it from the socket.
Headlamp Bulb Socket
332 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
7. Install the bulb and sockets and rotate them clockwise
making sure that it is properly locked.
8. Reconnect the electrical connectors.
9. Reinstall the wheel liner.
NOTE: We advise referring to an authorized dealer.
Front Fog Lights
To replace the bulbs proceed as follows:
1. Turn the front wheels completely.
2. Remove the wheel liner.
3. By pushing the electrical connector tab remove the
electrical connector.
4. Rotate the bulb counterclockwise, and then replace the
bulb.
5. Insert the new bulb in the socket, making sure the bulb
is locked into place.
6. Reconnect the electrical connector.
7. Reinstall the wheel liner.
NOTE: We advise referring to an authorized dealer.
Fog Lamp Housing
1 — Bulb
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 333
Side Indicators
The Side Indicators are LED. For their replacement see
your authorized dealer.
Rear Body Side Tail Lamps
Contain the following:
• Position lights
• Stop lights
• Direction indicator
To replace the bulbs proceed as follows:
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Using a suitable tool remove fasteners.
Body Side Tail Lamp Opening
1 — Fasteners
334 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
3. Disconnect the electrical connector by pushing the re-
lease.
4. Remove the rear body side tail lamp, sliding it away
from the back of the vehicle.
5. Replace the bulb as necessary by turning and removing
the bulb housing.
6. Insert the new bulb, making sure it is properly locked.
7. Reposition the rear body side lamp assembly on the car.
8. Reconnect the electrical connector.
Body Side Tail Lamp
1 — Rear Body Side Tail Lamp
2 — Ball Stud
Reverse Side of Tail Lamp
1 — Direction Indicator Bulb / Stop Lamp Bulb
2 — Electrical Connector
3 — Ball Studs
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 335
9. Reinstall the body side lamp making sure to align the
ball studs.
10. Install fasteners and tighten body side lamp assembly.
11. Finally close the tailgate.
NOTE: We advise referring to an authorized dealer.
Reverse Lamps
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Using a suitable tool remove the access panel for body
side lamps, remove lift gate access cover for lift gate
lamps.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector by pushing the re-
lease.
Body Side Tail Lamp
1 — Rear Body Side Tail Lamp
2 — Ball Stud
Liftgate
1 — Lift Gate Access Covers
336 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
4. Remove bulb and replace making sure it is properly
locked.
5. Reconnect the electrical connector.
6. Reinstall the access panels making sure they are locked
in correctly.
7. Finally close the tailgate.
3rd Stop Lamp
The CHMSL is LED. For their replacement, see your
authorized dealer.
License Plate Lights
The License Plate light is LED. For their replacement, see
your authorized dealer.
Replacing Interior Bulbs
Front Courtesy Light
To replace the bulbs proceed as follows:
1. Using a suitable tool remove the front courtesy light
assemby.
Front Courtesy Light
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 337
2. Release the retainer clips and bulb housing as shown. 3. Replace the bulbs by pulling straight out of bulb hous-
ing.
4. Insert the new bulbs, making sure that they are properly
locked.
5. Reassemble the bulb housing and courtesy light housing
making sure that they are properly locked.
6. Install the front courtesy light, making sure that it is
properly locked.
Front Courtesy Bulb Housing
1 — Retaining Clips
2 — Bulb Housing
Front Courtesy Bulb Housing
338 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Dome Light Vanity Mirror — If Equipped
To replace the bulbs proceed as follows:
1. Lift the cover of the mirror and pull out the mirror frame
with the mirror light cover attached.
2. Replace the bulb, releasing it from the side contacts, and
then insert the new bulb, making sure that it is properly
locked between the contacts.
3. Reinstall the visor mirror light cover making sure that it
is properly locked.
4. Finally lower the visor mirror cover to the mirror.
Dome Light Glove Compartment
To replace the bulb proceed as follows:
1. Open the glove compartment.
2. Place your fingers inside the light assembly, pull the
bulb to replace it.
3. Insert the new bulb, making sure it is properly locked.
Visor
1 — Visor Mirror Cover
2 — Visor Mirror Light
Bulb Removal/Installation
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 339
Dome Light
To replace the bulbs proceed as follows:
1. Lower the handle in the direction shown; remove the
dome light.
2. Replace the bulb by removing it from the side contacts.
3. Insert the new bulb, locking it between the contacts.
4. Reinstall the dome light.
Grab Handle/Dome Light
Bulb
340 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Interior Cargo Lights
To replace the bulbs proceed as follows:
1. Using thumb with slight pressure – push bulb holder to
the side.
2. Fully disengage the bulb holder from the housing.
Bulb Holder
Bulb Holder
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 341
3. Rotate bulb holder to replace bulb.
WARNING!
• Modifications or repair of the electrical system per-
formed incorrectly and without taking into account
the technical characteristics can cause malfunctions
with the risk of fire.
• Halogen lamps contain gas under pressure, in the
event of breakage be careful of the projection of
fragments of glass.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Halogen lamps must be handled by touching only
the metallic part. If the transparent bulb is in contact
with the fingers, reduces the intensity of the emitted
light and you can also affect the life of the lamp. In
case of accidental contact, rub the bulb with a cloth
dampened with alcohol and allow to dry.
NOTE: It is recommended to have your bulbs replaced by
your authorized dealer.
FUSES
WARNING!
• When replacing a blown fuse, always use an appro-
priate replacement fuse with the same amp rating as
the original fuse. Never replace a fuse with another
fuse of higher amp rating. Never replace a blown
fuse with metal wires or any other material. Do not
place a fuse inside a circuit breaker cavity or vice
versa. Failure to use proper fuses may result in
serious personal injury, fire and/or property damage.
(Continued)
Bulb
342 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
WARNING! (Continued)
• Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition is
off and that all the other services are switched off
and/or disengaged.
• If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an autho-
rized dealer.
• If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air
bag system, braking system), power unit systems
(engine system, transmission system) or steering
system blows, contact an authorized dealer.
General Information
The fuses protect electrical systems against excessive cur-
rent.
When a device does not work, you must check the fuse
element inside the blade fuse for a break/melt.
Also, please be aware that when using power outlets for
extended periods of time with the engine off may result in
vehicle battery discharge.
Blade Fuses
1 — Fuse Element
2 — Blade Fuse with a good/functional fuse element.
3 — Blade fuse with a NOT functional / BAD fuse element (blown
fuse).
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 343
Fuse Location
The fuses are grouped into controllers located in the engine
compartment.
Engine Compartment Fuses/Distribution Unit
The engine compartment fuse panel is located on the left
side of the engine compartment.
Removing Fuse Cover and Locking Screw
Proceed as follows:
1. Slowly turn the screw counterclockwise.
2. Slowly release the screw.
3. Remove the fuse cover by sliding it upward.
Fuse Panel & Cover Location
1 — Cover Screw
2 — Fuse Cover
344 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Mounting Fuse Cover and Locking Screw
Proceed as follows:
1. Properly secure the fuse cover to the box, slide com-
pletely from top to bottom.
2. Fully depress the screw, using the special screwdriver
supplied.
3. Slowly turn the screw clockwise.
4. Release the screw.
Battery Fuse Cover Location
1 — Fuse Cover Tabs
2 — Fuse Cover
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 345
Cavity Maxi Fuse Cartridge Fuse Mini Fuse Description
F01 70 Amp Tan – – Module Body Com-
puter
F02 70 Amp Tan – – Module Body Com-
puter, Rear Distribu-
tion Units
F03 – 30 Amp Pink with
HID Lamps
20 Amp Blue with-
out HID Lamps
– Supply Body Com-
puter, HID Lamps
F04 – 40 Amp Tan – Brake Control Elec-
tronics Module
F05 – 40 Amp Tan – PTC Heater
F06 40 Amp Orange – – Starter Relay
F07 40 Amp Orange – – Rear Distribution
Unit For Trailer Tow
Usage
F08 – 30 Amp Pink – Supply For TCM,
AGSM, Steering Con-
trol
F09 – – 7.5 Amp Brown ECM, TCM, Radiator
Fan Control
F10 – – 20 Amp Yellow Horn
346 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Cavity Maxi Fuse Cartridge Fuse Mini Fuse Description
F11 – – 20 Amp Yellow –
1.4L Gas & Diesel
Engines
25 Amp Clear – 2.4
L Engines/UREA
ECM/PCM/UREA
Fuel Injectors
F14 – – 7.5 Amp Brown Diesel Crankcase
Heater
F15 40 Amp Orange – – Brake Control Mod-
ule Pump
F16 – – 10 Amp Red Engine Control Mod-
ule Power, Automatic
Transmission
F17 – – 10 Amp Red Engine Secondary
Loads
F18 – – 20 Amp Yellow 12V Rear Cargo Out-
let Ignition Powered
F19 – – 7.5 Amp Brown Air Conditioner
Compressor
F20 – – 20 Amp Yellow Cigar Lighter
F21 – – 20 Amp Yellow Fuel Pump
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 347
Cavity Maxi Fuse Cartridge Fuse Mini Fuse Description
F22 – – 20 Amp Yellow –
Gas Engine
15 Amp Blue – Die-
sel Engine
Gas - Ign Coil/Fuel
Injector Diesel- Diesel
Components
F23 – – 30 Amp Green Window Heater Grid
F24 – – 15 Amp Blue Electronic Unit Sup-
ply Automatic Trans-
mission
F30 – – 20 Amp Yellow
(Customer Select-
able, Move From
F18)
12V Rear Cargo Out-
let Constant Battery
Powered
F81 60 Amp Blue – – Glow Plug Module,
DDCT SDU Battery
Feed
F82 – 40 Amp Green – Diesel Fuel Filter
Heater
F83 – 40 Amp Green – HVAC Fan
F84 – – 30 Amp Green Power Supply All
Wheel Drive
F87 – – 5 Amp Tan Gear Selector Auto-
matic Transmission
348 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Cavity Maxi Fuse Cartridge Fuse Mini Fuse Description
F88 – – 7.5 Amp Brown Heated Outside Mir-
rors
F89 – – 30 Amp Green Heated Rear Window
F90 – – 5 Amp Tan IBS Sensor (Battery
State Of Charge)
Fxx – – 10 Amp Red Dual Battery Control
Relay With NON
DDCT Trans
7.5 Amp Brown Dual Battery Control
Relay With DDCT
Trans
The Fuse Box has additional ATO fuse holders installed on
the bottom of the box.
Cavity ATO / UNIVAL Fuse Description
F1 5 Amp Biege Drivetrain Control Module (4x4/
AWD)
F2 10 Amp Red ECM — Start Diagnostic Sense
F3 2 Amp Grey Mod Steering Control
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 349
Interior Fuses
The interior fuse panel is located in the passenger compart-
ment on the left side dash panel under the instrument
panel.
Cavity Blade Fuse Description
F31 7.5 Amp Brown Occupant Restraint Controller
F33 20 Amp Yellow Window Motor Passenger
F34 20 Amp Yellow Window Motor Driver
F36 20 Amp Yellow Intrusion Module/Siren, Radio, UCI/USB Port, VSU, Cli-
mate Control, Electronic Steering Lock, Power Folding
Mirrors, Security Gateway/DTV
F37 10 Amp Red Instrument Panel Cluster, Drivetrain Control Module,
Adaptive Cruise, ECC (HVAC) Blower
F38 20 Amp Yellow Door Lock/Unlock, Liftgate Release
F42 7.5 Amp Brown Brake System Module, Electric Power Steering
F43 20 Amp Yellow Washer Pump Front And Rear
F47 20 Amp Yellow Rear Left Window Lifter
F48 20 Amp Yellow Rear Right Window Lifter
F49 7.5 Amp Brown Park Assist, Blind Spot, Voltage Stabilizer, Humidity Sen-
sor, Electronic Steering Lock, Temp Sense, Mirror, Heated
Seats, Light And Rain Sensor, Start Stop Switch
350 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Cavity Blade Fuse Description
F50 7.5 Amp Brown Occupant Restraint Controller
F51 7.5 Amp Brown Electronic Climate Control, Occupant Classification, Rear
View Camera, Climate Control, Headlamp Leveling, Ter-
rain Select, Heated Rear Window, Trailer Tow, Haptic
Lane Departure
F53 7.5 Amp Brown Keyless Ignition Node Module, Electric Park Brake, RF
Hub, Cluster
F94 15 Amp Blue Lumbar Adjust Driver Seat, Power Outlets
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 351
Rear Cargo Fuse/Relay Distribution Unit
To access the fuses, remove the access door from the left
rear panel of the rear cargo area.
The fuses may be contained in two units. Fuse holder No.
1 is located closest to the rear of the vehicle and fuse holder
No. 2 (if equipped with trailer towing) is located closest to
the front of the vehicle.
Rear Cargo Fuse Cavities
1 — Fuse Holder No. 1
2 — Fuse Holder No. 2
352 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Fuse Holder No. 1
Cavity Mini Fuse Description
F1 30 Amp Green Power Inverter
F2 30 Amp Green Memory Seat
F3 20 Amp Yellow Sun Roof – If Equipped
F4 30 Amp Green Power Seat (Passenger Side)
F5 30 Amp Green Power Seat (Driver Side)
F6 7.5 Amp Brown Power Lumbar (Power Seats)
F7 15 Amp Blue Heated Steering Wheel / Ventilated
Seats
F8 20 Amp Yellow Heated Seats
Fuse Holder No. 2
Cavity Mini Fuse Description
F1 10 Amp Red TTM IGN Feed
F5 15 Amp Blue Controller Exterior Lighting Lights
(Drivers Side)
F6 15 Amp Blue Controller Exterior Lighting Lights
(Passenger Side)
F7 10 Amp Red TTM Jumper Battery Feed
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 353
On the Rear Cargo Fuse/Relay Distribution Unit bracket,
there is a Maxi Fuse holder for the Power Liftgate and an
ATO / Uni Val fuse holder for the HIFI Audio System.
Cavity Maxi Fuse Description
F01 30 Amp Green Power Liftgate
Cavity ATO / Uni-Val Fuse Description
F02 25 Amp Clear HIFI Audio System
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
• Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never put any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center
where it can be raised on a lift.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is on
a jack.
• The jack is designed to be used as a tool for changing
tires only. The jack should not be used to lift the
vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle should be
jacked on a firm level surface only. Avoid ice or
slippery areas.
354 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage
If equipped, the jack and tools are located in the rear
storage compartment, below the spare tire.
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Lift the access cover using the load floor handle.
Jack And Tools Location
1 — Jack
2 — Alignment Pin
3 — Wheel Bolt Wrench
4 — Emergency Funnel
5 — Screwdriver
Load Floor Handle
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 355
3. Remove the fastener securing the spare tire, and remove
the spare wheel from the vehicle. The jack and tools will
be found beneath.
4. Remove the alignment pin from the middle, rotate the
jack counterclockwise, and lift it from the foam tray.
5. Remove the jack and wheel bolt wrench.
Spare Tire Fastener
Jack And Tools
1 — Wheel Bolt Wrench
2 — Jack
3 — Emergency Funnel
4 — Screwdriver
5 — Alignment Pin
356 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle.
Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the
places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire repaired
or replaced immediately.
Preparations For Jacking
1. Park the vehicle on a firm level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible. Avoid icy or slippery
areas.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off the
road to avoid being hit when operating the jack or
changing the wheel.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Place the gear selector into PARK (automatic transmis-
sion) or REVERSE (manual transmission).
5. Place the ignition in the OFF position.
6. Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally
opposite the jacking position. For example, if the right
front wheel is being changed, block the left rear wheel.
NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the
vehicle when the vehicle is being jacked.
Jacking Instructions
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help
prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle:
• Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible before raising the
vehicle.
• Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
• Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be
raised.
(Continued)
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 357
WARNING! (Continued)
• Apply the parking brake firmly and set the transmis-
sion in PARK.
• Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
jack.
• Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
• Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If
you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
service center where it can be raised on a lift.
• Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for
lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
• If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
• To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are securely
stowed, spares must be stowed with the valve stem
facing the ground.
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated in the Jacking
Instructions for this vehicle.
1. Remove the spare tire, jack, and wheel bolt wrench.
2. If equipped with aluminum wheels where the center cap
covers the wheel bolts, use the wheel bolt wrench to pry
the center cap off carefully before raising the vehicle.
Jack Warning Label
358 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
3. Before raising the vehicle, use the wheel bolt wrench to
loosen, but not remove, the wheel bolts on the wheel
with the flat tire. Turn the wheel bolts counterclockwise
one turn while the wheel is still on the ground.
4. Place the jack underneath the lift area that is closest to
the flat tire. Turn the jack screw clockwise to firmly
engage the jack saddle with the lift area of the sill flange,
centering the jack saddle inside the cutout in the sill
cladding.
Jacking Locations
Rear Jacking Location
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 359
5. Raise the vehicle just enough to remove the flat tire.
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the
vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and hurt
someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough to
remove the tire.
6. Remove the wheel bolts and tire.
7. Remove the alignment pin from the jack assembly and
thread the pin into the wheel hub to assist in mounting
the spare tire.
8. Mount the spare tire.
CAUTION!
Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve stem
facing outward. The vehicle could be damaged if the
spare tire is mounted incorrectly.
Front Jacking Location
Mounting Spare Tire
360 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
NOTE:
• For vehicles equipped, do not attempt to install a
center cap or wheel cover on the compact spare.
• Refer to “Compact Spare Tire” and to “Limited-Use
Spare” under “Tires—General Information” in “Servic-
ing And Maintenance” for additional warnings, cau-
tions, and information about the spare tire, its use, and
operation.
9. Install and lightly tighten the wheel bolts.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do
not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in serious injury.
10. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
11. Finish tightening the wheel bolts. Push down on the
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
leverage. Tighten the wheel bolts in a star pattern until
each wheel bolt has been tightened twice. Refer to
“Wheel And Tire Torque Specifications” in “Technical
Specifications” for the proper lug bolt torque. If in
doubt about the correct tightness, have them checked
with a torque wrench by an authorized dealer or at a
service station.
12. Place the jack on the foam tray and open it far enough
so that it is secured. Once placed in position, rotate it
clockwise to lock it in. Replace the alignment pin in the
center hole to lock the jack in place.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle.
Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the
places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire repaired
or replaced immediately.
Road Tire Installation
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
2. Install the remaining wheel bolts with the threaded end
of the wheel bolt toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the
wheel bolts.
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 361
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do
not tighten the wheel bolts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in serious injury.
3. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
4. Finish tightening the wheel bolts. Push down on the
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
leverage. Tighten the wheel bolts in a star pattern until
each wheel bolt has been tightened twice. Refer to
“Wheel And Tire Torque Specifications” in “Technical
Specifications” for the proper lug bolt torque. If in doubt
about the correct tightness, have them checked with a
torque wrench by an authorized dealer or service sta-
tion.
5. Lower the jack until it is free. Remove the wheel blocks.
Reassemble the lug wrench to the jack assembly and
stow it in the spare tire area. Secure the assembly using
the means provided. Release the parking brake before
driving the vehicle.
6. After 25 miles (40 km), check the wheel bolt torque with
a torque wrench to ensure that all wheel bolts are
properly seated against the wheel.
TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Tire Service Kit.
Small punctures up to 1/4 inch (6 mm) in the tire tread can
be sealed with Tire Service Kit. Foreign objects (e.g., screws
or nails) should not be removed from the tire. Tire Service
Kit can be used in outside temperatures down to approxi-
mately -4°F (-20°C). This kit will provide a temporary tire
seal, allowing you to drive your vehicle up to 100 miles
(160 km) with a maximum speed of 50 mph (80 km/h).
362 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Tire Service Kit Storage
The Tire Service Kit is stowed under the load floor behind
the rear seat.
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Lift the access cover using the load floor handle.
Tire Service Kit And Components And Operation
Load Floor Handle
Tire Service Kit Components
1 — Mode Select Knob
2 — Sealant/Air Hose
3 — Hose Accessories
4 — Sealant Bottle
5 — Power Plug
6 — Power Switch
7 — Deflation Button
8 — Pressure Gauge
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 363
Using The Mode Select Knob And Hoses
Your Tire Service Kit is equipped with the following
symbols to indicate the air or sealant mode.
Selecting Air Mode
Push in the Mode Select Knob and turn
to this position for air pump operation
only.
Selecting Sealant Mode
Push in the Mode Select Knob and turn
to this position to inject the Tire Service
Kit Sealant and to inflate the tire.
Using The Power Button
Push and release the Power Button once
to turn the Tire Service Kit on. Push and
release the Power Button again to turn
the Tire Service Kit off.
Using The Deflation Button
Push the Deflation Button to reduce the
air pressure in the tire if it becomes
over-inflated.
Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions
• Replace the Tire Service Kit Sealant Bottle prior to the
expiration date (printed at the lower right hand corner
on the bottle label) to assure optimum operation of the
system. Refer to “Sealant Bottle Replacement” in this
section.
364 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
• The Sealant Bottle is a one tire application use and needs
to be replaced after each use. Always replace these
components immediately at your original equipment
vehicle dealer.
• When the Tire Service Kit sealant is in a liquid form,
clean water, and a damp cloth will remove the material
from the vehicle or tire and wheel components. Once the
sealant dries, it can easily be peeled off and properly
discarded.
• For optimum performance, make sure the valve stem on
the wheel is free of debris before connecting the Tire
Service Kit.
• You can use the Tire Service Kit air pump to inflate
bicycle tires. The kit also comes with two needles,
located in the Accessory Storage Compartment (on the
bottom of the air pump) for inflating sport balls, rafts, or
similar inflatable items. However, use only the Air Pump
and make sure the Mode Select Knob is in the Air Mode
when inflating such items to avoid injecting sealant into
them. The Tire Service Kit Sealant is only intended to
seal punctures less than 1/4 inch (6 mm) diameter in the
tread of your vehicle.
• Do not lift or carry the Tire Service Kit by the hoses.
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of the vehicle
closest to traffic. Pull far enough off the road to avoid
the danger of being hit when using the Tire Service
Kit.
• Do not use Tire Service Kit or drive the vehicle under
the following circumstances:
– If the puncture in the tire tread is approximately
1/4 inch (6 mm) or larger.
– If the tire has any sidewall damage.
– If the tire has any damage from driving with
extremely low tire pressure.
– If the tire has any damage from driving on a flat
tire.
– If the wheel has any damage.
– If you are unsure of the condition of the tire or the
wheel.
• Keep Tire Service Kit away from open flames or heat
source.
(Continued)
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 365
WARNING! (Continued)
• A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward in a collision
or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the
vehicle. Always stow the Tire Service Kit in the place
provided. Failure to follow these warnings can result
in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your
passengers, and others around you.
• Take care not to allow the contents of Tire Service Kit
to come in contact with hair, eyes, or clothing. Tire
Service Kit sealant is harmful if inhaled, swallowed,
or absorbed through the skin. It causes skin, eye, and
respiratory irritation. Flush immediately with plenty
of water if there is any contact with eyes or skin.
Change clothing as soon as possible, if there is any
contact with clothing.
• Tire Service Kit Sealant solution contains latex. In
case of an allergic reaction or rash, consult a physi-
cian immediately. Keep Tire Service Kit out of reach
of children. If swallowed, rinse mouth immediately
with plenty of water and drink plenty of water. Do
not induce vomiting! Consult a physician immedi-
ately.
Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit
Whenever You Stop To Use Tire Service Kit:
1. Pull over to a safe location and turn on the vehicle’s
Hazard Warning flashers.
2. Verify that the valve stem (on the wheel with the
deflated tire) is in a position that is near to the ground.
This will allow the Tire Service Kit Hose to reach the
valve stem and keep the Tire Service Kit flat on the
ground. This will provide the best positioning of the kit
when injecting the sealant into the deflated tire and
running the air pump. Move the vehicle as necessary to
place the valve stem in this position before proceeding.
3. Place the transmission in PARK and cycle the ignition in
the OFF position.
4. Apply the parking brake.
Setting Up To Use Tire Service Kit:
1. Uncoil the Sealant Hose and then remove the cap from
the fitting at the end of the hose.
2. Place the Tire Service Kit flat on the ground next to the
deflated tire.
366 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
3. Remove the cap from the valve stem and then screw the
fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose
onto the valve stem.
4. Uncoil the Power Plug and insert the plug into the
vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet.
NOTE: Do not remove foreign objects (e.g., screws or nails)
from the tire.
Injecting Tire Service Kit Sealant Into The Deflated Tire:
1. Always start the vehicle before turning the Tire Service
Kit on.
2. Ensure the Mode Select Knob is to the Sealant Mode
position.
3. After pushing the Power Button, the sealant (white
fluid) will flow from the Sealant
Bottle through the Sealant Hose and
into the tire.
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 367
NOTE: Sealant may leak out through the puncture in the
tire.
If the sealant (white fluid) does not flow within0–10
seconds through the Sealant Hose:
1. Push the Power Button to turn the Tire Service Kit off.
Disconnect the Sealant Hose from the valve stem. Make
sure the valve stem is free of debris. Reconnect the
Sealant Hose to the valve stem. Check that the Mode
Select Knob is in the Sealant Mode position and not Air
Mode. Push the Power Button to turn the Tire Service
Kit on.
2. Connect the Power Plug to a different 12 Volt power
outlet in your vehicle or another vehicle, if available.
Make sure the vehicle is running before turning the Tire
Service Kit on.
3. The Sealant Bottle may be empty due to previous use.
Call for assistance.
If the sealant (white fluid) does flow through the Sealant
Hose:
1. Continue to operate the pump until sealant is no longer
flowing through hose (typically takes
30 - 70 seconds). As the sealant flows
through the Sealant Hose, the Pres-
sure Gauge can read as high as 70 psi
(4.8 Bar). The Pressure Gauge will
decrease quickly from approximately
70 psi (4.8 Bar) to the actual tire
pressure when the Sealant Bottle is empty.
2. The pump will start to inject air into the tire immedi-
ately after the Sealant Bottle is empty.
Continue to operate the pump and
inflate the tire to the cold tire inflation
pressure found on the tire and load-
ing information label located in the
driver-side door opening. Check the
tire pressure by looking at the Pres-
sure Gauge.
368 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
If the tire does not inflate to at least 26 psi (1.8 Bar)
pressure within 15 minutes:
• The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive
the vehicle further. Call for assistance.
If the tire inflates to the recommended pressure or is at
least 26 psi (1.8 Bar) pressure within 15 minutes:
NOTE: If the tire becomes over-inflated, push the Deflation
Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recommended
inflation pressure before continuing.
1. Push the Power Button to turn off the
Tire Service Kit.
2. Remove the speed limit label from
the Tire Service Kit and place sticker
on the steering wheel.
3. Immediately disconnect the Sealant Hose from the valve
stem, reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end of the
hose, and place the Tire Service Kit in the vehicle storage
location. Proceed to “Drive Vehicle.”
Drive Vehicle:
Immediately after injecting sealant and inflating the tire,
drive the vehicle 5 miles (8 km) or ten
minutes to ensure distribution of the
Tire Service Kit Sealant within the tire.
Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 369
WARNING!
The Tire Service Kit is not a permanent flat tire repair.
Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced after
using the Tire Service Kit. Do not exceed 50 mph
(80 km/h) until the tire is repaired or replaced. Failure
to follow this warning can result in injuries that are
serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others
around you. Have the tire checked as soon as possible
at your authorized dealer.
After Driving:
Pull over to a safe location. Refer to “Whenever You Stop
To Use Tire Service Kit” in this section before continuing.
1. Uncoil the Sealant Hose, and then remove the cap from
the fitting at the end of the hose.
2. Place the Tire Service Kit flat on the ground next to the
deflated tire.
3. Remove the cap from the valve stem, and then screw
the fitting at the end of the Sealant
Hose onto the valve stem.
4. Uncoil the power plug and insert the plug into the
vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet.
5. Uncoil the Hose and screw the fitting at the end of the
hose onto the valve stem.
370 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
6. Turn the Mode Select Knob and turn to the Air Mode
position.
7. Check the pressure in the tire by reading the Pressure
Gauge.
If tire pressure is less than 19 psi (1.3 Bar):
The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive the
vehicle further. Call for assistance.
If the tire pressure is 19 psi (1.3 Bar) or higher:
1. Push the Power Button to turn on Tire Service Kit and
inflate the tire to the cold tire inflation
pressure found on the tire and load-
ing information label located in the
driver-side door opening.
NOTE: If the tire becomes over-inflated, push the Deflation
Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recommended
inflation pressure before continuing.
2. Disconnect the Tire Service Kit from the valve stem,
reinstall the cap on the valve stem and unplug from
12 Volt outlet.
3. Place the Tire Service Kit in its proper storage area in the
vehicle.
4. Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced at the
earliest opportunity at an authorized dealer or tire
service center.
5. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the steering wheel
after the tire has been repaired.
6. Replace the Sealant Bottle at an authorized dealer as
soon as possible. Refer to “Sealant Bottle Replacement”.
NOTE: When having the tire serviced, advise the autho-
rized dealer or service center that the tire has been sealed
using the Tire Service Kit.
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 371
Sealant Bottle Replacement:
1. Unwrap the power cord.
2. Unwrap the hose.
3. Remove the bottle cover.
Unwrap The Hose
Remove The Bottle Cover
372 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
4. Rotate the bottle up beyond vertical to release. 5. Pull the bottle away from the Compressor.
NOTE:
• For sealant bottle installation, follow these steps in
reverse order.
• Replacement sealant bottles are available at authorized
service centers.
Rotate The Bottle Up Remove The Bottle
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 373
JUMP STARTING
If your vehicle has a discharged battery, it can be jump
started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in another
vehicle or by using a portable battery booster pack. Jump
starting can be dangerous if done improperly, so please
follow the procedures in this section carefully.
NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack, follow
the manufacturer’s operating instructions and precautions.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is frozen. It
could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any other
booster source with a system voltage greater than
12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor, alter-
nator or electrical system may occur.
Preparations For Jump Start
The battery in your vehicle is located in the front of the
engine compartment, behind the left headlight assembly.
NOTE: The positive battery post is covered with a protec-
tive cap. Lift up on the cap to gain access to the post.
Positive Battery Post
374 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
WARNING!
• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever
the hood is raised. It can start anytime the ignition
switch is ON. You can be injured by moving fan
blades.
• Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch
bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent
electrical contact. You could be seriously injured.
• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.
1. Apply the parking brake, shift the automatic transmis-
sion into PARK (manual transmission in NEUTRAL)
and turn the ignition to OFF/LOCK.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electrical
accessories.
3. If using another vehicle to jump start the battery, park
the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the
parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF/
LOCK.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this could
establish a ground connection and personal injury
could result.
Jump Starting Procedure
WARNING!
Failure to follow this jump starting procedure could
result in personal injury or property damage due to
battery explosion.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
or the discharged vehicle.
Connecting The Jumper Cables
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the
positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 375
3. Connect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable to the
negative (-) post of the booster battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable to a good engine ground (exposed metal part of
the discharged vehicle’s engine) away from the battery
and the fuel injection system.
WARNING!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative (-) post
of the discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark
could cause the battery to explode and could result in
personal injury. Only use the specific ground point, do
not use any other exposed metal parts.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
battery, let the engine idle for a few minutes, and then
start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged
battery.
6. Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables in
the reverse sequence:
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
1. Disconnect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable from
the engine ground of the vehicle with the discharged
battery.
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable from
the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
Suitable Engine Ground (Example Engine Shown)
376 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable from the positive (+) post of the vehicle with the
discharged battery.
If frequent jump starting is required to start your vehicle,
you should have the battery and charging system in-
spected at your authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets
draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not
in use (i.e., cellular devices, etc.). Eventually, if plugged
in long enough without engine operation, the vehicle’s
battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery
life and/or prevent the engine from starting.
REFUELING IN EMERGENCY
The fuel filling procedure in case of emergency is described
in the “Emergency Gas Can Refueling”. Refer to “Refueling
The Vehicle” in “Starting And Operating” for further
information.
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
potential for overheating your engine by taking the appro-
priate action.
• On the highways — slow down.
• In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission in
NEUTRAL, but do not increase engine idle speed.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your
vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H,” pull over
and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air
conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back
into the normal range. If the pointer remains on the
“H” and you hear continuous chimes, turn the engine
off immediately and call for service.
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down an
impending overheat condition:
• If your Air Conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C
system adds heat to the engine cooling system and
turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 377
• You can also turn the temperature control to maximum
heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control to
high. This allows the heater core to act as a supplement
to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the
engine cooling system.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If you
see or hear steam coming from under the hood, do not
open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool.
Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when
the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE
If a malfunction occurs, and the gear selector cannot be
moved out of the PARK position, you can use the following
procedure to temporarily move the gear selector:
1. Turn the engine OFF.
2. Apply the park brake.
3. Grasp the boot material rearward of the gear selector
and pull up to carefully separate the gear selector bezel
and boot assembly from the center console.
4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal.
5. Insert a small screwdriver or similar tool down into the
gear selector override access hole (at the right rear
corner of the gear selector assembly), and push and hold
the override release lever down.
Gear Selector Bezel
378 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
6. Move the gear selector to the NEUTRAL position.
7. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL.
8. Reinstall the gear selector boot.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or snow, it can
often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the steering
wheel right and left to clear the area around the front
wheels. For vehicles with automatic transmission, push
and hold the lock button on the gear selector. Then shift
back and forth between DRIVE and REVERSE (for auto-
matic transmission) or SECOND GEAR and REVERSE (for
manual transmission) while gently pressing the accelerator.
NOTE: For vehicles with automatic transmission, shifts
between DRIVE and REVERSE can only be achieved at
wheel speeds of 5 mph (8 km/h) or less. Whenever the
transmission remains in NEUTRAL for more than two
seconds, you must press the brake pedal to engage DRIVE
or REVERSE.
Use the least amount of accelerator pedal pressure that will
maintain the rocking motion without spinning the wheels
or racing the engine.
Gear Selector Override Access Hole
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 379
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated
by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or even
failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could explode and
injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels
faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than 30
seconds continuously without stopping when you are
stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel, no
matter what the speed.
NOTE: Push the “ESC Off” switch (if necessary), to place
the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system in “Partial
Off” mode, before rocking the vehicle. Refer to “Electronic
Brake Control System” in “Safety” for further information.
Once the vehicle has been freed, push the ⬙ESC Off⬙ switch
again to restore “ESC On” mode.
CAUTION!
• Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead
to transmission overheating and failure. Allow the
engine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL
for at least one minute after every five rocking-
motion cycles. This will minimize overheating and
reduce the risk of clutch or transmission failure
during prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle.
• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting between
DRIVE/SECOND gear and REVERSE, do not spin
the wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drive-
train damage may result.
• Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure. It
can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels
above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no transmis-
sion shifting occurring).
380 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a disabled
vehicle using a commercial towing service.
Towing Condition Wheels OFF
The Ground
FWD MODELS 4X4 MODELS
Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Wheel Lift Or
Dolly Tow
Rear NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Front OK NOT ALLOWED
Flatbed ALL BEST METHOD ONLY METHOD
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent
damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other
equipment designed for this purpose, following equipment
manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is man-
datory. Attach a tow bar or other towing devices to main
structural members of the vehicle, not to bumpers or
associated brackets. State and local laws regarding vehicles
under tow must be observed.
NOTE:
• You must ensure that the Auto Park Brake feature is
disabled before towing this vehicle to avoid inadvertent
Electric Park Brake engagement. The Auto Park Brake
feature is enabled or disabled via the customer program-
mable features in the Uconnect Settings.
• Vehicles with a discharged battery, or total electrical
failure when the Electric Park Brake (EPB) is engaged,
will need a wheel dolly or jack to raise the rear wheels
off the ground when moving the vehicle onto a flatbed.
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 381
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.)
while being towed, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN
mode.
Note that the Safehold feature will engage the Electric Park
Brake whenever the driver’s door is opened (if the battery
is connected, ignition is ON, transmission is not in PARK,
and brake pedal is released). If you are towing this vehicle
with the ignition in the ON/RUN mode, you must manu-
ally disable the Electric Park Brake each time the driver’s
door is opened by pressing the brake pedal and then
releasing the EPB.
If the vehicle’s battery is discharged, refer to “Gear Selector
Override” in this section for instructions on shifting the
automatic transmission out of PARK so that the vehicle can
be moved.
CAUTION!
• Do not use sling-type equipment when towing. Ve-
hicle damage may occur.
• When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck, do not
attach to front or rear suspension components. Dam-
age to your vehicle may result from improper towing.
• Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is released, and
remains released, while being towed.
• Do not use a bumper mounted clamp-on tow bar on
your vehicle. The bumper face bar will be damaged.
Without The Key Fob
Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed with
the ignition in the LOCK/OFF mode. The only approved
method of towing without the key fob is with a flatbed
truck. Proper towing equipment is necessary to prevent
damage to the vehicle.
382 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Front-Wheel Drive (FWD) Models — With Key Fob
The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with
all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed.
If flatbed equipment is not available, this vehicle must be
towed with the front wheels OFF the ground (using a
towing dolly, or wheel lift equipment with the front wheels
raised).
Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is released, and remains
released, while being towed. The Electric Park Brake does
not need to be released if all four wheels are off the ground.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require-
ments can cause severe engine and/or transmission
damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered
under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
4x4 Models
The manufacturer requires towing with all four wheels
OFF the ground.
Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle on a flatbed, or
with one end of the vehicle raised and the opposite end on
a towing dolly.
CAUTION!
• Front or rear wheel lifts must not be used (if the
remaining wheels are on the ground). Internal dam-
age to the transmission or transfer case will occur if
a front or rear wheel lift is used when towing.
• Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require-
ments can cause severe transmission and/or transfer
case damage. Damage from improper towing is not
covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to
prevent damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars
and other equipment designed for this purpose,
following equipment manufacturer’s instructions.
• Use of safety chains in mandatory. Attach a tow bar
or other towing devices to main structural members
of the vehicle, not to bumpers or associated brackets.
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 383
Emergency Tow Hooks — If Equipped
If your vehicle is equipped with tow hooks, there will be
one in the rear and two mounted on the front of the vehicle.
The rear hook will be located on the driver’s side of the
vehicle.
NOTE: For off-road recovery, it is recommended to use
both of the front tow hooks to minimize the risk of damage
to the vehicle.
Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position, and subse-
quently in OFF/LOCK, without opening the door. During
towing, remember that not having the aid of the power
brakes and the electromechanical power steering will re-
quire greater force when applying the brakes and steering
of the vehicle.
Front Tow Hooks Location
Rear Tow Hook Location
384 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
WARNING!
• Do not use a chain for freeing a stuck vehicle. Chains
may break, causing serious injury or death.
• Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow hooks.
Tow straps may become disengaged, causing serious
injury.
CAUTION!
Tow hooks are for emergency use only, to rescue a
vehicle stranded off road. Do not use tow hooks for
tow truck hookup or highway towing. You could
damage your vehicle.
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS)
This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced Accident
Response System.
Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety”
for further information on the Enhanced Accident Re-
sponse System (EARS) function.
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data Recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record data that
will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems per-
formed under certain crash or near crash-like situations,
such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle.
Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety”
for further information on the Event Data Recorder (EDR).
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 385
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 SCHEDULED SERVICING .................389
▫ Maintenance Plan.......................390
䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT .................393
▫ 2.4L Engine ...........................393
▫ Checking Oil Level .....................394
▫ Adding Washer Fluid ...................394
▫ Maintenance-Free Battery .................395
䡵 DEALER SERVICE .......................396
▫ Engine Oil ...........................396
▫ Engine Oil Filter .......................397
▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter .................398
▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance ..............398
▫ Body Lubrication ......................399
▫ Wiper Blades .........................400
▫ Exhaust System ........................403
▫ Cooling System ........................405
▫ Brake System .........................409
▫ Manual Transmission — If Equipped ........410
▫ Automatic Transmission — If Equipped .......411
䡵 RAISING THE VEHICLE ..................412
䡵 TIRES ................................412
▫ Tire Safety Information ..................412
▫ Tires — General Information ..............419
▫ Tire Types ............................425
▫ Spare Tires — If Equipped ................427
▫ Tire Chains (Traction Devices) .............429
▫ T
ire Rotation Recommendations ............430
8
䡵 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES ..................431
▫ Treadwear ............................431
▫ Traction Grades ........................432
▫ Temperature Grades .....................432
䡵 STORING THE VEHICLE ..................432
䡵 BODYWORK ...........................433
▫ Protection From Atmospheric Agents ........433
▫ Body And Underbody Maintenance ..........434
▫ Preserving The Bodywork .................436
䡵 INTERIORS ............................437
▫ Seats And Fabric Parts ...................437
▫ Plastic And Coated Parts..................438
▫ Leather Parts ..........................438
▫ Glass Surfaces .........................439
388 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change
indicator system. The oil change indicator system will
remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for
scheduled maintenance.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change
indicator message will illuminate in the instrument cluster.
This means that service is required for your vehicle.
Operating conditions such as frequent short-trips, trailer
tow and extremely hot or cold ambient temperatures will
influence when the “Change Oil” or “Oil Change Re-
quired” message is displayed. Severe Operating Condi-
tions can cause the change oil message to illuminate as
early as 3,500 miles (5,600 km) since last reset. Have your
vehicle serviced as soon as possible, within the next 500
miles (805 km).
Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a
scheduled oil change is performed by someone other than
your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by
referring to the steps described under “Instrument Cluster
Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
NOTE:
Under no circumstances should oil change intervals
exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), one year or 350 hours of engine
run time, whichever comes first. The 350 hours of engine run or
idle time is generally only a concern for fleet customers.
Severe Duty All Models
Change Engine Oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km) or 350 hours of
engine run time if the vehicle is operated in a dusty and off
road environment or is operated predominately at idle or
only very low engine RPM’s. This type of vehicle use is
considered Severe Duty.
NOTE: The Oil Change Indicator will not illuminate under
these conditions.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 389
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
• Check engine oil level.
• Check windshield washer fluid level.
• Check the tire inflation pressures and look for unusual
wear or damage. Rotate tires at the first sign of irregular
wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator system
turns on.
• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, and brake
master cylinder reservoir, and fill as needed.
• Check function of all interior and exterior lights.
Maintenance Plan
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” on the following page for
the required maintenance intervals.
Required Maintenance Intervals.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil
Change Indicator System:
Change oil and filter
Rotate the tires
Rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it oc-
curs before the oil indicator system turns on
Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals
as required
Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, and hoses
Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses
Inspect exhaust system
Inspect engine air filter if using in dusty or off-road
conditions
390 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Mileage or time passed (whichever
comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
If using your vehicle in dusty or off-road
conditions, inspect the air cleaner filter,
and replace if necessary.
XXX X X X X
Inspect the brake linings, replace if
necessary.
XX X X X X X
Inspect the front suspension, tie rod
ends and boot seals, replace if neces-
sary.
XX X X X X X
Inspect the CV joints. X X X X X X X
Inspect front accessory drive belt, ten-
sioner, idler pulley, and replace if nec-
essary.
X
Replace engine air cleaner filter. X X X
Replace air conditioning/cabin air filter. X X X X X X X
Replace spark plugs.* X
Flush and replace the engine coolant at
10 years or 150,000 miles
(240,000 km) whichever comes first.
XX
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 391
Mileage or time passed (whichever
comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Inspect and replace PCV valve if nec-
essary.
X
* The spark plug change interval is mileage based only,
yearly intervals do not apply.
WARNING!
• You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you
have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent me-
chanic.
• Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle
could result in a component malfunction and effect
vehicle handling and performance. This could cause
an accident.
392 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
2.4L Engine
1 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter 5 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 9 — Coolant Pressure Bottle
2 — Engine Oil Fill Cap 6 — Washer Fluid Reservoir 10 — Engine Oil Dipstick
3 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 7 — Battery
4 — Battery 8 — Coolant Pressure Cap
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 393
Checking Oil Level
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must be
maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to
check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully
warmed up engine is shut off.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings.
There are three possible dipstick types,
• Crosshatched zone.
• Crosshatched zone marked SAFE.
• Crosshatched zone marked with MIN at the low end of
the range and MAX at the high end of the range.
• Crosshatched zone marked with dimples at the MIN and
the MAX ends of the range.
NOTE: Always maintain the oil level within the crosshatch
markings on the dipstick.
Adding 1 quart (1.0 liters) of oil when the reading is at the
low end of the dipstick range will raise the oil level to the
high end of the range marking.
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will cause
aeration or loss of oil pressure. This could damage your
engine.
Adding Washer Fluid
The fluid reservoir is located in the front of the engine
compartment. Be sure to check the fluid level in the
reservoir at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with wind-
shield washer solvent (not radiator antifreeze) and operate
the system for a few seconds to flush out the residual
washer fluid.
When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, take some
washer fluid, apply it to a cloth or towel, and wipe clean
the wiper blades; this will help blade performance.
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system in
cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This rating
information can be found on most washer fluid containers.
394 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around the
washer solution.
Maintenance-Free Battery
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.
You will never have to add water, nor is periodic mainte-
nance required.
WARNING!
• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid to
contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean over
a battery when attaching clamps. If acid splashes in
eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with
large amounts of water. Refer to “Jump Starting
Procedure” in “In Case Of Emergency” for further
information.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep flame
or sparks away from the battery. Do not use a booster
battery or any other booster source with an output
greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable clamps to
touch each other.
• Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories con-
tain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after
handling.
CAUTION!
• It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to the
negative post. Battery posts are marked positive (+)
and negative (-) and are identified on the battery
case. Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal
posts and free of corrosion.
• If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the
vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables before
connecting the charger to the battery. Do not use a
“fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 395
DEALER SERVICE
An authorized dealer has the qualified service personnel,
special tools, and equipment to perform all service opera-
tions in an expert manner. Service Manuals are available
which include detailed service information for your ve-
hicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before attempting any
procedure yourself.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control sys-
tems may void your warranty and could result in civil
penalties being assessed against you.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If you
have any doubt about your ability to perform a service
job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
Engine Oil
Change Engine Oil
Refer to the “Scheduled Servicing” in this section for the
proper maintenance intervals.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change inter-
vals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), 12 months or 350
hours of engine run time, whichever comes first. The 350
hours of engine run or idle time is generally only a concern
for fleet customers.
Engine Oil Selection — 2.4L Engine
For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only rec-
ommends engine oils that are API certified and meet the
requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-6395.
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
Identification Symbol
This symbol means that the oil has
been certified by the American Pe-
troleum Institute (API). The manu-
facturer only recommends API Cer-
tified engine oils.
This symbol certifies 0W-20, 5W-20,
0W-30, 5W-30 and 10W-30 engine
oils.
396 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) — 2.4L Engine
Mopar SAE 0W-20 engine oil approved to FCA Material
Standard MS-6395 or equivalent is recommended for all
operating temperatures. This engine oil improves low
temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
engine oil fill cap location, refer to “Engine Compartment”
in this section.
Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certifi-
cation mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number
should not be used.
Synthetic Engine Oils
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recom-
mended oil quality requirements are met, and the recom-
mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes are
followed.
Synthetic engine oils which do not have both the engine oil
certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade
number should not be used.
Materials Added To Engine Oil
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the addi-
tion of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to the
engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its
performance may be impaired by supplemental additives.
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
environment. Contact an authorized dealer, service station
or governmental agency for advice on how and where used
oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area.
Engine Oil Filter
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter at
every engine oil change.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 397
Engine Oil Filter Selection
This manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type dispos-
able oil filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The
quality of replacement filters varies considerably. Only
high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient
service. Mopar engine oil filters are high quality oil filters
and are recommended.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” in this section for the
proper maintenance intervals.
NOTE: Be sure to follow the “Severe Duty Conditions”
maintenance interval if applicable.
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary
for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is
near the engine compartment before starting the ve-
hicle with the air induction system (air cleaner, hoses,
etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in serious
personal injury.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters varies
considerably. Only high quality filters should be used to
assure most efficient service. Mopar engine air cleaner
filters are a high quality filter and are recommended.
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner should
be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the
start of each warm season. This service should include
cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test.
Drive belt tension should also be checked at this time.
WARNING!
• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants ap-
proved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning
system. Some unapproved refrigerants are flam-
mable and can explode, injuring you. Other unap-
proved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the sys-
tem to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Warranty Information Book, located in your owner’s
information kit, for further warranty information.
(Continued)
398 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
WARNING! (Continued)
• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant un-
der high pressure. To avoid risk of personal injury or
damage to the system, adding refrigerant or any
repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be
done by an experienced technician.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
system as the chemicals can damage your air condition-
ing components. Such damage is not covered by the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling R-134a — If
Equipped
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoro-
carbon (HFC) that is an ozone-friendly substance. The
manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be
performed by an authorized dealer or other service facili-
ties using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system PAG
compressor oil and refrigerants.
A/C Air Filter
See an authorized dealer for service.
Body Lubrication
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be
lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease, such as
Mopar Spray White Lube to assure quiet, easy operation
and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to the applica-
tion of any lubricant, the parts concerned should be wiped
clean to remove dust and grit; after lubricating excess oil
and grease should be removed. Particular attention should
also be given to hood latching components to ensure
proper function. When performing other underhood ser-
vices, the hood latch, release mechanism and safety catch
should be cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as Mopar Lock
Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 399
Wiper Blades
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield and rear window periodically with a sponge or
soft cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove
accumulations of salt, waxes, or road film, and help reduce
streaking and smearing.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may
cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use washer
fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a
dry windshield or rear window.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
the windshield or rear window. Make sure that they are not
frozen to the glass before turning them on to avoid
damaging the blade. Keep the wiper blade out of contact
with petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending
on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor perfor-
mance of blades may be present with chattering, marks,
water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions are
present, clean the wiper blades or replace as necessary.
Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
CAUTION!
Do not allow the wiper arm to spring back against the
glass without the wiper blade in place or the glass may
be damaged.
400 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
1. Lift the wiper arm to raise the wiper blade off of the
glass, until the wiper arm is in the full up position.
2. To disengage the wiper blade from the wiper arm, flip
up the locking tab.
Windshield Wiper Arm
1—Wiper
2 — Locking Tab
3—WiperArm
Wiper Locking Assembly
1—Wiper
2 — Locking Tab
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 401
3. Tilt the lower end of the wiper blade away from the arm
and use one finger push the release tab toward the
wiper arm.
4. Slide the wiper blade down towards the base of the
wiper arm.
5. With the wiper blade disengaged, remove the wiper
blade from the wiper arm by holding the wiper arm
with one hand and separating the wiper blade from the
wiper arm with the other hand (move the wiper blade
down toward the base of the wiper arm and away from
the J hook in the end of the wiper arm).
6. Gently lower the wiper arm onto the glass.
Wiper Disengaging
1 — Locking Tab
2—Wiper
3 — Release Tab
Removing Wiper From Wiper Arm
1—Wiper
2 — Locking Tab
3 — Wiper Arm J Hook
402 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Installing The Front Wipers
1. Lift the wiper arm off of the glass, until the wiper arm is
in the full up position.
2. Position the wiper blade under the hook on the tip of the
wiper arm with the wiper locking tab open.
3. Insert the receiver bracket on the wiper assembly into
the hook on the tip of the arm through the opening in
the wiper blade under the locking tab.
4. Slide the wiper blade up into the hook on the wiper arm
until it is latched (engagement will be accompanied by
an audible click). Fold down the latch release tab and
snap it into its locked position.
5. Gently lower the wiper blade onto the glass.
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the
vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system;
or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle;
or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
have an authorized technician inspect the complete ex-
haust system and adjacent body areas for broken, dam-
aged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or
loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into
the passenger compartment. In addition, have the exhaust
system inspected each time the vehicle is raised for lubri-
cation or oil change. Replace as required.
WARNING!
• Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing CO, refer
to “Safety Tips” in “Safety” for further information.
• A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over
materials that can burn. Such materials might be
grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust
system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas
where your exhaust system can contact anything that
can burn.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 403
CAUTION!
• The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded
fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effective-
ness of the catalyst as an emissions control device
and may seriously reduce engine performance and
cause serious damage to the engine.
• Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. In
the event of engine malfunction, particularly involv-
ing engine misfire or other apparent loss of perfor-
mance, have your vehicle serviced promptly. Contin-
ued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic converter
will not require maintenance. However, it is important to
keep the engine properly tuned to assure proper catalyst
operation and prevent possible catalyst damage.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control sys-
tems can result in civil penalties being assessed against
you.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe and
abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop the
vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool. Service,
including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifications,
should be obtained immediately.
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter damage:
• Do not interrupt the ignition when the transmission is in
gear and the vehicle is in motion.
• Do not try to start the vehicle by pushing or towing the
vehicle.
• Do not idle the engine with any ignition components
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough idle
or malfunctioning operating conditions.
404 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Cooling System
WARNING!
• You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never open a cooling system pressure cap
when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
• Keep hands, tools, clothing, and jewelry away from
the radiator cooling fan when the hood is raised. The
fan starts automatically and may start at any time,
whether the engine is running or not.
• When working near the radiator cooling fan, discon-
nect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition to the
OFF mode. The fan is temperature controlled and can
start at any time the ignition is in the ON mode.
Coolant Checks
Check engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12
months (before the onset of freezing weather, where appli-
cable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or rusty in
appearance, the system should be drained, flushed and
refilled with fresh engine coolant (antifreeze). Check the
front of the A/C condenser for any accumulation of bugs,
leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently spraying water from a
garden hose vertically down the face of the condenser.
Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill
NOTE: Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to
severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is needed to
be added to the system please contact an authorized dealer.
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains visible
sediment, have an authorized dealer clean and flush with
OAT coolant (antifreeze) (conforming to MS.90032).
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” in this section for the
proper maintenance intervals.
Selection Of Coolant
Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifica-
tions” for further information.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 405
NOTE:
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than speci-
fied Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant
(antifreeze), may result in engine damage and may
decrease corrosion protection. Organic Additive Tech-
nology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not
be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Technology
(HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally
compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine
coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling system
in an emergency, the cooling system will need to be
drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT coolant
(conforming to MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as
soon as possible.
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine coolant
(antifreeze) products. Do not use additional rust inhibi-
tors or antirust products, as they may not be compatible
with the radiator engine coolant and may plug the
radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with propyl-
ene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze). Use of
propylene glycolbased engine coolant (antifreeze) is not
recommended.
• Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant prop-
erly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to
severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is needed
to be added to the system please contact an authorized
dealer.
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) that allows
extended maintenance intervals. This engine coolant (anti-
freeze) can be used up to ten years or 150,000 miles
(240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent reducing this
extended maintenance period, it is important that you use
the same engine coolant (OAT coolant conforming to
MS.90032) throughout the life of your vehicle.
Please review these recommendations for using Organic
Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze)
that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS.90032. When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):
• We recommend using Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10
Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km) Formula OAT (Organic
Additive Technology) that meets the requirements of
FCA Material Standard MS.90032.
406 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
• Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant
that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS.90032 and distilled water. Use higher concentrations
(not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below −34°F (−37°C)
are anticipated. Please contact an authorized dealer for
assistance.
• Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionized
water when mixing the water/engine coolant (anti-
freeze) solution. The use of lower quality water will
reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the engine
cooling system.
NOTE:
• It is the owner’s responsibility to maintain the proper
level of protection against freezing according to the
temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is
operated.
• Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant prop-
erly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to
severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is needed
to be added to the system, please contact a local autho-
rized dealer.
• Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is not recom-
mended and can result in cooling system damage. If
HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency,
have a authorized dealer drain, flush, and refill with
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) as soon as pos-
sible.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine
coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine coolant
(antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant
expansion bottle/recovery tank if so equipped.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
WARNING!
• Do not open hot engine cooling system. Never add
engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine is over-
heated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an
overheated engine. Heat causes pressure to build up
in the cooling system. To prevent scalding or injury,
do not remove the pressure cap while the system is
hot or under pressure.
• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one speci-
fied for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine
damage may result.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 407
Disposal Of Used Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based coolant (antifreeze) is a regu-
lated substance requiring proper disposal. Check with your
local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your
community. To prevent ingestion by animals or children,
do not store ethylene glycol-based coolant in open contain-
ers or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground. If
ingested by a child or pet, seek emergency assistance
immediately. Clean up any ground spills immediately.
Coolant Level
The coolant expansion bottle provides a quick visual
method for determining that the coolant level is adequate.
With the engine off and cold, the level of the engine coolant
(antifreeze) in the bottle should be between the “MIN” and
“MAX” marks.
As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory,
the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month.
When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to
maintain the proper level, it should be added to the coolant
bottle. Do not overfill.
Points To Remember
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming
from the front of the engine compartment. This is normally
a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high humidity
accumulating on the radiator and being vaporized when
the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine coolant (anti-
freeze) to enter the radiator.
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
• Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
• Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the
coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant (antifreeze)
needs to be added, the contents of the coolant expansion
bottle must also be protected against freezing.
• If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are
required, the cooling system should be pressure tested
for leaks.
408 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
• Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at a
minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032) and distilled water for proper corrosion pro-
tection of your engine which contains aluminum com-
ponents.
• Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow
hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean.
• Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install ONLY
the correct type thermostat. Other designs may result in
unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze) performance,
poor gas mileage, and increased emissions.
Brake System
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake
system components should be inspected periodically. Refer
to the “Maintenance Plan” in this section for the proper
maintenance intervals.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possi-
bly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or riding
on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake
temperatures, excessive lining wear, and possible
brake damage. You would not have your full braking
capacity in an emergency.
Brake Master Cylinder
The fluid in the master cylinder should be checked when
performing under hood services or immediately if the
“Brake Warning Light” is illuminated.
Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder area before
removing the cap. If necessary, add fluid to bring the fluid
level up to the requirements described on the brake fluid
reservoir. With disc brakes, fluid level can be expected to
fall as the brake pads wear. Brake fluid level should be
checked when pads are replaced. However, low fluid level
may be caused by a leak and a checkup may be needed.
Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Refer
to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifications”
for further information.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 409
WARNING!
• Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid.
Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical
Specifications” for further information. Using the
wrong type of brake fluid can severely damage your
brake system and/or impair its performance. The
proper type of brake fluid for your vehicle is also
identified on the original factory installed hydraulic
master cylinder reservoir.
• To avoid contamination from foreign matter or mois-
ture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has been
in a tightly closed container. Keep the master cylin-
der reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake fluid in
a open container absorbs moisture from the air
resulting in a lower boiling point. This may cause it
to boil unexpectedly during hard or prolonged brak-
ing, resulting in sudden brake failure. This could
result in a collision.
• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing the
brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also damage
painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be taken to
avoid its contact with these surfaces.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate
the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be
damaged, causing partial or complete brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
Manual Transmission — If Equipped
Lubricant Selection
Use only the manufacturers recommended transmission
fluid. Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical
Specifications” for further information.
Fluid Level Check
Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug. The fluid
level should be between the bottom of the fill hole and a
point not more than 3/16 inch (4.7 mm) below the bottom
of the hole.
Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper level.
Please see your authorized dealer for service.
410 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Frequency Of Fluid Change
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at
the factory will give satisfactory lubrication for the life of
the vehicle. Fluid changes are not necessary unless lubri-
cant has become contaminated with water.
NOTE: If contaminated with water, the fluid should be
changed immediately.
Automatic Transmission — If Equipped
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to
ensure optimum transmission performance and life. Use
only the manufacturer’s specified transmission fluid. Refer
to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifications”
for fluid specifications. It is important to maintain the
transmission fluid at the correct level using the recom-
mended fluid.
NOTE: No chemical flushes should be used in any trans-
mission; only the approved lubricant should be used.
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufactur-
er’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration in
transmission shift quality and/or torque converter
shudder. Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Techni-
cal Specifications” for fluid specifications.
Special Additives
The manufacturer strongly recommends against using any
special additives in the transmission. Automatic Transmis-
sion Fluid (ATF) is an engineered product and its perfor-
mance may be impaired by supplemental additives. There-
fore, do not add any fluid additives to the transmission.
The only exception to this policy is the use of special dyes
for diagnosing fluid leaks in six-speed transmissions.
Avoid using transmission sealers as they may adversely
affect seals.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as
the chemicals can damage your transmission compo-
nents. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 411
Fluid Level Check
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not require
adjustment under normal operating conditions. Routine
fluid level checks are not required; therefore the transmis-
sion has no dipstick. An authorized dealer can check your
transmission fluid level using special service tools. If you
notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunction, visit an
authorized dealer immediately to have the transmission
fluid level checked. Operating the vehicle with an im-
proper fluid level can cause severe transmission damage.
CAUTION!
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit an authorized
dealer immediately. Severe transmission damage may
occur. An authorized dealer has the proper tools to
adjust the fluid level accurately.
Fluid And Filter Changes
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at
the factory will provide satisfactory lubrication for the life
of the vehicle.
Routine fluid and filter changes are not required. However,
change the fluid and filter if the fluid becomes contami-
nated (with water, etc.), or if the transmission is disas-
sembled for any reason.
RAISING THE VEHICLE
In the case where it is necessary to raise the vehicle, go to
an authorized dealer or service station.
TIRES
Tire Safety Information
Tire safety information will cover aspects of the following
information: Tire Markings, Tire Identification Numbers,
Tire Terminology and Definitions, Tire Pressures, and Tire
Loading.
412 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Markings
NOTE:
• P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation.
Example: P215/65R15 95H.
• European — Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the
section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire size
designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
• LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the letters
“LT” that are molded into the sidewall preceding the
size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
• Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary emer-
gency use only. Temporary high pressure compact spare
tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded into the sidewall
preceding the size designation. Example: T145/80D18
103M.
• High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design stan-
dards and it begins with the tire diameter molded into
the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
Tire Markings
1 — U.S. DOT Safety
Standards Code (TIN)
4 — Maximum Load
2 — Size Designation 5 — Maximum Pressure
3 — Service Description 6 — Treadwear, Traction
and Temperature Grades
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 413
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards, or
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards, or
TorS= Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
–
Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
–
⬙R⬙ means radial construction, or
–
⬙D⬙ means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
414 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
EXAMPLE:
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
–
A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
–
A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under cer-
tain operating conditions
–
The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating condi-
tions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:
• XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
• LL = Light load tire or
• C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 415
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire;
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with
white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the date
code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for
the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as
mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the
outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard side of
the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
–
This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire safety standards
and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
–
03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
–
01 means the year 2001
–
Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the
tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
416 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term Definition
B-Pillar The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located be-
hind the front door.
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the
vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less
than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. In-
flation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch)
or kPa (kilopascals).
Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold
tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is
molded into the sidewall.
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended cold tire inflation pressure as
shown on the tire placard.
Tire Placard A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s
loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and the recom-
mended cold tire inflation pressures.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 417
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on
the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s
side door.
Check the inflation pressure of each tire, including the
spare tire (if equipped), at least monthly and inflate to the
recommended pressure for your vehicle.
Example Tire Placard Location (Door)
Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar)
418 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information about the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and spare
tires.
Tires — General Information
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Four primary areas
are affected by improper tire pressure:
• Safety and Vehicle Stability
• Economy
• Tread Wear
• Ride Comfort
Safety
WARNING!
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause collisions.
• Underinflation increases tire flexing and can result
in overheating and tire failure.
• Overinflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can cause
damage that result in tire failure.
(Continued)
Tire And Loading Information Placard
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 419
WARNING! (Continued)
• Overinflated or underinflated tires can affect vehicle
handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in loss of
vehicle control.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems.
You could lose control of your vehicle.
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle
to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right
or left.
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom-
mended cold tire inflation pressure.
Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the stability
of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish
response or over responsiveness in the steering.
NOTE:
• Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause
erratic and unpredictable steering response.
• Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the
vehicle to drift left or right.
Fuel Economy
Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling resistance
resulting in higher fuel consumption.
Tread Wear
Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause abnormal
wear patterns and reduced tread life, resulting in the need
for earlier tire replacement.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver’s side B-Pillar or rear edge of the driver’s side door.
At least once a month:
• Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality
pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual
judgement when determining proper inflation. Tires
may look properly inflated even when they are under-
inflated.
• Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage.
420 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always
reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent moisture
and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could
damage the valve stem.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
“cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure is
defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been
driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile
(1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. The
cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum
inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with tem-
perature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
the Winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire inflation
pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa), which
equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this outside
temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or condi-
tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds,
maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very impor-
tant. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading
may be required for high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to
an authorized tire dealer or original equipment vehicle
dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading
and cold tire inflation pressures.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum
load is dangerous. The added strain on your tires could
cause them to fail. You could have a serious collision.
Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity
at continuous speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h).
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 421
Radial Ply Tires
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on
your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly.
The instability could cause a collision. Always use
radial ply tires in sets of four. Never combine them
with other types of tires.
Tire Repair
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it meets
the following criteria:
• The tire has not been driven on when flat.
• The damage is only on the tread section of your tire
(sidewall damage is not repairable).
• The puncture is no greater thana¼ofaninch (6 mm).
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and
additional information.
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have experi-
enced a loss of pressure should be replaced immediately with
another Run Flat tire of identical size and service description
(Load Index and Speed Symbol). Replace the tire pressure
sensor as well as it is not designed to be reused.
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles
(80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of inflation
pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is referred to as the
Run Flat mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire
inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a
Run Flat tire reaches the run flat mode it has limited
driving capabilities and needs to be replaced immediately.
A Run Flat tire is not repairable. When a run flat tire is
changed after driving with underinflated tire condition,
please replace the TPM sensor as it is not designed to be
reused when driven under run flat mode (14 psi (96 kPa))
condition.
NOTE: TPM Sensor must be replaced after driving the
vehicle on a flat tire condition.
It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at full
capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the run flat
mode.
See the tire pressure monitoring section for more informa-
tion.
422 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
spin your vehicle’s wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping.
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “In Case Of Emer-
gency” for further information.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated
by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or
failure. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do
not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph
(48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continuously when
you are stuck, and do not let anyone near a spinning
wheel, no matter what the speed.
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires to
help you in determining when your tires should be re-
placed.
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes a 1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm). When the tread is
worn to the tread wear indicators, the tire should be
replaced.
Refer to “Replacement Tires” in this section for further
information.
Tire Tread
1—WornTire
2—NewTire
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 423
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors
including, but not limited to:
• Driving style.
• Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation pressures can
cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire
tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread
life, resulting in the need for earlier tire replacement.
• Distance driven.
• Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or
higher, and Summer tires typically have a reduced tread
life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle scheduled
maintenance is highly recommended.
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
You could lose control and have a collision resulting in
serious injury or death.
NOTE: Wheel Valve Stem must be replaced as well when
installing new tires due to wear and tear in existing tires.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact with
oil, grease, and gasoline.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressures. The manu-
facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equivalent
to the originals in size, quality and performance when
replacement is needed. Refer to the paragraph on “Tread
Wear Indicators” in this section. Refer to the Tire and
Loading Information placard or the Vehicle Certification
Label for the size designation of your tire. The Load Index
and Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the
original equipment tire sidewall.
See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in the “Tire Safety
Information” section of this manual for more information
relating to the Load Index and Speed Symbol of a tire.
It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two rear
tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously affect
your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a wheel, make
sure that the wheel’s specifications match those of the
original wheels.
424 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
It is recommended you contact an authorized tire dealer or
original equipment dealer with any questions you may
have on tire specifications or capability. Failure to use
equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the
safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
WARNING!
• Do not use a tire, wheel size, load rating, or speed
rating other than that specified for your vehicle.
Some combinations of unapproved tires and wheels
may change suspension dimensions and perfor-
mance characteristics, resulting in changes to steer-
ing, handling, and braking of your vehicle. This can
cause unpredictable handling and stress to steering
and suspension components. You could lose control
and have a collision resulting in serious injury or
death. Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load
ratings approved for your vehicle.
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or capacity,
other than what was originally equipped on your
vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load index could
result in tire overloading and failure. You could lose
control and have a collision.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having ad-
equate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer read-
ings.
Tire Types
All Season Tires — If Equipped
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (Spring,
Summer, Fall, and Winter). Traction levels may vary be-
tween different all season tires. All season tires can be
identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on the
tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four; failure
to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of
your vehicle.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 425
Summer Or Three Season Tires — If Equipped
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry condi-
tions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or on ice.
If your vehicle is equipped with Summer tires, be aware
these tires are not designed for Winter or cold driving
conditions. Install Winter tires on your vehicle when am-
bient temperatures are less than 40°F (5°C) or if roads are
covered with ice or snow. For more information, contact an
authorized dealer.
Summer tires do not contain the all season designation or
mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall. Use
Summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may
adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice conditions. You
could lose vehicle control, resulting in severe injury or
death. Driving too fast for conditions also creates the
possibility of loss of vehicle control.
Snow Tires
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires
during the Winter. Snow tires can be identified by a
“mountain/snowflake” symbol on the tire sidewall.
If you need snow tires, select tires
equivalent in size and type to the origi-
nal equipment tires. Use snow tires only
in sets of four; failure to do so may
adversely affect the safety and handling
of your vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should not
be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph (120 km/h).
For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to original
equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended
safe operating speeds, loading and cold tire inflation
pressures.
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid and
traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer
than that of non-studded tires. Some states prohibit stud-
ded tires; therefore, local laws should be checked before
using these tire types.
426 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Spare Tires — If Equipped
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit instead
of a spare tire, please refer to “Tire Service Kit” in “In Case
Of Emergency” for further information.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a
compact or limited use temporary spare installed.
Damage to the vehicle may result.
Refer to the “Towing Requirements - Tires” in “Starting
And Operating” for restrictions when towing with a spare
tire designated for temporary emergency use.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And
Wheel — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and wheel
equivalent in look and function to the original equipment
tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire rotation for
your vehicle. If your vehicle has this option, refer to an
authorized tire dealer for the recommended tire rotation
pattern.
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only.
You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a compact
spare by looking at the spare tire description on the Tire
and Loading Information Placard located on the driver’s
side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire. Compact
spare tire descriptions begin with the letter “T” or “S”
preceding the size designation. Example: T145/80D18
103M.
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equipment
tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled on
your vehicle at the first opportunity.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire.
Do not install more than one compact spare tire and wheel
on the vehicle at any given time.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 427
WARNING!
Compact and collapsible spares are for temporary
emergency use only. With these spares, do not drive
more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares
have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire
needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings,
which apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result
in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Full Size Spare — If Equipped
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only.
This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the
front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare
tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to
the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size spare
tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as your
original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the original
equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first
opportunity.
Limited Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use
only. This tire is identified by a label located on the limited
use spare wheel. This label contains the driving limitations
for this spare. This tire may look like the original equipped
tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not.
Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. Since it is not the same as your original equip-
ment tire, replace (or repair) the original equipment tire
and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity.
WARNING!
Limited use spares are for emergency use only. Instal-
lation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the
speed listed on the limited use spare wheel. Keep
inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on
your Tire and Loading Information Placard located on
the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s
side door. Replace (or repair) the original equipment
tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it on your
vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle
control.
428 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Chains (Traction Devices)
Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body clear-
ance. Follow these recommendations to guard against
damage:
• Traction device must be of proper size for the tire, as
recommended by the traction device manufacturer.
• Install on front tires only.
• For a 215/65R16 tire, use of a snow traction device with
a maximum projection of 7 mm beyond the tire profile is
recommended.
• No other tire sizes are recommended for use with a tire
chain or traction device.
NOTE: Any aftermarket tire add on like tire chains may
effect the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) feature
performance.
WARNING!
Using tires of different size and type (M+S, Snow)
between front and rear axles can cause unpredictable
handling. You could lose control and have a collision.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the
following precautions:
• Because of restricted traction device clearance be-
tween tires and other suspension components, it is
important that only traction devices in good condi-
tion are used. Broken devices can cause serious
damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise occurs
that could indicate device breakage. Remove the
damaged parts of the device before further use.
• Install device as tightly as possible and then re-
tighten after driving about ½ mile (0.8 km).
• Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large
bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
• Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pave-
ment.
• Observe the traction device manufacturer’s instruc-
tions on the method of installation, operating speed,
and conditions for use. Always use the suggested
operating speed of the device manufacturer’s if it is
less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Do not use traction devices on a compact spare tire.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 429
Tire Rotation Recommendations
The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at
different loads and perform different steering, handling,
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
unequal rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires. The
benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggres-
sive tread designs such as those on On/Off Road type tires.
Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain mud,
snow, and wet traction levels, and contribute to a smooth,
quiet ride.
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” for the proper mainte-
nance intervals. The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear
should be corrected prior to rotation being performed.
The suggested Front Wheel Drive (FWD) rotation method
is the “forward cross” shown in the following diagram.
This rotation pattern does not apply to some directional
tires that must not be reversed.
The suggested Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Tire rotation
method is the “rearward cross” shown in the following
diagram.
Front Wheel Drive (FWD) Tire Rotation
430 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
CAUTION!
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles depends
on tires of equal size, type and circumference on each
wheel. Any difference in tire size can cause damage to
the power transfer unit. Tire rotation schedule should
be followed to balance tire wear.
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories were established
by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration.
The specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manu-
facturer in each category is shown on the sidewall of the
tires on your vehicle.
All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal
safety requirements in addition to these grades.
Treadwear
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the
actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices, and differences in road charac-
teristics and climate.
Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Tire Rotation
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 431
Traction Grades
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A,
B, and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop
on wet pavement, as measured under controlled condi-
tions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt
and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction
performance.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.
Temperature Grades
The Temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause the material of
the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C
corresponds to a level of performance, which all pas-
senger vehicle tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory
test wheel, than the minimum required by law.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive load-
ing, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
STORING THE VEHICLE
If the vehicle should remain stationary for more than a
month, observe the following precautions:
• Park your vehicle in a covered, dry and possibly airy
location the windows open slightly.
• Check that the Electric Park Brake is not engaged.
• Disconnect the negative (-) terminal from the battery
post and be sure that the battery is fully charged. During
storage check battery charge quarterly.
432 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
• If you do not disconnect the battery from the electrical
system, check the battery charge every 30 days.
• Clean and protect the painted parts by applying protec-
tive waxes.
• Clean and protect polished metal parts by applying
protective waxes.
• Apply talcum powder to the front and rear wiper blades
and leave raised from the glass.
• Cover the vehicle with an appropriate cover taking care
not to damage the painted surface by dragging across
dirty surfaces. Do not use plastic sheeting which will not
allow the evaporation of moisture present on the surface
of the vehicle.
• Inflate the tires at a pressure of +7.25 psi (+0.5 bar)
higher than recommended on the tire placard and check
it periodically.
• Do not drain the engine cooling system.
• Whenever you leave the vehicle stationary for two
weeks or more, idle the engine for approximately five
minutes, with the air conditioning system on and high
fan speed. This will ensure proper lubrication of the
system, thus minimizing the possibility of damage to the
compressor when the vehicle is put back into operation.
NOTE: When the vehicle has not been started or driven for
at least 30 days, an Extended Park Start Procedure is
required to start the vehicle.
Refer to “Starting The Engine” in “Starting And Operat-
ing” for further information.
CAUTION!
Before removal of the positive and negative terminals
to the battery, wait at least a minute with ignition
switch in the OFF position and close the driver’s door.
When reconnecting the positive and negative terminals
to the battery be sure the ignition switch is in the OFF
position and the driver’s door is closed.
BODYWORK
Protection From Atmospheric Agents
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geographic
locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads passable in
snow and ice and those that are sprayed on trees and road
surfaces during other seasons are highly corrosive to the
metal in your vehicle. Outside parking, which exposes your
vehicle to airborne contaminants, road surfaces on which the
vehicle is operated, extreme hot or cold weather and other
extreme conditions will have an adverse effect on paint,
metal trim, and underbody protection.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 433
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion resis-
tance built into your vehicle.
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint
and protective coatings from your vehicle.
The most common causes are:
• Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
• Stone and gravel impact.
• Insects, tree sap and tar.
• Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
Body And Underbody Maintenance
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly using
mild (neutral Ph) soap and water to maintain their luster
and to prevent corrosion. Wash wheels with the same soap
solution recommended for the body of the vehicle and
remember to always wash when the surfaces are not hot to
the touch.
Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration caused by salt,
sodium chloride, magnesium chloride, calcium chloride,
etc., and other road chemicals used to melt ice or control
dust on dirt roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge and mild soap
to wipe away promptly. Do not use harsh chemicals or a
stiff brush. They can damage the wheel’s protective coating
that helps keep them from corroding and tarnishing.
CAUTION!
Avoid products or automatic car washes that use acidic
solutions or strong alkaline additives or harsh brushes.
Many aftermarket wheel cleaners and automatic car
washes may damage the wheel’s protective finish.
Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. Only car wash soap, Mopar Wheel
Cleaner or equivalent is recommended.
When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including excessive
brake dust, care must be taken in the selection of tire and
wheel cleaning chemicals and equipment to prevent dam-
age to the wheels. Mopar Wheel Treatment or Mopar
Chrome Cleaner or their equivalent is recommended or
select a non-abrasive, non-acidic cleaner for aluminum or
chrome wheels.
434 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush,
metal polishes or oven cleaner. These products may
damage the wheel’s protective finish. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Only car wash soap, Mopar Wheel Cleaner or equiva-
lent is recommended.
NOTE: If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for an
extended period after cleaning the wheels with wheel
cleaner, drive your vehicle and apply the brakes to remove
the water droplets from the brake components. This activ-
ity will remove the red rust on the brake rotors and prevent
vehicle vibration when braking.
Dark Vapor Chrome, Black Satin Chrome, or Low Gloss
Clear Coat Wheels
CAUTION!
If your vehicle is equipped with these specialty
wheels, DO NOT USE wheel cleaners, abrasives, or
polishing compounds. They will permanently damage
this finish and such damage is not covered by the New
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
Vehicle Limited Warranty. HAND WASH ONLY US-
ING MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT
CLOTH. Used on a regular basis; this is all that is
required to maintain this finish.
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights and fog
lights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage
than glass headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution followed
by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 435
Preserving The Bodywork
Washing
• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your vehicle
in the shade using Mopar Car Wash, or a mild car wash
soap, and rinse the panels completely with clear water.
• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumulated
on your vehicle, use Mopar Super Kleen Bug and Tar
Remover to remove.
• Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as Mopar Cleaner
Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect your
paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint.
• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish.
CAUTION!
• Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials such
as steel wool or scouring powder that will scratch
metal and painted surfaces.
•
Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8,274 kPa)
can result in damage or removal of paint and decals.
Special Care
• If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive near
the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once a
month.
• It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges of
the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear and
open.
• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
considered the responsibility of the owner.
• If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar
cause that destroys the paint and protective coating,
have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The cost
of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the
owner.
• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well
packaged and sealed.
• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider mud
or stone shields behind each wheel.
• Use Mopar Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as
possible. An authorized dealer has touch up paint to
match the color of your vehicle.
436 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
INTERIORS
Seats And Fabric Parts
Use Mopar Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and
carpeting.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in closed
areas they may cause respiratory harm.
Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure — If
Equipped
Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following manner:
• Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting with
a clean, dry towel.
• Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.
• For tough stains, apply Mopar Total Clean, or a mild
soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain.
Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
• For grease stains, apply Mopar Multi-Purpose Cleaner
to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain. Use a fresh,
damp towel to remove soap residue.
• Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of
protectants on Stain Repel products.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical solvents
or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric. Sun
damage can also weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or
lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the vehicle
to wash them. Dry with a soft cloth.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
buckles do not work properly.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not
disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt assemblies
must be replaced after a collision if they have been
damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.).
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 437
Plastic And Coated Parts
Use Mopar Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
CAUTION!
• Direct contact of air fresheners, insect repellents,
suntan lotions, or hand sanitizers to the plastic,
painted, or decorated surfaces of the interior may
cause permanent damage. Wipe away immediately.
• Damage caused by these type of products may not be
covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
1. Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap solution may be
used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
cloth.
2. Dry with a soft cloth.
Leather Parts
Mopar Total Clean is specifically recommended for leather
upholstery.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt can
act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and
should be removed promptly with a damp cloth. Stubborn
soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and Mopar
Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid soaking your
leather upholstery with any liquid. Please do not use
polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents, or
ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather upholstery.
Application of a leather conditioner is not required to
maintain the original condition.
NOTE: If equipped with light colored leather, it tends to
show any foreign material, dirt, and fabric dye transfer
more so than darker colors. The leather is designed for easy
cleaning, and FCA recommends Mopar total care leather
cleaner applied on a cloth to clean the leather seats as
needed.
438 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
CAUTION!
Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or Ketone
based cleaning products to clean leather upholstery, as
damage to the upholstery may result.
Glass Surfaces
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with
Mopar Glass Cleaner, or any commercial household-type
glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type cleaner. Use
caution when cleaning the inside rear window equipped
with electric defrosters or windows equipped with radio
antennas. Do not use scrapers or other sharp instruments
that may scratch the elements.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the
towel or cloth that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
directly on the mirror.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 439
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
䡵 IDENTIFICATION DATA...................442
▫ Vehicle Identification Number .............442
䡵 WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS . .443
▫ Torque Specifications ....................443
䡵 FUEL REQUIREMENTS ...................444
▫ 2.4L Engine ...........................444
▫ Reformulated Gasoline ..................445
▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends ...............445
▫ E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles.........445
▫ CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications ......446
▫ MMT In Gasoline .......................446
▫ Materials Added To Fuel .................446
▫ Fuel System Cautions ....................447
▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings ...............447
䡵 FLUID CAPACITIES ......................448
䡵 FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS ................449
▫ Engine ..............................449
▫ Chassis .............................450
9
IDENTIFICATION DATA
Vehicle Identification Number
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found on the
left front corner of the windshield and is visible from the
outside of the vehicle. The VIN number also is stamped
into the right front body, on the front floor. With the right
front seat in the rear most position, a door in the carpet can
be opened to reveal the VIN. It also appears on the
Automobile Information Disclosure Label affixed to a
window on your vehicle, the vehicle registration, and the
title.
Vehicle Identification Number
Right Front Body VIN Location
Opening The VIN Door
442 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure that
the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any time a
wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the vehicle, the
lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using a properly cali-
brated torque wrench using a high quality six sided (hex)
deep wall socket.
Torque Specifications
Lug Nut/Bolt
Torque
**Lug Nut/Bolt
Size
Lug Nut/Bolt
Socket Size
100 Ft-Lbs
(135 N·m)
M12 x 1.25 19 mm
**Use only an authorized dealer recommended lug nuts/
bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before tightening.
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting the
tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles.
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until each
nut/bolt has been tightened twice. Ensure that the socket is
fully engaged on the lug nut/bolt (do not insert it half-
way).
NOTE: If in doubt about the correct tightness, have them
checked with a torque wrench by an authorized dealer or
service station.
Wheel Mounting Surface
9
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 443
After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut/bolt torque to be
sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly seated against
the wheel.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do
not tighten the lug nuts/bolts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
2.4L Engine
All available gasoline engines are de-
signed to meet all emissions regulations
and provide excellent fuel economy and
performance when using high quality
unleaded “regular” gasoline having a
octane rating of 87 using the (R+M)/2
method. The use of premium gasoline is
not recommended, as it will not provide any benefit over
regular gasoline in these engines.
While operating on gasoline with an octane number of 87,
hearing a light knocking sound from the engine is not a
cause for concern. However, if the engine is heard making
a heavy knocking sound, see your dealer immediately. Use
of gasoline with an octane number lower than 87 can cause
engine failure and may void or not be covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard
starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these
symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before consider-
ing service for the vehicle.
Torque Patterns
444 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Reformulated Gasoline
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline”.
Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates and are specifi-
cally blended to reduce vehicle emissions and improve air
quality.
The use of reformulated gasoline is recommended. Prop-
erly blended reformulated gasoline will provide improved
performance and durability of engine and fuel system
components.
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxygen-
ates such as ethanol.
CAUTION!
DO NOT use E-85, gasoline containing methanol, or
gasoline containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15). Use
of these blends may result in starting and drivability
problems, damage critical fuel system components,
cause emissions to exceed the applicable standard,
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
and/or cause the Malfunction Indicator Light to illu-
minate. Please observe pump labels as they should
clearly communicate if a fuel contains greater than 15%
ethanol (E-15).
Problems that result from using gasoline containing more
than 15% ethanol (E-15) or gasoline containing methanol are
not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may void or
not be covered under New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles
Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with gasoline
containing up to 15% ethanol (E-15). Gasoline with higher
ethanol content may void the New Vehicle Limited War-
ranty.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85 fuel,
the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:
• Operate in a lean mode.
• OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on.
• Poor engine performance.
• Poor cold start and cold drivability.
• Increased risk for fuel system component corrosion.
9
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 445
CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications
Modifications that allow the engine to run on compressed
natural gas (CNG) or liquid propane (LP) may result in
damage to the engine, emissions, and fuel system compo-
nents. Problems that result from running CNG or LP are
not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may void or
not be covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
MMT In Gasoline
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl (MMT) is
a manganese-containing metallic additive that is blended
into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline blended
with MMT provides no performance advantage beyond
gasoline of the same octane number without MMT. Gaso-
line blended with MMT reduces spark plug life and
reduces emissions system performance in some vehicles.
The manufacturer recommends that gasoline without
MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content of
gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump,
therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether
the gasoline contains MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal
and California reformulated gasoline.
Materials Added To Fuel
Besides using unleaded gasoline with the proper octane
rating, gasolines that contain detergents, corrosion and
stability additives are recommended. Using gasolines that
have these additives will help improve fuel economy,
reduce emissions, and maintain vehicle performance.
Designated TOP TIER Detergent Gaso-
line contains a higher level of detergents
to further aide in minimizing engine
and fuel system deposits. When avail-
able, the usage of TOP TIER Detergent
gasoline is recommended. Visit
www.toptiergas.com for a list of TOP
TIER Detergent Gasoline Retailers.
Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning agents should be
avoided. Many of these materials intended for gum and
varnish removal may contain active solvents or similar
ingredients. These can harm fuel system gasket and dia-
phragm materials.
446 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Fuel System Cautions
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
• The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by Federal
law. Using leaded gasoline can impair engine perfor-
mance and damage the emissions control system.
• An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune or
malfunctioning and may require immediate service.
Contact an authorized dealer for service assistance.
• The use of fuel additives, which are now being sold
as octane enhancers, is not recommended. Most of
these products contain high concentrations of metha-
nol. Fuel system damage or vehicle performance
problems resulting from the use of such fuels or
additives is not the responsibility of the manufac-
turer and may void or not be covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions control
system can result in civil penalties being assessed against
you.
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon mon-
oxide poisoning:
• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as a
garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the vehicle
is stopped in an open area with the engine running
for more than a short period, adjust the ventilation
system to force fresh, outside air into the vehicle.
• Guard against carbon monoxide with proper main-
tenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every
time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal condi-
tions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with
all side windows fully open.
9
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 447
FLUID CAPACITIES
U.S. Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
2.4 Liter Gasoline Engine 13.5 Gallons 51 Liters
Engine Oil With Filter
2.4 Liter Gasoline Engine (SAE 0W-
20, API Certified)
5.5 Quarts 5.2 Liters
Cooling System*
2.4 Liter Gasoline Engine (Mopar
Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/
150,000 Mile Formula)
6.8 Quarts 6.5 Liters
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
448 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
Engine
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant We recommend you use Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10
Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 Kilometers) Formula OAT (Or-
ganic Additive Technology) meeting the requirements of
FCA Material Standard MS.90032.
Engine Oil – 2.4 Liter Engine We recommend you use SAE 0W-20 API Certified Engine
Oil, meeting the requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS-6395 such as Mopar, Pennzoil, and Shell Helix. Refer to
your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade.
Engine Oil Filter We recommend you use a Mopar Engine Oil Filter.
Spark Plugs We recommend you use Mopar Spark Plugs.
Fuel Selection – 2.4 Liter Engine 87 Octane, 0-15% Ethanol
9
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 449
Chassis
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Manual Transmission – If Equipped We recommend you use Mopar C Series Manual & Dual
Dry Clutch Transmission Fluid.
Six-Speed Automatic Transmission (FWD Models) – If
Equipped
Use only Mopar AW-1 Automatic Transmission Fluid, or
equivalent. Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the
function or performance of your transmission.
Nine-Speed Automatic Transmission (4WD Models) – If
Equipped
Use only Mopar ZF 8&9 Speed ATF Automatic Transmis-
sion Fluid, or equivalent. Failure to use the correct fluid
may affect the function or performance of your transmis-
sion.
Power Transfer Unit (PTU) – If Equipped We recommended you use Mopar Front Axle/PTU Syn-
thetic Axle Lubricant SAE 75W-90 (API GL-5).
Rear Differential (RDM) – If Equipped We recommended you use Mopar Rear Axle/RDM Syn-
thetic Axle Lubricant SAE 75W-90 (API GL-5).
Brake Master Cylinder We recommend you use Mopar DOT 3.
Refrigerant Use Only Refrigerant R134a
Charge Amounts:
2.4L Engines — 567g (1.25lb)
Compressor Oil Use Only PAG Oil RL-897
2.4L Engines — 135ml (4.56oz)
450 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
MULTIMEDIA
CONTENTS
䡵 UCONNECT SYSTEMS ...................453
䡵 DRAG & DROP MENU BAR ...............453
䡵 CYBERSECURITY .......................454
䡵 UCONNECT SETTINGS ...................456
▫ Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect 3
Settings ..............................456
▫ Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect 4
Settings ..............................472
▫ Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect
4C/4C NAV Settings ....................486
䡵 STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS —
IF EQUIPPED ..........................504
▫ Radio Operation........................504
▫ Media Mode ..........................504
䡵 AUX/USB/MP3 CONTROL ................505
䡵 RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES . . .506
▫ Regulatory And Safety Information ..........506
䡵 UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK
TIPS .................................507
▫ Introducing Uconnect ....................507
▫ Get Started ...........................509
▫ Basic Voice Commands ...................510
▫ Radio ...............................510
▫ Media ...............................512
▫ Phone ...............................514
▫ Voice Text Reply — If Equipped ............516
▫ Climate ..............................517
▫ Navigation (4C NAV) — If Equipped .........519
▫ SiriusXM Guardian (4C/4C NAV) —
If Equipped ...........................520
10
▫ Register (4C/4C NAV) ...................520
▫ Vehicle Health Report/Alert (4C/4C NAV) .....521
▫ Mobile App (4C/4C NAV) ................521
▫ SiriusXM Travel Link (4C NAV).............522
▫ Siri Eyes Free — If Equipped ..............522
▫ Using Do Not Disturb ...................524
▫ Android Auto — If Equipped ..............524
▫ Apple CarPlay — If Equipped ..............526
▫ General Information .....................527
▫ Additional Information ...................528
452 MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SYSTEMS
For detailed information about your Uconnect system or
pairing a phone to your Uconnect system, refer to your
Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement.
NOTE: Uconnect screen images are for illustration pur-
poses only and may not reflect exact software for your
vehicle.
DRAG & DROP MENU BAR
The Uconnect features and services in the main menu bar
are easily changed for your convenience. Simply follow
these steps:
Uconnect 4 Apps Menu
10
MULTIMEDIA 453
1. Press the “Apps
” button to open the App screen.
2. Press and hold, then drag the selected App to replace an
existing shortcut in the main menu bar.
The new shortcut will now be an active App/shortcut on
the main menu bar.
CYBERSECURITY
Your vehicle may be a connected vehicle and may be
equipped with both wired and wireless networks. These
networks allow your vehicle to send and receive informa-
tion. This information allows systems and features in your
vehicle to function properly.
Your vehicle may be equipped with certain security fea-
tures to reduce the risk of unauthorized and unlawful
access to vehicle systems and wireless communications.
Vehicle software technology continues to evolve over time
and FCA US LLC, working with its suppliers, evaluates
and takes appropriate steps as needed. Similar to a com-
puter or other devices, your vehicle may require software
updates to improve the usability and performance of your
systems or to reduce the potential risk of unauthorized and
unlawful access to your vehicle systems.
The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to your
vehicle systems may still exist, even if the most recent
version of vehicle software (such as Uconnect software) is
installed.
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Apps Menu
454 MULTIMEDIA
WARNING!
• It is not possible to know or to predict all of the
possible outcomes if your vehicle’s systems are
breached. It may be possible that vehicle systems,
including safety related systems, could be impaired
or a loss of vehicle control could occur that may
result in an accident involving serious injury or
death.
• ONLY insert media (e.g., USB, SD card, or CD) into
your vehicle if it came from a trusted source. Media
of unknown origin could possibly contain malicious
software, and if installed in your vehicle, it may
increase the possibility for vehicle systems to be
breached.
• As always, if you experience unusual vehicle behav-
ior, take your vehicle to your nearest authorized
dealer immediately.
NOTE:
• FCA US LLC or your dealer may contact you directly
regarding software updates.
• To help further improve vehicle security and minimize
the potential risk of a security breach, vehicle owners
should:
• Routinely check www.driveuconnect.com (U.S. Resi-
dents) or www.driveuconnect.ca (Canadian Residents)
to learn about available Uconnect software updates.
• Only connect and use trusted media devices (e.g.
personal mobile phones, USBs, CDs).
Privacy of any wireless and wired communications cannot
be assured. Third parties may unlawfully intercept infor-
mation and private communications without your consent.
For further information, refer to “Data Collection & Pri-
vacy” in your Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement or
“Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II) Cybersecurity” in
“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel”.
10
MULTIMEDIA 455
UCONNECT SETTINGS
The Uconnect system uses a combination of buttons on the
touchscreen and buttons on the faceplate located on the
center of the instrument panel that allow you to access and
change the customer programmable features. Many fea-
tures can vary by vehicle.
Buttons on the touchscreen are accessible on the Uconnect
touchscreen.
Buttons on the faceplate are located below, and beside the
Uconnect system in the center of the instrument panel. In
addition, there is a BROWSE/ENTER control knob located
on the right side. Turn the control knob to scroll through
menus and change settings (i.e., 30, 60, 90), push the center
of the control knob one or more times to select or change a
setting (i.e., ON, OFF).
Your Uconnect system may also have Screen Off on the
faceplate.
Push the Screen Off button on the faceplate to turn off the
Uconnect screen. Push the Screen Off button on the face-
plate a second time to turn the screen on.
Press the “X” icon on the touchscreen to exit out of a Menu
or certain option on the Uconnect system.
Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect 3
Settings
Push the “Settings” button on the touchscreen to display
the settings menu screen. In this mode the Uconnect
system allows you to access all of the available program-
mable features.
Uconnect 3 With 5–inch Display Buttons On The
Touchscreen And Buttons On The Faceplate
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
456 MULTIMEDIA
NOTE: Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a
time.
When making a selection, press the button on the touch-
screen to enter the desired mode. Once in the desired
mode, press and release the preferred setting and make
your selection. Once the setting is complete, press the
“X/Done” icon on the touchscreen to return to the previ-
ous menu. Pressing the Up or Down Arrow buttons on the
right side of the screen will allow you to toggle up or down
through the available settings.
NOTE: All settings should be changed with the ignition in
the ON/RUN position.
The following tables list the settings that may be found
within the Uconnect 3 radio, along with the selectable
options pertaining to each setting.
Display
After pressing the “Display” button on the touchscreen, the
following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Display Mode Auto Manual
Brightness +-
NOTE:
The “Brightness” setting can also be adjusted by selecting any point on the scale between the “+” and “-” buttons on
the touchscreen.
Language English Español Français
NOTE:
Selecting any option within the “Language” setting will change the language for all displayed nomenclature.
Touchscreen Beep Yes No
Voice Settings Voice Response Length Show Command List
10
MULTIMEDIA 457
Units
After pressing the “Units” button on the touchscreen, the
following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Units US Metric Custom
NOTE:
•
The “Metric” option changes the instrument cluster display to metric units of measure.
•
The “Custom” option allows setting the “Fuel Consumption” (L/100km, or km/L) and “Pressure” (kPa, or bar)
units of measure independently.
Clock & Date
After pressing the “Clock & Date” button on the touch-
screen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Set Time and Format 12 hour 24 hour AM PM
NOTE:
Within the “Set Time and Format” setting, press the corresponding arrow buttons on the touchscreen to adjust to the
correct time.
Set Time Hours +–
Set Time Minutes +–
458 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name Selectable Options
Set Date Up Arrow Down Arrow
NOTE:
Within the “Set Date” setting, press the corresponding arrow buttons on the touchscreen to adjust to the correct date.
Show Time Status — If
Equipped
On Off
Sync Time — If Equipped On Off
Safety/Assistance
After pressing the “Safety/Assistance” button on the
touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
ParkView Backup Camera
Delay
On Off
NOTE:
The “ParkView Backup Camera Delay” setting determines whether or not the screen will display the rear view image
with dynamic grid lines for up to ten seconds after the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE. This delay will be canceled
if the vehicle’s speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission is shifted into PARK, or the ignition is switched to
the OFF position.
10
MULTIMEDIA 459
Setting Name Selectable Options
ParkView Backup Camera
Active Guide Lines
On Off
NOTE:
The “ParkView Backup Camera Active Guide Lines” setting overlays the Rear Backup Camera image with active, or
dynamic, grid lines to help illustrate the width of the vehicle and its project back up path, based on the steering
wheel position when the option is checked. A dashed center line overlay indicates the center of the vehicle to assist
with parking or aligning to a hitch/receiver.
Forward Collision Warning
Plus (FCW+) Sensitivity — If
Equipped
Far Med Near
NOTE:
The “Forward Collision Warning Plus (FCW+) Sensitivity” setting determines at what relative distance the vehicle
directly in front of you needs to be at, before the system will warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle directly
in front of you, based on the option is selected. “Far” will give you the most amount of reaction time, whereas
“Near” will give you the least amount of reaction time, based on the distance between the two vehicles.
460 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name Selectable Options
Forward Collision Warning
Plus (FCW+) — If Equipped
Off Sound Only Sound and Brake
NOTE:
The “Forward Collision Warning Plus (FCW+)” setting includes Advanced Brake Assist (ABA). The ABA applies ad-
ditional brake pressure when the driver requests insufficient brake pressure to avoid a potential frontal collision.
When the “Sound Only” option is selected a chime will sound alerting you of a possible collision with the vehicle in
front of you and more brake pressure is needed. When the “Sound and Brake” option is selected, it will apply the
brakes to slow your vehicle in case of potential forward collision and sound an audible chime to alert you.
ParkSense — If Equipped Sound Only Sound and Display
Rear ParkSense Volume — If
Equipped
Low Medium High
LaneSense Warning — If
Equipped
Early Medium Late
NOTE:
The “LaneSense Warning” setting determines at what distance the LaneSense system will warn you, through steering
wheel feedback, of a possible lane departure.
10
MULTIMEDIA 461
Setting Name Selectable Options
LaneSense Strength — If
Equipped
Low Medium High
Blind Spot Alert — If
Equipped
Off Lights Lights and Chime
NOTE:
If your vehicle has experienced any damage in the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is not damaged,
the sensor may have become misaligned. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor alignment. A sen-
sor that is misaligned will result in the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) not operating to specification.
Rain Sensing Auto Wipers —
If Equipped
On Off
Electric Park Brake Service
Mode
Yes No
NOTE:
The “Electric Park Brake Service Mode” feature provides a means for a technician or vehicle owner to utilize a vehicle
integrated, menu driven system, to command the electric park brake retraction, to service the rear foundation brakes
(brake pads, calipers, rotors, etc.).
462 MULTIMEDIA
Brakes — If Equipped
After pressing the “Brakes” button on the touchscreen the
following setting will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Auto Park Brake On Off
Lights
After pressing the “Lights” button on the touchscreen, the
following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Headlight Sensitivity — If
Equipped
Level 1: minimum
sensitivity
Level 2: medium sen-
sitivity
Level 3: maximum sensitivity
NOTE:
The greater the sensitivity set, the less the external light variation required to turn on the lights (e.g. with a setting on
level 3 at sunset the headlights turn on earlier than in levels 1 and 2).
Headlight Off Delay 0 sec 30 sec 60 sec 90 sec
NOTE:
When the “Headlight Off Delay” feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of the amount of time the headlights
remain on after the engine is shut off.
10
MULTIMEDIA 463
Setting Name Selectable Options
Greeting Lights On Off
Automatic High Beam Head-
lamps — If Equipped
On Off
Daytime Running Lights On Off
Cornering Lights On Off
NOTE:
When the “Cornering Lights” feature is selected, if the steering wheel rotation angle is large or the turn signal indica-
tors are on, a light (incorporated in the fog light) will turn on, on the relevant side to improve visibility at night.
Flash Lights With Lock — If
Equipped
On Off
Interior Ambient Lights +-
NOTE:
The “Interior Ambient Lights” setting can also be adjusted by selecting any point on the scale between the “+” and
“-” buttons on the touchscreen.
464 MULTIMEDIA
Doors & Locks
After pressing the “Doors & Locks” button on the touch-
screen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Auto Unlock On Exit On Off
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, all doors will unlock when the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the PARK
or NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is opened.
Flash Lights With Lock On Off
Horn With Lock On Off
Horn With Remote Start — If Equipped On Off
Remote Door Unlock/Door Unlock Driver All
NOTE:
When “Driver” is selected, only the driver’s door will unlock on the first push of the key fob unlock button, you
must push the key fob unlock button twice to unlock the passenger’s doors. When “All” is selected, all of the doors
will unlock on the first press of the key fob unlock button. If “All” is programmed, all doors will unlock no matter
which Passive Entry equipped door handle is grasped. If “Driver” is programmed, only the driver’s door will unlock
when the driver’s door is grasped. Touching the handle more than once will only result in the driver’s door opening
once. If the driver’s door is opened, the interior door lock/unlock switch can be used to unlock all doors (or use key
fob).
10
MULTIMEDIA 465
Setting Name Selectable Options
Auto Door Locks — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, all doors will lock automatically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 12 mph
(20 km/h).
Auto Comfort Systems — If Equipped
After pressing the “Auto-On Comfort Systems” button on
the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Steering
Wheel With Vehicle Start — If Equipped
Off Remote Start All Starts
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, the driver’s heated seat and heated steering wheel will automatically turn on when
temperatures are below 40° F (4.4° C). When temperatures are above 80° F (26.7° C), the driver vented seat will turn
on.
466 MULTIMEDIA
Engine Off Options
After pressing the “Engine Off Options” button on the
touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Headlight Off Delay 0 sec 30 sec 60 sec 90 sec
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of the amount of time the headlights remain on after the en-
gine is shut off.
Radio Off Delay 0 min 20 min
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, the radio will stay on for a preset time after the ignition key is turned to STOP/OFF.
10
MULTIMEDIA 467
Audio
After pressing the “Audio” button on the touchscreen, the
following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Equalizer Bass Mid Treble
NOTE:
When in this display you may adjust the “Bass”, “Mid”, and “Treble” settings. Adjust the settings with the “+” and
“–” setting buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any point on the scale between the “+” and “–” buttons on the
touchscreen. Bass/Mid/Treble also allow you to simply slide your finger up or down to change the setting as well as
press directly on the desired setting.
Balance/Fade Up Arrow
Button
Down Ar-
row Button
Left Arrow
Button
Right
Arrow
Button
Center “C”
Button
NOTE:
When in this display you may adjust the “Balance/Fade” of the audio by using the “Arrow” button on the touch-
screen to adjust the sound level from the front and rear or right and left side speakers. Press the “Center ‘C’ Button”
on the touchscreen to reset the balance and fade to the factory setting.
468 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name Selectable Options
Speed Adjusted Volume Off 1 2 3
Surround Sound — If Equipped On Off
Loudness On Off
NOTE:
The “Loudness” feature improves sound quality at lower volumes when enabled.
AUX Volume Offset — If Equipped +-
NOTE:
The “AUX Volume Offset” feature provides the ability to tune the audio level for portable devices connected through
the AUX input.
Phone/Bluetooth
After pressing the “Phone/Bluetooth” button on the touch-
screen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Paired Phones List of Paired Phones
NOTE:
This feature shows which phones are paired to the Phone/Bluetooth system. For further information, refer to the
Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement.
10
MULTIMEDIA 469
SiriusXM Setup — If Equipped
After pressing the “SiriusXM Setup” button on the touch-
screen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Channel Skip List of Channels
NOTE:
SiriusXM can be programmed to designate a group of channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to exclude
undesirable channels while scanning. This feature allows you to select the channels you would like to skip.
Subscription Info Sirius ID
NOTE:
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio with your
radio. Following the expiration of the free services, it will be necessary to access the information on the Subscription
Information screen to re-subscribe.
1. Press the “Subscription Info” button on the touchscreen to access the Subscription Information screen.
2. Write down the Sirius ID numbers for your receiver. To reactivate your service, either call the number listed on the
screen or visit the provider online.
470 MULTIMEDIA
Restore Settings
After pressing the “Restore Settings” button on the touch-
screen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Restore Settings OK Cancel
NOTE:
When the “Restore Settings” feature is selected, it will reset all of the audio settings to their default settings.
Clear Personal Data
After pressing the “Clear Personal Data” button on the
touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Clear Personal Data OK Cancel
NOTE:
When the “Clear Personal Data” feature is selected it will remove all personal data including Bluetooth devices and
presets.
10
MULTIMEDIA 471
Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect 4
Settings
Press the “Settings” button on the bottom bar, or press the
“Apps
” button, then press the “Settings” button on
the touchscreen to display the menu setting screen. In
this mode the Uconnect system allows you to access all
of the available programmable features.
NOTE:
• Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a time.
• Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may
vary.
When making a selection, press the button on the touch-
screen to enter the desired mode. Once in the desired
mode, press and release the preferred setting “option” until
a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that
setting has been selected. Once the setting is complete,
press the “X” button on the touchscreen to close out of the
settings screen. Pressing the Up or Down Arrow button on
the right side of the screen will allow you to toggle up or
down through the available settings.
The following tables list the settings that may be found
within the Uconnect 4 with 7-inch display radio, along
with the selectable options pertaining to each setting.
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display Buttons On The
Touchscreen And Buttons On The Faceplate
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
472 MULTIMEDIA
Language
After pressing the “Language” button on the touchscreen,
the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Language English Espanol Francais
Display
After pressing the “Display” button on the touchscreen, the
following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Display Mode Auto Manual
Display Brightness Headlights On +-
Display Brightness Headlights Off +-
AutoShow On Off
Touchscreen Beep On Off
Control Screen Timeout — If
Equipped
On Off
Phone Pop-ups Displayed in Cluster
— If Equipped
On Off
10
MULTIMEDIA 473
Units
After pressing the “Units” button on the touchscreen, the
following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Units US Metric Custom
NOTE:
•
The “Metric” option changes the instrument cluster display to metric units of measure.
•
The “Custom” option allows setting the “Distance, Fuel Consumption” (MPG (US), MPG(UK), L/100km, or
km/L),“Pressure” (kPa, or bar) and “Temperature” (C, or F) units of measure independently.
Voice
After pressing the “Voice” button on the touchscreen, the
following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Voice Response Length Brief Detailed
Show Command List Always With Help Never
474 MULTIMEDIA
Time & Date
After pressing the “Time & Date” button on the touch-
screen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Set Time Hours +-
NOTE:
The “Set Time Hours” feature will allow you to adjust the hours.
Set Time Minutes +-
NOTE:
The “Set Time Minutes” feature will allow you to adjust the minutes.
Time Format 12hrs 24hrs
AM PM
Set Date Up Arrow Down Arrow
NOTE:
Within the “Set Date” setting, press the corresponding arrow buttons on the touchscreen to adjust to the correct date.
Show Time Status — If Equipped On Off
Sync Time With GPS — If Equipped On Off
10
MULTIMEDIA 475
Safety/Driving Assistance — If Equipped
After pressing the “Safety/Driving Assistance” button on
the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Forward Collision Warning Off Warning Only Warning + Active
Braking
NOTE:
The “Forward Collision Warning Plus (FCW+)” setting includes Advanced Brake Assist (ABA). The ABA applies ad-
ditional brake pressure when the driver requests insufficient brake pressure to avoid a potential frontal collision.
When the “Warning Only” option is selected a chime will sound alerting you of a possible collision with the vehicle
in front of you and more brake pressure is needed. When the “Warning + Active Braking” option is selected, it will
apply the brakes to slow your vehicle in case of potential forward collision and sound an audible chime to alert you.
Forward Collision Warning Sensitivity — If Equipped Near Medium Far
NOTE:
The “Forward Collision Warning Plus (FCW+) Sensitivity” setting determines at what relative distance the vehicle
directly in front of you needs to be at, before the system will warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle directly
in front of you, based on the option is selected. “Far” will give you the most amount of reaction time, whereas
“Near” will give you the least amount of reaction time, based on the distance between the two vehicles.
LaneSense Warning — If Equipped Early Medium Late
NOTE:
The “LaneSense Warning” setting determines at what distance the LaneSense system will warn you, through steering
wheel feedback, of a possible lane departure.
476 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name Selectable Options
LaneSense Strength — If Equipped Low Med High
ParkSense — If Equipped Sound Sound and Display
Rear ParkSense Volume Low Medium High
Blind Spot Alert — If Equipped Off Lights Lights and
Chime
NOTE:
If your vehicle has experienced any damage in the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is not damaged,
the sensor may have become misaligned. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor alignment. A sen-
sor that is misaligned will result in the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) not operating to specification.
ParkView Backup Camera Delay On Off
NOTE:
The “ParkView Backup Camera Delay” setting determines whether or not the screen will display the rear view image
with dynamic grid lines for up to ten seconds after the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE. This delay will be canceled
if the vehicle’s speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission is shifted into PARK, or the ignition is switched to
the OFF position.
ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines On Off
Rain Sensing Auto Wipers On Off
10
MULTIMEDIA 477
Brakes
After pressing the “Brakes” button on the touchscreen, the
following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Auto Park Brake On Off
Brake Service — If Equipped Yes No
NOTE:
Selecting the “Brake Service” feature will display a pop-up asking whether you would like to retract the park brakes
to allow brake system service.
Lights
After pressing the “Lights” button on the touchscreen, the
following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Interior Ambient Lights +-
NOTE:
The “Interior Ambient Lights” setting can also be adjusted by selecting any point on the scale between the “+” and
“-” buttons on the touchscreen.
478 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name Selectable Options
Headlight Sensitivity — If
Equipped
Level 1: minimum
sensitivity
Level 2: medium sen-
sitivity
Level 3: maximum sensitivity
NOTE:
The greater the sensitivity set, the less the external light variation required to turn on the lights (e.g. with a setting on
level 3 at sunset the headlights turn on earlier than in levels 1 and 2).
Headlight Off Delay +-
NOTE:
When the “Headlight Off Delay” feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of the amount of time the headlights
remain on after the engine is shut off.
Greeting Lights On Off
Daytime Running Lights On Off
Auto Dim High Beams — If
Equipped
On Off
Cornering Lights On Off
NOTE:
When the “Cornering Lights” feature is selected, if the steering wheel rotation angle is large or the turn signal indica-
tors are on, a light (incorporated in the fog light) will turn on, on the relevant side to improve visibility at night.
Flash Lights With Lock — If
Equipped
On Off
10
MULTIMEDIA 479
Doors & Locks
After pressing the “Doors & Locks” button on the touch-
screen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Auto Unlock On Exit On Off
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, all doors will unlock when the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the PARK
or NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is opened.
Flash Lights With Lock On Off
Remote Door Unlock Driver Door All Doors
Setting Name Selectable Options
Auto Door Locks — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, all doors will lock automatically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 12 mph
(20 km/h).
480 MULTIMEDIA
Engine Off Options — If Equipped
After pressing the “Engine Off Options” button on the
touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Headlight Off Delay +-
Radio Off Delay 0 min 20 min
Radio Off With Door On Off
Audio
After pressing the “Audio” button on the touchscreen, the
following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Balance & Fade +-
NOTE:
When in this display you may adjust the “Balance & Fade” of the audio by pressing and dragging the “Speaker Icon”
toward any location in the box.
Equalizer Bass Mid Treble
NOTE:
When in this display you may adjust the “Bass”, “Mid”, and “Treble” settings. Adjust the settings with the “+” and
“–” setting buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any point on the scale between the “+” and “–” buttons on the
touchscreen. Bass/Mid/Treble also allow you to simply slide your finger up or down to change the setting as well as
press directly on the desired setting.
10
MULTIMEDIA 481
Setting Name Selectable Options
Speed Adjusted Volume Off 1 2 3
Loudness On Off
NOTE:
The “Loudness” feature improves sound quality at lower volumes when enabled.
AUX Volume Offset — If Equipped +-
NOTE:
This feature provides the ability to tune the audio level for portable devices connected through the AUX input.
Auto Play — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
The “Auto Play” feature automatically starts playing audio when a USB device is connected and turned on.
Radio Off With Door — If
Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
The “Radio Off With Door” feature will keep the radio on until the driver or passenger door is opened, or when the
“Radio Off Delay” selected time has expired.
482 MULTIMEDIA
Phone
After pressing the “Phone” button on the touchscreen, the
following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Do Not Disturb Do Not Disturb Options
Paired Phones And Audio Devices List Of Paired Phones And Audio Devices
NOTE:
This feature shows which phones and audio devices are paired to the Phone/Bluetooth system. For further informa-
tion, refer to the Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement.
Phone Pop-ups Displayed In Cluster
— If Equipped
On Off
10
MULTIMEDIA 483
SiriusXM Setup — If Equipped
After pressing the “SiriusXM Setup” button on the touch-
screen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Channel Skip List Of Channels
NOTE:
SiriusXM can be programmed to designate a group of channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to exclude
undesirable channels while scanning. This feature allows you to select the channels you would like to skip.
Subscription Info Sirius ID
NOTE:
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio with your
radio. Following the expiration of the free services, it will be necessary to access the information on the Subscription
Information screen to re-subscribe.
1. Press the “Subscription Info” button on the touchscreen to access the Subscription Information screen.
2. Write down the Sirius ID numbers for your receiver. To reactivate your service, either call the number listed on the
screen or visit the provider online.
484 MULTIMEDIA
Restore Settings
After pressing the “Restore Settings” button on the touch-
screen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Restore Settings Yes Cancel
NOTE:
When this feature is selected it will reset the audio settings to their default.
Clear Personal Data
After pressing the “Clear Personal Data” button on the
touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Clear Personal Data — If Equipped OK Cancel
NOTE:
When this feature is selected it will remove all personal data including Bluetooth devices and presets.
10
MULTIMEDIA 485
Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect
4C/4C NAV Settings
Press the “Apps
” button, then press the “Settings
” button on the touchscreen to display the menu
setting screen. In this mode the Uconnect system allows
you to access all of the available programmable features.
NOTE:
• Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a time.
• Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may
vary.
When making a selection, press the button on the touch-
screen to enter the desired mode. Once in the desired
mode, press and release the preferred setting “option” until
a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that
setting has been selected. Once the setting is complete,
press the “X” button on the touchscreen to close out of the
settings screen. Pressing the Up or Down Arrow button on
the right side of the screen will allow you to toggle up or
down through the available settings.
The following tables list the settings that may be found
within the Uconnect 4C/4C NAV radio, along with the
selectable options pertaining to each setting.
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With 8.4–inch Display Buttons On
The Touchscreen And Buttons On The Faceplate
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
486 MULTIMEDIA
Language
After pressing the “Language” button on the touchscreen,
the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Set Language On Off
NOTE:
When the “Set Language” feature is selected, you may select one of multiple languages (English / Français / Espa-
ñol) for all display nomenclature, including the trip functions and the navigation system (if equipped). Press the “Set
Language” button on the touchscreen, then press the desired language button on the touchscreen until a check-mark
appears next to the language, showing that setting has been selected.
Display
After pressing the “Display” button on the touchscreen, the
following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Display Mode Manual Auto
Display Brightness With Headlights ON +-
NOTE:
To make changes to the ⬙Display Brightness with Headlights ON⬙ setting, the headlights must be on and the interior
dimmer switch must not be in the ⬙party⬙ or ⬙parade⬙ positions.
10
MULTIMEDIA 487
Setting Name Selectable Options
Display Brightness With Headlights OFF +-
NOTE:
To make changes to the ⬙Display Brightness with Headlights OFF⬙ setting, the headlights must be off and the interior
dimmer switch must not be in the ⬙party⬙ or ⬙parade⬙ positions.
Set Theme Options On Off
NOTE:
When in this display, you may select the theme for the display screen. To make your selection, press the ⬙Set Theme⬙
button on the touchscreen, then select the desired theme option button until a check-mark appears showing that the
setting has been selected.
Touchscreen Beep On Off
Control Screen Time-Out On Off
NOTE:
When the “Control Screen Time-Out” feature is selected, the Controls Screen will stay open for five seconds before
the screen times out. With the feature deselected, the screen will stay open until it is manually closed.
Navigation Turn-By-Turn In Cluster — If
Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
When the “Navigation Turn-By-Turn In Cluster” feature is selected, the turn-by-turn directions will appear in the In-
strument Cluster Display as the vehicle approaches a designated turn within a programmed route.
Phone Pop-ups Displayed in Cluster On Off
488 MULTIMEDIA
Units
After pressing the “Units” button on the touchscreen, the
following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Units US Metric Custom
NOTE:
•
The “Metric” option changes the instrument cluster display to metric units of measure.
•
The “Custom” option allows setting the “Fuel Consumption” (L/100km, or km/L), “Pressure” (kPa, or bar), and
“Temperature” (°C or °F) units of measure independently.
Voice
After pressing the “Voice” button on the touchscreen, the
following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Voice Response Length Brief Detailed
Show Command List Always With Help Never
10
MULTIMEDIA 489
Clock
After pressing the “Clock” button on the touchscreen, the
following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Sync Time With GPS — If Equipped On Off
Set Time Hours +-
NOTE:
The “Set Time Hours” feature will allow you to adjust the hours. The “Sync time with GPS” button on the touch-
screen must be unchecked.
Set Time Minutes +-
NOTE:
The “Set Time Minutes” feature will allow you to adjust the minutes. The “Sync time with GPS” button on the touch-
screen must be unchecked.
Time Format 12hrs 24hrs
Show Time in Status Bar — If Equipped On Off
490 MULTIMEDIA
Safety & Driving Assistance
After pressing the “Safety & Driving Assistance” button on
the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Forward Collision Warning Sensitivity — If Equipped Near Medium Far
NOTE:
The “Forward Collision Warning Plus (FCW+) Sensitivity” setting determines at what relative distance the vehicle
directly in front of you needs to be at, before the system will warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle directly
in front of you, based on the option is selected. “Far” will give you the most amount of reaction time, whereas
“Near” will give you the least amount of reaction time, based on the distance between the two vehicles.
Forward Collision Warning-Plus (FCW+) Off Only Warning Warning + Active
Braking
NOTE:
The “Forward Collision Warning Plus (FCW+)” setting includes Advanced Brake Assist (ABA). The ABA applies ad-
ditional brake pressure when the driver requests insufficient brake pressure to avoid a potential frontal collision.
When the “OnlyWarning” option is selected a chime will sound alerting you of a possible collision with the vehicle in
front of you and more brake pressure is needed. When the “Warning + Active Braking” option is selected, it will ap-
ply the brakes to slow your vehicle in case of potential forward collision and sound an audible chime to alert you.
10
MULTIMEDIA 491
Setting Name Selectable Options
LaneSense Warning — If Equipped Early Medium Late
NOTE:
The “LaneSense Warning” setting determines at what distance the LaneSense system will warn you, through steering
wheel feedback, of a possible lane departure.
LaneSense Strength — If Equipped Low Med High
ParkSense — If Equipped Sound Only Sound and Display
Rear ParkSense Volume Low Medium High
Blind Spot Alert — If Equipped Off Lights Lights & Chime
NOTE:
If your vehicle has experienced any damage in the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is not damaged,
the sensor may have become misaligned. Take your vehicle to your authorized dealer to verify sensor alignment. A
sensor that is misaligned will result in the BSM not operating to specification.
ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines On Off
ParkView Backup Camera Delay On Off
NOTE:
The “ParkView Backup Camera Delay” setting determines whether or not the screen will display the rear view image
with dynamic grid lines for up to ten seconds after the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE. This delay will be canceled
if the vehicle’s speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission is shifted into PARK, or the ignition is switched to
the OFF position.
492 MULTIMEDIA
Mirrors and Wipers
After pressing the “Mirrors and Wipers” button on the
touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Rain Sensing Auto Wipers
— If Equipped
On Off
Brakes
After pressing the “Brakes” button on the touchscreen, the
following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Brake Service — If Equipped Yes No
NOTE:
This feature provides a means for a technician or vehicle owner to utilize a vehicle integrated, menu driven system,
to command the electric park brake retraction, to service the rear foundation brakes (brake pads, calipers, rotors, etc.).
Auto Park Brake On Off
10
MULTIMEDIA 493
Lights
After pressing the “Lights” button on the touchscreen, the
following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Headlight Sensitivity Level 1: minimum
sensitivity
Level 2: medium
sensitivity
Level 3: maximum sensitivity
NOTE:
The greater the sensitivity set, the less the external light variation required to turn on the lights (e.g. with a setting on
level 3 at sunset the headlights turn on earlier than in levels 1 and 2).
Headlight Off Delay 0 sec 30 sec 60 sec 90 sec
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of the amount of time the headlights remain on after the en-
gine is shut off.
Headlight Illumination On
Approach
0 sec 30 sec 60 sec 90 sec
Greeting Lights On Off
Daytime Running Lights On Off
494 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name Selectable Options
Cornering Lights On Off
NOTE:
When the “Cornering Lights” feature is selected, if the steering wheel rotation angle is large or the turn signal indica-
tors are on, a light (incorporated in the fog light) will turn on, on the relevant side to improve visibility at night.
Flash Lights With Lock — If
Equipped
On Off
Interior Ambient Lights +-
NOTE:
The “Interior Ambient Lights” setting can also be adjusted by selecting any point on the scale between the “+” and
“-” buttons on the touchscreen.
Auto Dim High Beams — If
Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
When the “Auto Dim High Beams” feature is selected, the high beam headlights will activate/deactivate automati-
cally under certain conditions.
10
MULTIMEDIA 495
Doors & Locks
After pressing the “Doors & Locks” button on the touch-
screen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Auto Unlock On Exit On Off
NOTE:
When the “Auto Unlock On Exit” feature is selected, all doors will unlock when the vehicle is stopped, the transmis-
sion is in the PARK or NEUTRAL position, and the driver’s door is opened.
Flash Lights With Lock On Off
Sound Horn With Lock — If Equipped Off 1st Press 2nd Press
Sound Horn With Remote Start — If Equipped On Off
1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks Driver Door All Doors
NOTE:
When ⬙Driver Door⬙ is selected with 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks, only the driver’s door will unlock with the first
press of the key fob unlock button. You must press the key fob unlock button twice to unlock the passenger’s doors.
When ⬙All Doors⬙ is selected for 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks, all doors will unlock on the first press of the key fob
unlock button. If the vehicle is programmed 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks “All Doors,” all doors will unlock, no mat-
ter which Passive Entry equipped door handle is grasped. If 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks “Driver Door” is pro-
grammed, only the driver’s door will unlock when the driver’s door is grasped. With Passive Entry, if 1st Press Of
Key Fob Unlocks “Driver Door” is programmed, touching the handle more than once will result in only the driver’s
door opening. If “Driver Door” is selected, once the driver door is opened, the interior door lock/unlock switch can
be used to unlock all doors (or use key fob).
496 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name Selectable Options
Passive Entry — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicles door(s) without having to push the key fob lock or unlock
buttons.
Auto-On Comfort Systems — If Equipped
After pressing the “Auto-On Comfort Systems” button on
the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Steering Wheel
With Vehicle Start — If Equipped
Off Remote Start All Starts
NOTE:
When this feature is selected the driver’s heated seat and heated steering wheel will automatically turn on when tem-
peratures are below 40° F (4.4° C). When temperatures are above 80° F (26.7° C) the driver vented seat will turn on.
Engine Off Options
After pressing the “Engine Off Options” button on the
touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Headlight Off Delay — If Equipped +-
10
MULTIMEDIA 497
Radio
After pressing the ⬙Radio” on the touchscreen, the follow-
ing settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Radio Off Delay 0 min 20 min
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, the radio will stay on for 20 minutes, or until the first door is opened after the engine is
shut off.
Audio
After pressing the “Audio” button on the touchscreen, the
following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Balance/Fade Speaker Icon
NOTE:
When in this display you may adjust the “Balance/Fade” of the audio by pressing and dragging the “Speaker Icon”
toward any location in the box.
498 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name Selectable Options
Equalizer Bass Mid Treble
NOTE:
When in this display you may adjust the “Bass”, “Mid”, and “Treble” settings. Adjust the settings with the “+” and
“–” setting buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any point on the scale between the “+” and “–” buttons on the
touchscreen. Bass/Mid/Treble also allow you to simply slide your finger up or down to change the setting as well as
press directly on the desired setting.
Speed Adjusted Volume Off 1 2 3
Surround Sound — If Equipped On Off
AUX Volume Offset — If Equipped +-
NOTE:
This feature provides the ability to tune the audio level for portable devices connected through the AUX input.
10
MULTIMEDIA 499
Phone/Bluetooth
After pressing the “Phone/Bluetooth” button on the touch-
screen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Do Not Disturb List of Settings
NOTE:
Press “Do Not Disturb” to access the available settings. The following settings are: Auto Reply (both, text, call), Auto
Reply Message (custom, default) and Custom Auto Reply Message (create message).
Paired Phones List Of Paired Phones
NOTE:
This feature shows which phones are paired to the Phone/Bluetooth system. For further information, refer to the
Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement.
Paired Audio Sources List Of Paired Audio Sources
NOTE:
This feature shows which Audio Sources are paired to the Phone/Bluetooth system. For further information, refer to
the Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement.
500 MULTIMEDIA
SiriusXM Setup — If Equipped
After pressing the “SiriusXM Setup” button on the touch-
screen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Channel Skip List Of Channels
NOTE:
SiriusXM can be programmed to designate a group of channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to exclude
undesirable channels while scanning. This feature allows you to select the channels you would like to skip.
Subscription Info Sirius ID
NOTE:
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio with your
radio. Following the expiration of the free services, it will be necessary to access the information on the Subscription
Information screen to re-subscribe.
1. Press the “Subscription Info” button on the touchscreen to access the Subscription Information screen.
2. Write down the Sirius ID numbers for your receiver. To reactivate your service, either call the number listed on the
screen or visit the provider online.
SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscription.
10
MULTIMEDIA 501
Restore Settings
After pressing the “Restore Settings” button on the touch-
screen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Restore Settings OK Cancel
NOTE:
When this feature is selected it will reset all of the audio settings to their default settings.
Clear Personal Data
After pressing the “Clear Personal Data” button on the
touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Clear Personal Data OK Cancel
NOTE:
When this feature is selected it will remove all personal data including Bluetooth devices and presets.
502 MULTIMEDIA
System Information
After pressing the “System Information” button on the
touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Software Licenses Software Information Screen
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, a “Licensing Information” screen will appear, displaying a licensing information website
for the radio.
Map Update Download System Information To
USB
Generate Request Code
NOTE:
The “Download System Information To USB” will create a special USB required for Map updates of the radio.
Whereas the “Generate Request Code” will display a code for the user to input online when downloading the maps.
10
MULTIMEDIA 503
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS — IF
EQUIPPED
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear
surface of the steering wheel at the three and nine o’clock
positions.
The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
push-button in the center and controls the volume and
mode of the sound system. Pushing the top of the rocker
switch will increase the volume, and pushing the bottom of
the rocker switch will decrease the volume.
Pushing the center button will make the radio switch
between the various modes available (AM/FM/SXM or
Media etc.).
The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a push-
button in the center. The function of the left-hand control is
different depending on which mode you are in
The following describes the left-hand control operation in
each mode.
Radio Operation
Pushing the top of the switch will “Seek” up for the next
listenable station and pushing the bottom of the switch will
“Seek” down for the next listenable station.
The button located in the center of the left-hand control
will tune to the next preset station that you have pro-
grammed in the radio preset button.
Media Mode
Pushing the top of the switch once goes to the next track on
the selected media (AUX/USB/Bluetooth). Pushing the
bottom of the switch once goes to the beginning of the
current track, or to the beginning of the previous track if it
is within eight seconds after the current track begins to
play.
Remote Sound System Controls
504 MULTIMEDIA
AUX/USB/MP3 CONTROL
There is a USB and AUX Jack in the center console. This
feature allows an external device to be plugged into the
USB or AUX ports.
If equipped, there may also be another USB port located on
the back of the center console.
The USB port allows interaction with a connected smart-
phone via Android Auto or Apple CarPlay if the vehicle is
equipped with a Uconnect 4/4C NAV. The port is for
charge only if the vehicle is equipped with a Uconnect 3
with 5–inch Display, a Uconnect 4 with 7–inch Display or a
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With 8.4–inch Display.
For further information, refer to the Uconnect Owner’s
Manual Supplement.
Center Console USB Port
1 — USB Port
2 — AUX Jack
Charge Only USB Port
10
MULTIMEDIA 505
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
by relocating the mobile phone antenna. This condition is
not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does
not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the an-
tenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be turned
down or off during mobile phone operation when not
using Uconnect (if equipped).
Regulatory And Safety Information
USA/CANADA
Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation
The radiated output power of the internal wireless radio is
far below the FCC and IC radio frequency exposure limits.
Nevertheless, the wireless radio will be used in such a
manner that the radio is 8 in (20 cm) or further from the
human body.
The internal wireless radio operates within guidelines
found in radio frequency safety standards and recommen-
dations, which reflect the consensus of the scientific com-
munity.
The radio manufacturer believes the internal wireless radio
is safe for use by consumers. The level of energy emitted is
far less than the electromagnetic energy emitted by wire-
less devices such as mobile phones. However, the use of
wireless radios may be restricted in some situations or
environments, such as aboard airplanes. If you are unsure
of restrictions, you are encouraged to ask for authorization
before turning on the wireless radio.
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, in-
cluding interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
506 MULTIMEDIA
NOTE:
• This equipment has been tested and found to comply
with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to
Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to
provide reasonable protection against harmful interfer-
ence in a residential installation. This equipment gener-
ates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if
not installed and used in accordance with the instruc-
tions, may cause harmful interference to radio commu-
nications. However, there is no guarantee that interfer-
ence will not occur in a particular installation.
• If this equipment does cause harmful interference to
radio or television reception, which can be determined
by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encour-
aged to try to correct the interference by one or more of
the following measures:
1. Increase the separation between the equipment and
receiver.
2. Consult an authorized dealer or an experienced radio
technician for help.
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS
Introducing Uconnect
Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition with these helpful
quick tips. It provides the key Voice Commands and tips
you need to know to control your Uconnect 3, Uconnect 4,
or Uconnect 4C/4C NAV system.
Uconnect 3
10
MULTIMEDIA 507
If you see the NAV icon on the bottom bar or in the Apps
menus of your 8.4-inch touchscreen, you have the
Uconnect 4C NAV system. If not, you have a Uconnect 4C
with 8.4-inch display system.
Uconnect 4
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV
508 MULTIMEDIA
Get Started
All you need to control your Uconnect system with your
voice are the buttons on your steering wheel.
Helpful hints for using Voice Recognition:
• Visit UconnectPhone.com to check mobile device and
feature compatibility and to find phone pairing instruc-
tions.
• Reduce background noise. Wind and passenger conver-
sations are examples of noise that may impact recogni-
tion.
• Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume while facing
straight ahead. The microphone is positioned on the
rearview mirror and aimed at the driver.
• Each time you give a Voice Command, you must first
push either the Voice Recognition (VR) or Phone button,
wait until after the beep, then say your Voice Command.
• You can interrupt the help message or system prompts
by pushing the VR or Phone button and saying a Voice
Command from the current category.
Uconnect Voice Command Buttons
1 — Push To Initiate Or To Answer A Phone Call, Send Or Receive
A Text
2 — For All Radios: Push To Begin Radio, Media, Or Climate Func-
tions. For Uconnect 4C NAV System Only: Push To Begin Naviga-
tion Function
3 — Push To End Call
10
MULTIMEDIA 509
Basic Voice Commands
The basic Voice Commands below can be given at any
point while using your Uconnect system.
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say:
• “ Cancel” to stop a current voice session
• “ Help” to hear a list of suggested Voice Commands
• “ Repeat” to listen to the system prompts again
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your voice
recognition system’s status. Cues appear on the touch-
screen.
Radio
Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM or SiriusXM
Satellite Radio stations you would like to hear. (Subscrip-
tion or included SiriusXM Satellite Radio trial required.)
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say:
• “ Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM”
• “ Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1”
TIP: At any time, if you are not sure of what to say or want
to learn a Voice Command, push the VR button
and say
“ Help.” The system provides you with a list of com-
mands.
Uconnect 3 Radio
510 MULTIMEDIA
Uconnect 4 Radio
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Radio
10
MULTIMEDIA 511
Media
Uconnect offers connections via USB, Bluetooth and auxil-
iary ports (if equipped). Voice operation is only available
for connected USB and AUX devices. (Remote CD player
optional and not available on all vehicles.)
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say one of the
following commands and follow the prompts to switch
your media source or choose an artist.
• “ Change source to Bluetooth”
• “ Change source to AUX”
• “ Change source to USB”
• “ Play artist Beethoven”; “ Play album Greatest Hits”;
“ Play song Moonlight Sonata”; “ Play genre Classical”
TIP: Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to see all
of the music on your USB device. Your Voice Command
must match exactly how the artist, album, song and genre
information is displayed.
Uconnect 3 Media
512 MULTIMEDIA
Uconnect 4 Media
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Media
10
MULTIMEDIA 513
Phone
Making and answering hands-free phone calls is easy with
Uconnect. When the Phonebook button is illuminated on
your touchscreen, your system is ready. Check
UconnectPhone.com for mobile phone compatibility and
pairing instructions.
Push the VR button
or Phone button . After the
beep, say one of the following commands:
• “ Call John Smith”
• “ Dial 123-456-7890 and follow the system prompts”
• “ Redial (call previous outgoing phone number)”
• “ Call back (call previous incoming phone number)”
TIP: When providing a Voice Command, push the VR
button
or Phone button and say “ Call,” then
pronounce the name exactly as it appears in your phone
book. When a contact has multiple phone numbers, you
can say “ Call John Smith work.”
Uconnect 3 Phone
514 MULTIMEDIA
Uconnect 4 Phone
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Phone
10
MULTIMEDIA 515
Voice Text Reply — If Equipped
Uconnect announces incoming text messages. Push the VR
button
or Phone button (if enabled) and say
“ Listen.” (Must have compatible mobile phone paired
to Uconnect system.)
1. Once an incoming text message is read to you, push the
VR button
or Phone button (if enabled). After
the beep, say: “ Reply.”
2. Listen to the Uconnect prompts. After the beep, repeat
one of the pre-defined messages and follow the system
prompts.
PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSES
Yes. Stuck in traffic. See you later.
No. Start without
me.
I’ll be late.
Okay. Where are you? I will be 5 <or
10, 15, 20, 25, 30,
45, 60> minutes
late.
Call me. Are you there
yet?
I’ll call you later. I need
directions.
See you in 5 <or
10, 15, 20, 25, 30,
45, 60> minutes.
I’m on my way. Can’t talk right
now.
I’m lost. Thanks.
NOTE: Only use the numbering listed, otherwise the
system does not transpose the message.
TIP: Your mobile phone must have the full implementation
of the Message Access Profile (MAP) to take advantage of
this feature. For details about MAP, visit
UconnectPhone.com.
516 MULTIMEDIA
Apple iPhone iOS 6 or later supports reading incoming
text messages only. To enable this feature on your Apple
iPhone, follow these four simple steps:
TIP: Voice Text Reply is not compatible with iPhone, but if
your vehicle is equipped with Siri Eyes Free, you can use
your voice to send a text message.
Climate
Too hot? Too cold? Adjust vehicle temperatures hands-free
and keep everyone comfortable while you keep moving
ahead. (If vehicle is equipped with climate control.)
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say one of the
following commands:
• “ Set the driver temperature to 70 degrees”
• “ Set the passenger temperature to 70 degrees”
TIP: Voice Command for Climate may only be used to
adjust the interior temperature of your vehicle. Voice
Command will not work to adjust the heated seats or
steering wheel if equipped.
iPhone Notification Settings
1 — Select “Settings”
2 — Select “Bluetooth”
3 — Select The (i) For The Paired Vehicle
4 — Turn On “Show Notifications”
10
MULTIMEDIA 517
Uconnect 4 Climate Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Climate
518 MULTIMEDIA
Navigation (4C NAV) — If Equipped
The Uconnect navigation feature helps you save time and
become more productive when you know exactly how to
get to where you want to go.
1. To enter a destination, push the VR button
. After the
beep, say: “ Find address 800 Chrysler Drive Auburn
Hills, Michigan.”
2. Then follow the system prompts.
TIP: To start a POI search, push the VR button
. After
the beep, say: “ Find nearest coffee shop.”
Uconnect 4C NAV Navigation
10
MULTIMEDIA 519
SiriusXM Guardian (4C/4C NAV) — If Equipped
CAUTION!
Some SiriusXM Guardian services, including SOS Call
and Roadside Assistance Call will NOT work without
an operable LTE (voice/data) or 3G or 4G (data) net-
work connection compatible with your device.
NOTE: Your vehicle may be transmitting data as autho-
rized by the subscriber.
An included trial and/or subscription is required to take
advantage of the SiriusXM Guardian services in the next
section of this guide. To register with SiriusXM Guardian,
press the Apps button on the Uconnect 4C/4C NAV
touchscreen to get started.
NOTE: SiriusXM Guardian is available only on equipped
vehicles purchased within the continental United States,
Alaska, Hawaii and Canada. Services can only be used
where coverage is available; see coverage map for details.
SOS Call
Theft Alarm Notification
Remote Door Lock/Unlock
Send & Go
Vehicle Finder
Stolen Vehicle Assistance
Remote Vehicle Start**
Remote Horn & Lights
Roadside Assistance Call
Vehicle Health Reports**
Vehicle Health Alert**
Performance Pages Plus**
**If vehicle is equipped.
Register (4C/4C NAV)
To unlock the full potential of SiriusXM Guardian in your
vehicle, you must activate your SiriusXM Guardian ser-
vices.
1. Press the Apps icon on the bottom of your in-vehicle
touchscreen.
2. Select the Activate Services icon from your list of apps.
520 MULTIMEDIA
3. Select “Customer Care” to speak with a SiriusXM
Guardian Customer Care agent who will activate ser-
vices in your vehicle, or select “Enter Email” to activate
on the web.
• U.S. residents visit: www.siriusxm.com/guardian.
• Canadian residents visit: www.siriusxm.ca/guardian.
Vehicle Health Report/Alert (4C/4C NAV)
Your vehicle will send you a monthly email report, which
summarizes the performance of your vehicle’s key systems
so you can stay on top of your vehicle’s maintenance needs
if you are registered for SiriusXM Guardian. Your vehicle
will also send you Vehicle Health Alerts when it detects
issues with its key systems that need your attention. For
further information, refer to your Uconnect Owner’s
Manual Supplement.
Mobile App (4C/4C NAV)
You’re only a few steps away from using remote com-
mands and sending a destination from your phone to your
vehicle.
To use the Uconnect Mobile App:
1. Once you have registered your SiriusXM Guardian
services, download the Uconnect App to your mobile
device. Use your Owner Account login and password to
open the app.
2. Once on the “Remote” screen, you can begin using
Remote Door Lock/Unlock, Remote Vehicle Start, and
activate your horn and lights remotely, if equipped.
Mobile App
10
MULTIMEDIA 521
3. Press the “Location” button on the bottom menu bar of
the app to bring up a map to locate your vehicle or send
a location to your Uconnect Navigation using Vehicle
Finder and Send & Go , if equipped.
4. Press the “Settings” side menu in the upper left corner
of the app to bring up app settings.
NOTE: For further information please visit
DriveUconnect.com (U.S. Residents) or DriveUconnect.ca
(Canadian Residents).
SiriusXM Travel Link (4C NAV)
Need to find a gas station, view local movie listings, check
a sports score or the 5 - day weather forecast? SiriusXM
Travel Link is a suite of services that brings a wealth of
information right to your Uconnect 4C NAV system. (Not
available for Uconnect 4 system.)
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say one of the
following commands:
• “ Show fuel prices”
• “ Show 5 - day weather forecast”
• “ Show extended weather”
TIP: Traffic alerts are not accessible with Voice Command.
Siri Eyes Free — If Equipped
Siri lets you use your voice to send text messages, select
media, place phone calls and much more. Siri uses your
natural language to understand what you mean and re-
sponds back to confirm your requests. The system is
designed to keep your eyes on the road and your hands on
the wheel by letting Siri help you perform useful tasks.
SiriusXM Travel Link
522 MULTIMEDIA
To enable Siri, push and hold, then release the Uconnect
Voice Recognition (VR) button on the steering wheel. After
you hear a double beep you can ask Siri to play podcasts
and music, get directions, read text messages and many
other useful requests.
Uconnect 4 Siri Eyes Free Available
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With 8.4–inch Siri Eyes Free
Available
10
MULTIMEDIA 523
Using Do Not Disturb
With Do Not Disturb, you can disable notifications from
incoming calls and texts, allowing you to keep your eyes
on the road and hands on the wheel. For your convenience,
there is a counter display to keep track of your missed calls
and text messages while you were using Do Not Disturb.
Do Not Disturb can automatically reply with a text mes-
sage, a call, or both, when declining an incoming call and
send it to voicemail.
Automatic reply messages can be:
• “I am driving right now, I will get back to you shortly.”
• Create a custom auto reply message up to 160 characters.
While in Do Not Disturb, Conference Call can be selected
so you can still place a second call without being inter-
rupted by incoming calls.
NOTE:
• Only the beginning of your custom message will be seen
on the touchscreen.
• Reply with text message is not compatible with iPhones.
• Auto reply with text message is only available on
phones that support Bluetooth MAP.
Android Auto — If Equipped
NOTE: Feature availability depends on your carrier and
mobile phone manufacturer. Some Android Auto features
may or may not be available in every region and/or
language.
Android Auto allows you to use your voice to interact with
Android’s best-in-class speech technology through your
vehicle’s voice recognition system, and use your smart-
phone’s data plan to project your Android powered smart-
phone and a number of its apps onto your Uconnect
touchscreen. Connect your Android 5.0 (Lollipop), or
higher, to one of the media USB ports, using the factory-
provided USB cable, and press the new Android Auto icon
that replaces your “Phone” icon on the main menu bar to
begin Android Auto. Push and hold the VR button on the
steering wheel, or press and hold the “Microphone” icon
within Android Auto, to activate Android’s VR, which
recognizes natural voice commands, to use a list of your
smartphone’s features:
• Maps
• Music
524 MULTIMEDIA
• Phone
• Text Messages
• Additional Apps
Refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement for
further information.
NOTE: Requires compatible smartphone running Android
5.0 Lollipop or higher and download app on Google Play.
Android, Android Auto, and Google Play are trademarks
of Google Inc.
Android Auto On 7-inch Display
Android Auto On 8.4-inch Display
10
MULTIMEDIA 525
Apple CarPlay — If Equipped
NOTE: Feature availability depends on your carrier and
mobile phone manufacturer. Some Apple CarPlay features
may or may not be available in every region and/or
language.
Apple CarPlay allows you to use your voice to interact
with Siri through your vehicle’s voice recognition system,
and use your smartphone’s data plan to project your
iPhone and a number of its apps onto your Uconnect
touchscreen. Connect your iPhone 5, or higher, to one of
the media USB ports, using the factory-provided Lightning
cable, and press the new CarPlay icon that replaces your
“Phone” icon on the main menu bar to begin Apple
CarPlay. Push and hold the VR button on the steering
wheel, or press and hold the “Home” button within Apple
CarPlay, to activate Siri, which recognizes natural voice
commands to use a list of your iPhone’s features:
• Phone
• Music
• Messages
• Maps — if equipped
• Additional Apps — if equipped
Apple CarPlay On 7-inch Display
526 MULTIMEDIA
Refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement for
further information.
NOTE: Requires compatible iPhone. See dealer for phone
compatibility. Data plan rates apply. Vehicle user interface
is a product of Apple. Apple CarPlay is a trademark of
Apple Inc. iPhone is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered
in the US and other countries. Apple terms of use and
privacy statements apply.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, in-
cluding interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Apple CarPlay On 8.4-inch Display
10
MULTIMEDIA 527
Additional Information
© 2018 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar and
Uconnect are registered trademarks and Mopar Owner
Connect is a trademark of FCA US LLC. Android is a
trademark of Google Inc. SiriusXM and all related marks
and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM Radio Inc.
Uconnect System Support:
• U.S. residents visit www.DriveUconnect.com or call:
1-877-855-8400(24 hours a day 7 days a week)
• Canadian residents visit www.DriveUconnect.ca or call:
1-800-465-2001(English) or 1-800-387-9983(French)
SiriusXM Guardian services support:
• U.S. residents visit www.siriusxm.com/guardian or call:
1-844-796-4827
• Canadian residents visit www.siriusxm.ca/guardian or
call: 1-877-324-9091
528 MULTIMEDIA
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE ........................530
▫ Prepare For The Appointment ..............530
▫ Prepare A List .........................530
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests ..............530
䡵 IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE ................530
▫ FCA US LLC Customer Center .............531
▫ FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center...........531
▫ In Mexico Contact ......................531
▫ Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands..........531
▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY) ....................532
▫ Service Contract .......................532
䡵 WARRANTY INFORMATION ...............533
䡵 MOPARPARTS .........................533
䡵 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS .............533
▫ In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C. . .533
▫ In Canada ............................534
䡵 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS .............534
11
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment
If you are having warranty work done, be sure to have the
right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All work
to be performed may not be covered by the warranty.
Discuss additional charges with the service manager. Keep
a maintenance log of your vehicle’s service history. This
can often provide a clue to the current problem.
Prepare A List
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident or
work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the
service advisor know.
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with the
service advisor and list the items in order of priority. At
many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental vehicle
at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it is
advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an
appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
with our products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer. We
strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an autho-
rized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and are most
concerned that you get prompt and high quality service.
The manufacturer’s authorized dealer have the facilities,
factory-trained technicians, special tools, and the latest
information to ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly and in a
timely manner.
This is why you should always talk to an authorized dealer
service manager first. Most matters can be resolved with
this process.
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the
general manager or owner of the authorized dealer.
They want to know if you need assistance.
• If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the concern,
you may contact the manufacturer’s customer center.
530 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer center
should include the following information:
• Owner’s name and address
• Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
• Authorized dealer name
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Vehicle delivery date and mileage
FCA US LLC Customer Center
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (877) 426-5337
FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French
In Mexico Contact
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
In Mexico City: 800-505-1300
Outside Mexico City: +(52)55 50817568
Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands
FCA Caribbean LLC
P.O. Box 191857
San Juan 00919-1857
Phone: (877) 426-5337
Fax: (787) 782-3345
11
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 531
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommunica-
tion Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer center.
Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who has access
to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter (TTY) in the
United States, can communicate with the manufacturer by
dialing 1-800-380-CHRY.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered by
Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711 and for
Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with a Bell
Relay Service operator.
Service Contract
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle to
help protect you from the high cost of unexpected repairs
after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty
expires. The manufacturer stands behind only the manu-
facturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a manufac-
turer’s service contract, you will receive Plan Provisions
and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within three
weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you have any
questions about the service contract, call the manufactur-
er’s Service Contract National Customer Hotline at 1-800-
521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800) 465-2001 English /
(800) 387-9983 French).
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service con-
tract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It is not
responsible for any service contract other than the manu-
facturer’s service contract. If you purchased a service
contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract, and
you require service after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle
Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the contract
documents, and contact the person listed in those docu-
ments.
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer has
also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience. You will be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.
532 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
WARNING!
Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines only),
some of its constituents, and certain vehicle compo-
nents contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and birth defects, or other
reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids con-
tained in vehicles and certain products of component
wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and birth defects, or other
reproductive harm.
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information Booklet for the terms and
provisions of FCA US LLC warranties applicable to this
vehicle and market.
MOPAR PARTS
Mopar fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are avail-
able from an authorized dealer. They are recommended for
your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle operating at
its best.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could
cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying
FCA US LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between you, an authorized
dealer or FCA US LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety
Hotline toll free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153);
or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Admin-
istrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., West
Building, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain
other information about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
11
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 533
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
should contact the Customer Service Department imme-
diately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
defect to the Canadian government should contact
Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations
and Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to http://
www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/.
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below.
Service Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the infor-
mation that students and professional technicians need in
diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, maintain-
ing, servicing, and repairing FCA US LLC vehicles. A
complete working knowledge of the vehicle, system,
and/or components is written in straightforward language
with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams,
charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals
make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix
problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and fea-
tures. They show exactly how to find and correct problems
the first time, using step-by-step troubleshooting and driv-
ability procedures, proven diagnostic tests and a complete
list of all tools and equipment.
Owner’s Manuals
These Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the
assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint
you with specific FCA US LLC vehicles. Included are
starting, operating, emergency and maintenance proce-
dures as well as specifications, capabilities and safety tips.
Call toll free at:
• 1-800-890-4038 (U.S.)
• 1-800-387-1143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
• www.techauthority.com (U.S.)
534 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
INDEX
12
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) (Cruise Control) . . . .266
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) .............406
Additives, Fuel ............................446
AirBag .................................185
Air Bag Operation ........................187
Air Bag Warning Light .................183, 187
Driver Knee Air Bag ......................194
Enhanced Accident Response .............200, 385
Event Data Recorder (EDR) .................385
FrontAirBag ...........................187
If Deployment Occurs .....................199
Knee Impact Bolsters ......................194
Maintaining Your Air Bag System .............203
Maintenance ............................203
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light ............184
Side Air Bags ...........................194
Transporting Pets ........................221
Air Bag Light.......................120, 183, 223
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter)......398
Air Conditioner Maintenance ..................398
Air Conditioner Refrigerant ................398, 399
Air Conditioner System ......................398
Air Conditioning............................78
Air Conditioning Filter ....................81, 399
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips ................79
Air Filter ................................398
Air Pressure
Tires..................................420
Alarm
Arm The System ..........................32
Disarm The System ........................32
Security Alarm........................32, 124
Alarm System
Security Alarm ...........................32
Alterations/Modifications
Vehicle .................................6
Android Auto .............................524
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ................405, 448
Disposal ...............................408
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .................138
Anti-Lock
Warning Light .....................124
Apple CarPlay ............................526
Arming System
Security Alarm ...........................32
Assist, Hill Start ...........................148
Audio Systems (Radio).......................453
Auto Down Power Windows ...................82
Automatic Dimming Mirror ....................52
Automatic Door Locks........................39
Automatic Headlights ........................59
536 INDEX
Automatic High Beams .......................58
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) ............79
Automatic Transaxle ........................245
Automatic Transmission ......................247
Adding Fluid ........................412, 450
Fluid And Filter Change ...................412
Fluid Change ...........................412
Fluid Level Check .....................411,412
Fluid Type ..........................411,450
Special Additives .........................411
Automatic Transmission Limp Home Mode .........39
Auto Up Power Windows .....................83
Auxiliary Electrical Outlet (Power Outlet) ..........99
Axle Fluid ...............................450
Axle Lubrication ...........................450
Battery...............................122, 395
Charging System Light ....................122
Keyless Key Fob Replacement ................21
Belts, Seat ................................223
Blind Spot Monitoring .......................150
Body Mechanism Lubrication ..................399
B-Pillar Location ...........................418
Brake Assist System .........................140
Brake Control System, Electronic................139
Brake Fluid ...............................450
Brake System .............................409
Fluid Check .........................409, 450
Master Cylinder .........................409
Parking ...............................236
Warning Light ...........................120
Brake/Transmission Interlock ..................247
Brightness, Interior Lights ...................61, 62
Bulb Replacement ..........................329
Bulbs, Light ..............................225
Camera, Rear .............................300
Capacities, Fuel ............................448
Caps, Filler
Fuel ..................................302
Oil
(Engine) .........................393, 397
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) .................407
Carbon Monoxide Warning ................222, 447
Cargo Area Cover ...........................94
Cargo Load Floor ...........................94
Cargo Tie-Downs .........................94, 96
Car Washes...............................436
Cellular Phone ............................506
Certification Label ..........................304
Chains, Tire ..............................429
12
INDEX 537
Change Oil Indicator ........................109
Changing A Flat Tire .....................354, 412
Chart, Tire Sizing...........................414
Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light). . . .134
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety ...............221
Checks, Safety.............................221
Child Restraint ............................204
Child Restraints
Booster Seats ............................209
Child Seat Installation .....................218
How To Stow An unused ALR Seat Belt ........216
Infant And Child Restraints .................207
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children .......211
Older Children And Child Restraints ...........208
Seating Positions .........................210
Child Safety Locks ..........................39
Clean Air Gasoline .........................445
Cleaning
Wheels ................................434
Windshield Wiper Blades ...................400
Climate Control ............................67
Automatic ..............................71
Manual ................................67
Coin Holder ...............................98
Cold Weather Operation......................232
Compact Spare Tire .........................427
Computer, Trip/Travel .......................119
Connector
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) ...........505
Console ..................................98
Floor ..................................98
Contract, Service ...........................532
Cooling Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) ............407
Cooling System ............................405
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) .................406
Coolant Level ........................405, 408
Cooling Capacity .........................448
Disposal Of Used Coolant ..................408
Drain, Flush, And Refill ....................405
Inspection ..............................408
Points
To Remember ......................408
Pressure Cap ............................407
Radiator Cap ...........................407
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) .......405, 448, 449
Corrosion Protection ........................433
Cruise Light ...........................131, 132
Cupholders ...............................98
Customer Assistance ........................530
Customer Programmable Features...............456
538 INDEX
Cybersecurity .............................454
Daytime Running Lights....................57, 58
Dealer Service .............................396
Defroster, Windshield........................223
Diagnostic System, Onboard...................133
Dimmer Switch
Headlight ............................57, 58
Dipsticks
Oil (Engine) ............................394
Disabled Vehicle Towing .....................381
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) .................408
Do Not Disturb ............................524
Door Ajar.............................122, 123
Door Ajar Light ........................122, 123
Drag And Drop Menu .......................453
Driver’s Seat Back Tilt ........................40
Driving..................................315
Electrical Power Outlets.......................99
Electric Brake Control System ..................139
Anti-Lock Brake System ....................138
Traction Control System ....................139
Electric Parking Brake .......................236
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) .........263
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ...............142
Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light .........122
Emergency, In Case Of
Hazard Warning Flasher ...................323
Jacking ............................354, 412
Jump Starting ...........................374
Tow Hooks .............................384
Towing ................................381
Emission Control System Maintenance............134
Engine ..................................393
Air Cleaner .............................398
Block Heater ............................234
Break-In Recommendations .................235
Checking Oil Level .......................394
Coolant
(Antifreeze) ......................449
Cooling ...............................405
Exhaust Gas Caution ...................222, 447
Fails To Start ............................233
Flooded, Starting .........................233
Jump Starting ...........................374
Oil ............................396, 448, 449
Oil Filler Cap ........................393, 397
Oil Filter ...............................397
Oil Selection .........................396, 448
12
INDEX 539
Oil Synthetic ............................397
Overheating ............................377
Starting ...............................230
Engine Oil Viscosity.........................397
Engine Oil Viscosity Chart ....................397
Enhanced Accident Response Feature .........200, 385
Ethanol..................................445
Exhaust Gas Cautions ....................222, 447
Exhaust System ........................222, 403
Exterior Lighting............................57
Exterior Lights ..........................57, 225
Filters
Air Cleaner .............................398
Air Conditioning ......................81, 399
Engine Oil ..........................397, 449
Engine Oil Disposal .......................397
Flashers
Hazard Warning .........................323
Turn Signals ....................57, 60, 130, 225
Flash-To-Pass ............................57, 58
Flooded Engine Starting ......................233
Floor Console ..............................98
Fluid, Brake ..............................450
Fluid Capacities............................448
Fluid Leaks...............................225
Fluid Level Checks
Brake .................................409
Engine Oil .............................394
Fluids And Lubricants .......................449
Fog Lights..............................57, 60
Fold-Flat Seats .............................40
Folding Rear Seats ..........................43
Forward Collision Warning....................158
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle ......................379
Fuel ....................................444
Additives ..............................446
Clean Air ..............................445
Ethanol ...............................445
Filler
Cap (Gas Cap) ......................302
Gasoline ...............................444
Light .................................126
Materials Added .........................446
Methanol ..............................445
Octane Rating ........................444, 449
Specifications ...........................449
Tank Capacity ...........................448
Fuses ...................................342
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) .....................302
540 INDEX
Gasoline, Clean Air .........................445
Gasoline, (Fuel) ............................444
Gasoline, Reformulated ......................445
Gear Ranges...........................242, 248
Gear Selector Override.......................378
Glass Cleaning ............................439
Gross Axle Weight Rating.....................306
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating ...................306
GVWR ..................................304
Hazard Warning Flashers .....................323
Headlights ................................57
Automatic ..............................59
Cleaning ...............................435
Delay ..................................59
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch .........57, 58
Lights On Reminder .....................57, 59
Passing ..............................57, 58
Switch .................................57
Time Delay ...........................57, 59
Head Restraints ............................48
Head Rests ................................48
Heated Mirrors ..........................52, 55
Heater, Engine Block ........................234
High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch ......58
Hill Descent Control ........................146
Hill Descent Control Indicator .................146
Hill Start Assist ............................148
Holder, Coin...............................98
Holder, Cup ...............................98
Hood Prop ................................89
Hood Release ..............................89
Ignition ..................................24
Switch .................................24
Inside Rearview Mirror ....................52, 323
Instrument Cluster ...................104, 105, 109
Descriptions ............................130
Display .........................106, 107, 109
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning ................438
Interior Appearance Care .....................437
Interior
Fuses .............................350
Interior Lights..............................61
Introduction ................................4
In Vehicle Help
Vehicle User Guide ........................17
Inverter
Power ................................101
iPod/USB/MP3 Control......................505
12
INDEX 541
Jacking Instructions .........................357
Jack Location .............................355
Jack Operation ......................354, 357, 412
Jump Starting .............................374
Key Fob
Arm The Alarm ..........................32
Disarm The Alarm ........................32
Programming Additional Key Fobs ..........23, 31
Remote Keyless Entry ......................19
Key Fob Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry) .....21
Key Fob Programming (Remote Keyless Entry) ......23
Key-In Reminder............................26
Keyless Enter-N-Go .......................19, 35
Keys ....................................19
Replacement ..........................23, 31
Lane Change And Turn Signals ...............57, 60
Lane Change Assist .......................57, 61
LaneSense................................293
Lap/Shoulder Belts .........................171
Latches..................................225
Hood ..................................89
Leaks, Fluid ..............................225
Life Of Tires ..............................424
Liftgate ................................90, 91
Liftgate Window Wiper/Washer .................66
Light Bulbs ...............................225
Lights...................................225
AirBag.........................120, 183, 223
Automatic Headlights ......................59
Battery Saver ............................61
Brake Assist Warning ......................145
Brake Warning ..........................120
Bulb Replacement ........................329
Cruise .............................131, 132
Daytime Running .......................57, 58
Dimmer Switch, Headlight ................57, 58
Electronic Stability Program(ESP) Indicator ......123
Exterior ...............................225
Fog ...................................60
Headlights ..............................
57
Headlight Switch .........................57
High Beam ..............................58
High Beam/Low Beam Select ..............57, 58
Hill Descent Control Indicator ...............146
Instrument Cluster ........................57
Intensity Control .......................61, 62
Interior ................................61
Lights On Reminder .....................57, 59
542 INDEX
Low Fuel ..............................126
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) ..........126
Park ..................................130
Passing ..............................57, 58
Seat Belt Reminder .......................123
Security Alarm ..........................124
Service ................................329
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) .............162
Traction Control .........................145
Turn Signals ....................57, 60, 130, 225
Vanity Mirror ............................56
Warning Instrument Cluster Descriptions . . . .123, 130
Load Floor, Cargo ...........................94
Loading Vehicle............................304
Tires..................................418
Load Shed Battery Saver Mode .................117
Load Shed Battery Saver On ...................117
Load Shed Electrical Load Reduction.............117
Load Shed Intelligent Battery Sensor .............117
Locks
Auto Unlock .............................39
Child Protection ..........................39
Power Door .............................34
Low Tire Pressure System.....................162
Lubrication, Body ..........................399
Luggage Carrier ...........................101
Lug Nuts/Bolts ............................443
Maintenance ...............................88
Maintenance Free Battery .....................395
Maintenance Schedule .......................389
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) . . . .126, 134
Manual
Service ................................534
Manual Transmission ....................241, 410
Fluid Level Check ........................410
Frequency Of Fluid Change .................411
Lubricant Selection .......................410
Shift Speeds ............................242
Methanol ................................445
Mini-Trip Computer.........................119
Mirrors ..................................
52
Automatic Dimming .......................52
Heated ..............................52, 55
Outside ..............................52, 53
Rearview ............................52, 323
Vanity .................................56
Modifications/Alterations
Vehicle .................................6
Monitor, Tire Pressure System..................162
12
INDEX 543
Mopar Parts ..............................533
Multi-Function Control Lever ...................57
New Vehicle Break-In Period ..................235
Occupant Restraints.........................168
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) ..............444, 449
Oil, Engine............................396, 449
Capacity ...............................448
Change Interval .........................396
Checking ..............................394
Dipstick ...............................394
Disposal ...............................397
Filter ..............................397, 449
Filter Disposal ...........................397
Identification Logo .......................396
Materials Added To .......................397
Pressure Warning Light ....................123
Recommendation .....................396, 448
Synthetic ..............................397
Viscosity ...........................397, 448
Oil Filter, Change ..........................397
Oil Filter, Selection..........................397
Oil Pressure Light ..........................123
Onboard Diagnostic System ...................133
Operating Precautions .......................133
Operator Manual
Owner’s Manual .......................4,534
Outlet
Power .................................99
Outside Rearview Mirrors...................52, 53
Overheating, Engine ........................377
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual)...............4
Paddle Shifters ............................252
Paint Care................................433
Parking Brake .............................236
ParkSense System, Rear ......................286
Personalized Main Menu .....................453
Pets ....................................221
Placar
d, Tire And Loading Information ...........418
Power
Door Locks ..............................34
Inverter ...............................101
Liftgate ................................91
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) .............99
Sunroof ................................85
Windows ...............................82
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts ................179
Preparation For Jacking ......................357
544 INDEX
Pretensioners
Seat Belts ..............................180
Radial Ply Tires ............................422
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap).............407
Radio Frequency
General Information ................24, 30, 31, 38
Radio Operation ...........................506
Radio Remote Controls ......................504
Rain Sensitive Wiper System ...................65
Rear Camera ..............................300
Rear Cross Path............................156
Rear ParkSense System ......................286
Rear Seats, Folding ..........................43
Rear Wiper/Washer..........................66
Recreational Towing.........................314
Reformulated Gasoline.......................445
Refrigerant ...............................399
Release, Hood..............................89
Reminder, Lights On ......................57, 59
Reminder, Seat Belt .........................169
Remote Control
Starting System ...........................27
Remote Keyless Entry ........................19
Arm The Alarm ..........................32
Disarm The Alarm ........................32
Programming Additional Key Fobs ..........23, 31
Remote Sound System (Radio) Control ...........504
Remote Starting
Exit Remote Start Mode .....................29
Uconnect Customer Programmable Features ......29
Uconnect Settings .........................29
Remote Starting System .......................27
Replacement Keys ........................23, 31
Replacement Tires ..........................424
Reporting Safety Defects .....................533
Restraints, Child ...........................204
Restraints, Head ............................48
Roll Over Warning ...........................5
Roof Type Carrier ..........................101
Rotation, Tires.............................430
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle ...................223
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle .................225
Safety
Defects, Reporting .....................533
Safety, Exhaust Gas .........................222
Safety Information, Tire ......................412
Safety Tips ...............................221
Schedule, Maintenance.......................389
Seat Belt Reminder .........................123
12
INDEX 545
Seat Belts .............................169, 223
Adjustable Shoulder Belt ...................175
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage .........175
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage ......175
Child Restraints .........................204
Energy Management Feature ................180
Extender ...............................178
Front Seat .......................169, 171, 173
Inspection ..............................223
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation ................173
Lap/Shoulder Belts .......................171
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting ...............174
Operating Instructions .....................173
Pregnant Women .........................179
Pretensioners ...........................180
Rear Seat ..............................171
Reminder ..............................169
Seat Belt Extender ........................178
Seat Belt Pretensioner .....................180
Untwisting Procedure .....................174
Seat Belts Maintenance.......................437
Seats ....................................40
Adjustment .............................40
Head Restraints ..........................48
Heated .................................47
Rear Folding ..........................40, 43
Seatback Release ..........................43
Tilting .................................40
Security Alarm ..........................32, 124
Arm The System ..........................32
Disarm The System ........................32
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) ...............449
Sentry Key
Key Programming .........................31
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) ......................30
Sentry Key Replacement ....................23, 31
Service Assistance ..........................530
Service Contract ...........................532
Service
Manuals ...........................534
Settings
Personal ...............................456
Shifting
Automatic Transmission ....................247
Manual Transmission ......................241
Shift Lever Override ........................378
Shoulder Belts.............................171
Side View Mirror Adjustment ................52, 53
Signals, Turn .....................57, 60, 130, 225
Siri.....................................522
546 INDEX
SiriusXM Guardian
Vehicle Health Alert .......................521
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) ....................429
Snow Tires ...............................426
Spare Tires ............................427, 428
Spark Plugs ..............................449
Specifications
Fuel (Gasoline) ..........................449
Oil...................................449
Speed Control
Cancel ................................265
Distance Setting (ACC Only) ................266
Mode Setting (ACC Only) ..................266
Resume ...............................265
Speed Control (Cruise Control) .................263
Starting ...............................27, 230
Automatic Transmission ....................231
Button .................................24
Cold Weather ...........................232
Engine Fails To Start ......................233
Remote ................................27
Starting And Operating ......................230
Starting Procedures .........................230
Steering
Column Controls .........................57
Tilt Column .............................50
Wheel, Heated .........................50, 51
Wheel, Tilt ..............................50
Steering Wheel Audio Controls .................504
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls . . . .504
Storage...................................97
Storage, Vehicle.............................80
Stuck, Freeing .............................379
Sun Roof ...............................85, 88
Sun Visor .................................56
Supplemental Restraint System – Air Bag..........185
Sway Control, Trailer ........................150
Synthetic Engine Oil ........................397
System, Remote Starting ......................27
Telescoping Steering Column ...................50
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) ............79
T
ie Down Hooks, Cargo ....................94, 96
Tilt Steering Column .........................50
Time Delay
Headlight ............................57, 59
Tire And Loading Information Placard............418
Tire Markings .............................413
Tires..........................225, 419, 427, 431
Aging (Life Of Tires) ......................424
12
INDEX 547
Air Pressure ............................419
Chains ................................429
Changing ...........................354, 412
Compact Spare ..........................427
General Information ...................419, 427
High Speed .............................421
Inflation Pressure ........................420
Jacking ............................354, 412
Life Of Tires ............................424
Load Capacity ...........................418
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) ........127, 162
Quality Grading .........................431
Radial ................................422
Replacement ............................424
Rotation ...............................430
Safety .............................412, 419
Sizes .................................414
Snow Tires .............................426
Spare Tires ..........................427, 428
Spinning ...............................423
Trailer Towing ...........................310
Tread Wear Indicators .....................423
Wheel Nut Torque ........................443
Tire Safety Information.......................412
Tire Service Kit ............................362
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight .................309
To Open Hood .............................89
Tow Hooks
Emergency .............................384
Towing ..................................305
Disabled Vehicle .........................381
Guide .................................308
Recreational ............................314
Weight ................................308
Towing Behind A Motorhome ..................314
T
raction Control ...........................139
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) ....................150
Trailer Towing.............................305
Cooling System Tips ......................313
Minimum Requirements ....................309
Tips ..................................313
Trailer And Tongue Weight ..................309
Wiring ................................312
Trailer Towing Guide ........................308
Trailer Weight .............................308
Transaxle
Automatic .............................245
Operation ..............................245
Transfer Case
Fluid .................................450
548 INDEX
Transmission ..............................247
Automatic ..........................247, 411
Fluid .................................450
Maintenance ............................411
Manual ................................241
Transporting Pets ..........................221
Tread Wear Indicators .......................423
Turn Signals .........................57, 60, 130
Uconnect
Uconnect Settings .........................29
Uconnect Settings
Customer Programmable Features ..........29, 456
Uconnect Voice Command ....................507
Uniform Tire Quality Grades ..................431
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) Connector .....505
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt ................174
Vanity Mirrors .............................56
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) .............442
Vehicle Loading............................304
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations.................6
Vehicle Security Alarm........................32
Vehicle Storage .............................80
Vehicle User Guide
In Vehicle Help ...........................17
Navigation ..............................17
Operating Instructions ......................17
Searching User Guide ......................17
Viscosity, Engine Oil ........................397
Voice Recognition System (VR) .................507
Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster Descriptions). . . .125
Warnings And Cautions .......................6
Warnings, Roll Over ..........................5
Warranty Information .......................533
Washers, Windshield......................63, 394
Washing Vehicle ...........................436
Wheel And Wheel Tire Care ...................434
Wheel And Wheel Tire Trim ...................434
Wind Buffeting ..........................84, 88
Window Fogging ...........................80
Windows .................................82
Close ..................................82
Down .................................
82
Open ..................................82
Power .................................82
Up....................................82
Windshield Defroster ........................223
12
INDEX 549
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone
equipment must be installed properly by trained person-
nel. The following must be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly
to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.
The negative power connection should be made to body
sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.
This connection should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the
roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used
in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may
affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on
vehicles so equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interfer-
ence between the communications equipment and the
vehicle’s electronic systems.
WARNING:
Operating, servicing and maintaining a
passenger vehicle or off-road highway
motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals
including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide,
phthalates, and lead, which are known to
the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive harm.
To minimize exposure, avoid breathing
exhaust, do not idle the engine except as
necessary, service your vehicle in a
well-ventilated area and wear gloves or
wash your hands frequently when servicing
your vehicle. For more information go to
www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
Compass
OWNER’S MANUAL
Second Edition
Printed in the U.S.A.
19MP-126-AB
©2018 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved.
Jeep is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC.
2019
Compass
2019
